Quarterlytics / Communication Services / Entertainment / Hollywood Bowl Group

Hollywood Bowl Group

bowl · LSE Communication Services
Claim this profile
Ticker bowl
Exchange LSE
Sector Communication Services
Industry Entertainment
Employees 1001-5000
← All annual reports
FY2020 Annual Report · Hollywood Bowl Group
Sign in to download
Loading PDF…
A

RESILIENT
RESILIENT
RESILIENT

and

ADAPTABLE 
ADAPTABLE 
ADAPTABLE 

Business

ANNUAL REPORT AND ACCOUNTS 2020

OUR PURPOSE
OUR PURPOSE

Bringing families and friends together for affordable fun and safe, healthy competition.

Hollywood Bowl Group is the UK’s largest ten-pin bowling operator. We have 64 centres 
across the UK, each equipped with an average of 24 bowling lanes (or three mini-golf 
courses), a licensed bar, a diner and an amusements zone featuring the latest games 
designed to keep everyone entertained.

Overview of estate and 
new centre pipeline

CURRENTLY

6464

CENTRES

77

NEW OPENINGS BY END 
OF FY2024

key

Hollywood Bowl

AMF Bowling

Puttstars centres 

Pipeline centres

Central support office

56

5

3

7

1

2022

2021

2023

2022

2023

2024

2024

WE OPERATE A HIGH-QUALITY PORTFOLIO OF WELL-LOCATED CENTRES AND 
HAVE A STRONG NEW CENTRE PIPELINE TO 2024
Our centres are typically co-located with cinema and casual dining restaurants, 
in large, high-footfall, edge of town leisure and retail developments.

Contents

FINANCIAL summary

Strategic Report
Chairman’s statement 
CEO’s review 
COVID-19 response 
Market review 
Our business model 
Our stakeholders   
Section 172 
Our strategic objectives 
Key financial 
performance indicators 
Principal risks 
Going Concern and Viability 
statement 
Finance review 
Sustainability report 

2
4
8
10
12
14
16
18

24
26

30
32
38

Governance
Chairman’s introduction 
43
44
Board of Directors 
Corporate Governance report  46
Report of the 
Nomination Committee 
51
Report of the Audit Committee  53
Report of the Remuneration 
Committee 
57
Directors’ Remuneration Policy  60
Annual report on remuneration  63
Directors’ Report 
71
Statement of Directors’ 
responsibilities 
Independent auditor’s report 

74
75

Financial Statements
Consolidated income 
statement and statement 
of comprehensive income  
Consolidated statement 
of financial position 
Consolidated statement 
of changes in equity 
Consolidated statement 
of cash flows 
Notes to the Financial 
Statements 
Company statement 
of financial position 
Company statement 
of changes in equity 
Company statement 
of cash flows 
Notes to the Company 
Financial Statements 
Company information 

84

85

86

87

88

112

113

113

114
119

LFL Revenue growth1

REVENUE

+0.4%

2019: +5.5%

£79.5M

2019: £129.9M

toTAL AVERAGE SPEND PER GAME1

profit after tax

£10.15

2019: £9.64

£1.4M

2019: £22.3M

OPERATING PROFIT MARGIN

GROUP ADJUSTED EBITDA1

12.4%

2019: 21.9%

£14.0M

2019: £38.2M

dividends since ipo

earnings per share

£47.7M

0.90 PENCE

2019: 14.86 PENCE

1  Definitions for these measures are in the key performance indicators section (pages 24 and 25). 
Management believe providing these specific financial highlights gives valuable supplemental 
detail regarding the Group’s results, consistent with how management evaluate the Group’s 
performance. A reconciliation between Group adjusted EBITDA (pre IFRS 16) and statutory 
operating profit is provided on page 34.

OPERATIONAL summary
Customer-focused strategy and ongoing rollout of new initiatives underpinned 
excellent H1 pre-COVID performance
  Three Hollywood Bowl refurbishments completed
  Three new Puttstars centres and one new Hollywood Bowl centre successfully opened, 

bringing the total estate to 64

  Continued rollout of new scoring system – now in 44 centres
  ‘Pins on strings’ now in 18 centres
  Positive results from extension of dynamic pricing, enhanced amusement offering and 

increased performance from digital channels

Significant challenges both operationally and financially during H2 effectively dealt with 
by management with strong trading in the intervening period between lockdowns

All centres closed on 20 March following government directive, with cost-reduction 
plans implemented to minimise cash outflows during closure period
  Management acted quickly and effectively to support the welfare of team members 

and customers

  Business re-engineered to emerge from the crisis with a strong balance sheet following 

equity placing, landlord negotiations and increased revolving credit facility

  Renewed focus on sales, service and safety superiority

The Group led the sector response with the development of COVID-secure operating 
guidelines for safe reopening and ‘new normal’ innovation
  98% of estate safely reopened in the summer (Wales, 4 August; England, 15 August; 
Scotland, 24 August) with excellent customer feedback for new operating measures 
  Trading exceeded expectations with cash positive months in August and September
  Strong balance sheet and strong cash generation continue to underpin our 

business model

1

GOVERNANCEFINANCIAL STATEMENTSANNUAL REPORT AND ACCOUNTS 2020STRATEGIC REPORTCHAIRMAN’S STATEMENT

A DYNAMIC

RESPONSE TO A
CHALLENGING YEAR
CHALLENGING YEAR
CHALLENGING YEAR

The second five months of the year took 
us into unprecedented territory, with a total 
national lockdown. The immediate priorities 
of team member welfare and liquidity 
were uppermost in the thoughts of the 
senior leadership team. A combination 
of a capital raise through the issue and 
sale of 7.5m shares and the securing of 
a £10m revolving credit facility (RCF) under 
the Coronavirus Large Business Interruption 
Loan Scheme (CLBILS), plus the low level of 
net debt present in the Group, created good 
protection for our medium-term viability.

The Group received further government 
support under the Coronavirus Job 
Retention Scheme (CJRS) as it furloughed 
98.6 per cent of the total team. This brought 
the payroll to a manageable level and the 
remaining team members proved their 
remarkable adaptability by putting their 
‘can-do’ approach into action in taking on 
a wider range of duties, including ensuring all 
centres were COVID-secure prior to opening. 

Through the proactive, direct approach to 
our landlords, we secured agreements that 
protected our rent position with the majority 
of our landlords. 

The period of closure was put to good use. 
We used it as an opportunity to take a good 
look at the business, allowing us to push 
forward several important projects. We also 
successfully reviewed our operational 
structure and agreed processes to ensure 
that when we reopened, we would hit the 
ground running with all the required safety 
measures in place.

Reopening has not been without its 
challenges. Notwithstanding the significant 
delay to restrictions being lifted for bowling, 
and the disappointment at the false start, 
our comprehensive planning enabled 
us to reopen successfully. 

Peter Boddy

NON-EXECUTIVE CHAIRMAN

  Read biography  
on page 44

My Chairman’s Statement last year 
concluded with this paragraph: “I look 
forward to the year ahead with great 
enthusiasm and optimism. We are well 
placed to increase shareholder value 
through the continued execution of our 
customer-led strategy, planned effective 
investment and our highly motivated 
and engaged team.”

Without our highly motivated and engaged 
team, the year that unfolded could have 
been significantly worse. I would like to 
thank the entire team, in particular the 
senior leadership team of Darryl, Mel, Mat, 
Laurence and Stephen, for their outstanding 

efforts in the face of extremely challenging 
and testing circumstances.

The year can be divided into three distinct 
parts: normal trading, total closure and then 
finally reopening and trading with COVID-
secure measures and restrictions.

The first five months of the financial year 
delivered strong financial and operational 
performance with the continued execution 
of our customer-led strategy, delivering 
returns from product innovations, 
new centre openings and the ongoing 
refurbishment programme. At that point, 
revenue was up 12.5 per cent and like-for-
like revenue was up 9.4 per cent.

2

HOLLYWOOD BOWL GROUP PLC 
We continue to put our efforts into 
engagement with the Department of 
Digital, Culture, Media & Sport (DCMS) 
and the Treasury to extend the VAT 
reduction available to the leisure sector, 
to bowling operators. We see this as 
crucial in ensuring a level playing field 
for leisure operators.

Since reopening with our comprehensive 
COVID-secure measures, performance 
to 30 September 2020 exceeded our 
expectations – trading at 66 per cent 
of prior year revenue levels. However, 
the introduction of tiered COVID alert 
systems in England and Scotland has 
created further customer confusion 
which had an impact on trading. 
We continue to proactively communicate 
with customers on a location-by-location 
basis to keep them up to date and, 
where possible, to reassure them that 
we are open. Despite all these challenges, 
we are able to report the Group was 
cash positive for the final two months 
of FY2020 and first month of FY2021, 
prior to the November lockdown.

We have learned more since reopening 
about how we can operate safely within 
a COVID-secure environment for our 
customers and team members, while 
finding new ways to increase capacity 
and open more lanes. We continue to 
listen to customers and team members 
to adapt, test and trial new ideas – some 
of which will be rolled out before the end 
of 2020 based on the excellent feedback 
we have had.

Despite the pandemic, for the year 
under review, we reported a profit of 
£1.4m. In line with previous announcements, 
we have suspended all dividend payments 
until such time that we return to trading 
levels which allow us to confidently 
reintroduce them.

Despite the disjointed nature of the 
year, we have adhered to our strategy 
and continued to invest in, and develop, 
both our teams and our assets. The most 
significant development was the opening 
of the three Puttstars mini-golf centres, 
in Leeds, York and Rochdale. I am pleased 
to report that despite the pandemic, the 
centres have traded in line with pre-
COVID expectations. We are excited about 
the future opportunity for Puttstars and 
are already exploring additional sites 
for expansion.

We also opened a new bowling centre in 
York. This centre is particularly exciting 
for us. It contains all of our latest digital 

developments – screens and scoring, 
including enhanced VIP lanes, demonstrating 
that there is still opportunity to innovate and 
develop the customer offer. The new centre 
is co-located with a Puttstars, which will 
give us further insight into potential future 
co-locations. 

Our refurbishment programme continues, 
too. Although our overall refurbishment 
spend in FY2020 was lower than we 
had planned as a result of the pandemic, 
significant investments were made at 
Crawley, Sheffield and Watford Woodside. 
These centres now have an inspiring 
contemporary feel and have also been 
repurposed for additional machines and/or 
additional lanes by combining the bar and 
diner, refinements which also create more 
space and efficiencies for the customer. 
In addition to these refurbishments, we have 
rebranded Carlisle from AMF to Hollywood 
Bowl which has had a very positive impact 
on the customer experience. 

Investment continues with ‘Pins on strings’ 
and the upgrade of the scoring system. 
Both investments deliver tangible benefits 
to the customer, through performance and 
simplicity of use, and ongoing returns for the 
Group. This level of sustained investment in 
the existing portfolio of centres underpins 
our future performance and reinforces the 
benefits of adopting and executing a clearly 
defined strategy.

This year has been dominated by COVID-19, 
the unprecedented impact it has had on 
the hospitality and leisure sector, and the 
challenges that we have had to deal with. 
Throughout this whole period, I remain 
impressed and inspired by the resilience 
and adaptability of the wider team within 
our Group. This was best illustrated by the 
manner in which we reopened our centres 
and recommenced trading in August in such 
an efficient and positive way, with so many 
examples of a ‘can do’ attitude and ‘above 
and beyond’ personal performance. 

And whilst at the time of writing we are not 
yet able to operate all of our centres due to 
the government tiered restrictions, I firmly 
believe that the spirit and enthusiasm of 
our people makes us well placed to move 
forward and rediscover the success that has 
become synonymous with Hollywood Bowl.

PETER BODDY
NON-EXECUTIVE CHAIRMAN

OUR INVESTMENT 
CASE

MARKET-LEADING OPERATOR 
WITH NATIONAL SCALE
With 64 centres, Hollywood Bowl 
Group operates a high-quality, well-
invested estate led by an experienced 
management team

CUSTOMER-FOCUSED
Revitalising ten-pin bowling and 
indoor mini-golf experiences, 
and driving engagement levels 
and revenue through strong 
customer-focused insight, product 
innovation and continuous 
operational improvement

CORE FOCUS ON TEAM AND 
CULTURE
Our customer-focused culture 
promotes consistent behaviours 
and attitudes from the best people, 
attracted, retained and nurtured 
through talent management and 
incentive programmes

DIVERSIFIED REVENUE 
STREAMS
We offer a complete entertainment 
experience for our customers. 
Bowling and mini-golf accounts for 
half of Group revenue – amusements, 
food and drink make up the other half

MULTIPLE LEVERS TO DRIVE 
FURTHER GROWTH
Strong returns and excellent 
customer feedback through ongoing 
refurbishments and customer 
innovations. A strong new centre 
pipeline is backed by a disciplined 
and rigorous site selection process 
for both bowling locations and the 
new Puttstars mini-golf brand

MARKET OPPORTUNITY
Current ten-pin bowling and mini-
golf penetration, usage rates and 
price position in the competitive 
socialising and leisure sectors 
support future expansion and 
organic growth when the impact 
of COVID-19 diminishes

resilient and adaptable 
business
Consistent historical strong financial 
performance and returns, driven 
by an ongoing capital investment 
programme, unrelenting focus 
on the customer experience and 
the ability to adapt decisively to 
market conditions

3

GOVERNANCEFINANCIAL STATEMENTSANNUAL REPORT AND ACCOUNTS 2020STRATEGIC REPORTCEO’s Review

DELIVERING ON

our strategy
RESPONSIBLY
RESPONSIBLY
RESPONSIBLY

Stephen Burns

CHIEF EXECUTIVE OFFICER

  Read biography  
on page 44

Operational and Financial 
Highlights
  Pre-COVID trading ahead of expectations 

with significant cash generation 

  Rapid lockdown of the estate, following 

UK government announcement; 
  All centres closed on 20 March 2020;
  Cost-reduction plans implemented to 
minimise cash outflows during closure 
  Strengthened balance sheet with equity 
placing completed, net proceeds of 
£10.5m and £10m CLBILS secured 

  Development of COVID-secure operating 
protocols in preparation for the reopening 
of the estate during August 

  Majority of centres reopened, with 
significant capacity restrictions, 
immediately following the lifting of local 
restrictions (Wales, 4 August; England, 
15 August; Scotland, 24 August) 

  Revenues from 15 August to 

30 September were 66 per cent of prior 
year on a like-for-like basis (LFL), with full 
year profit of £1.4m

  Cash flow positive in August, September 

and October 2020

  Net debt of £8.7m at 30 September 

2020; liquidity of £31.8m

  Four new centres opened in FY2020

FY2021 Outlook 
  Centre reopenings in line with the 
regional tier system restrictions
  Q1 completion of rollout of new 

innovative COVID-secure measures

Chief Executive’s Review 
The COVID-19 pandemic forced the closure 
of the entire Hollywood Bowl Group estate 
on 20 March 2020 and we were one of the 
few sectors to remain closed through to 
mid-August, resulting in nearly five months 
of lost revenue. The Group entered the global 

average spend per game

£10.15

2019: £9.64 (+5.3%)

like-for-like revenue

+0.4%

2019: +5.5%

4

HOLLYWOOD BOWL GROUP PLC 
crisis in a strong financial position following 
a successful trading period over the first 
half of the financial year. We have always 
maintained a prudent approach to financing; 
a strategy that proved to be the right one 
when we entered the crisis with a low 
leverage with net debt of £14.6m and net 
debt: Group adjusted EBITDA (pre IFRS 16) 
of 0.38x at 31 March 2020. 

With no possibility of online trading, 
takeaway offer or any clear idea as to 
how long we would be required to remain 
closed, we needed to act quickly and 
decisively as a team to protect and bolster 
the balance sheet. The prolonged period of 
closure meant zero revenue which resulted 
in a very challenging time, even for a healthy 
business such as ours. In response, we made 
significant operating cost reductions and 
central cost savings, negotiated hard with 
our landlords, and secured increased liquidity 
with a new £10m RCF under CLBILS and 
£10.5m net proceeds via an equity placing. 

Once we had secured financial stability 
for a sustained period of closure, we led the 
sector in developing the operational protocols 
required to reopen the centres. With reduced 
capacity, the team resourcing, marketing 
and technology requirements also needed 
reworking and refining, ensuring that the 
business reopened with sales, service and 
safety superiority as the core objectives. 

Our response to COVID-19
Our immediate focus at the onset of the 
pandemic was on securing our properties 
and reassuring our team, a team I would 
like to take this opportunity to thank for their 
incredible hard work and dedication over 
the course of the last 12 months. One of the 
good things about running a business that can 
see unexpected disruptions to trade due to 
extreme weather, is our tried, tested and well-
practised ability to make significant changes 
to our operating model at short notice. 

Prior to the government making any 
announcements, we monitored what 
was happening in the countries that were 
ahead of the UK curve, and started planning 
for the inevitable lockdown. On 16 March, 
when the social distancing measures were 
first introduced, we already had a detailed 
plan of how we would operate within the 
guidelines and had trained our team on how 
to implement the measures. When the full 
closure was announced, we put phase two 
of our plan in motion. This phase included 
an itemised closedown procedure that could 
be reversed later for a smooth reopening. 
We quickly ‘turned off’ all discretionary 
spending and acted to preserve and 
raise cash.

we have always maintained 
a prudent approach to 
financing; that strategy 
proved to be the right 
one when we entered 
the crisis with a low 
leverAged balance sheet.

We were grateful for the swift response by 
government and made full use of the CJRS. 
We chose to pay all our team full pay for 
the first four weeks of lockdown and paid 
our salaried teams and management 
trainees full pay to the end of May, with some 
enforced holiday to relieve the post-opening 
burden. We also put in place a plan for salary 
cuts and deferrals from July, including for 
executive and non-executive directors, in 
preparation for a potentially longer lockdown 
period, giving our team the certainty and 
clarity they needed to plan their finances.

Refurbishments and new build work were 
paused and we reviewed all planned projects, 
prioritising capital spend on projects that 
guaranteed payback.

We took the decision to pay the March rent 
quarter in full and to engage early with our 
landlords in order to agree to defer and, or, 
waive payments during the period of closure. 

The cash flow benefit of these agreements 
resulted in a cash saving of £6.7m in the year 
to 30 September 2020, of which £2.1m is 
waived and not due for repayment. 

We further strengthened the balance sheet 
by raising £10.5m (net proceeds) from a five 
per cent equity placing and are grateful for 
the support shown by our shareholders in this 
capital raise. At the same time, we added a 
£10m extension to our debt facility through an 
RCF using CLBILS – which remains undrawn.

Operational and strategic 
progress
The results for FY2020 were substantially 
impacted by the five months of closure. 
Revenues were £79.5m, down 38.8 per cent 
on last year and Group adjusted EBITDA 

pre IFRS 16, was £14.0m (FY2019: £38.2m). 
These figures are despite delivering a fantastic 
performance over the first half of FY2020, 
before the COVID-19 crisis, with all revenue 
lines in LFL growth compared to the same 
period last year, spend per game up and 
Group adjusted EBITDA pre IFRS 16 up 
2.1 per cent, to £21.6m.

The business resumed trading during August, 
under the new COVID-secure guidelines, 
with significant restrictions to capacity 
and opening hours. Encouragingly, during 
the final few weeks of the summer school 
holidays, we had far more demand than 
we could accommodate. Trading over the 
final weeks of FY2020 was at 66 per cent 
of prior year on a LFL basis. This was in 
spite of the restrictions noted, as well as the 
10:00pm curfew, rule of six and tier system, 
all introduced during September 2020.

While the pandemic stopped us trading, 
it did not stop us innovating – we executed 
elements of our strategy to improve the 
quality of the estate and the experience 
we offer our customers.

Once construction teams were permitted 
back on site, during June 2020, we completed 
the refurbishment of our Crawley centre, 
which included adding two extra lanes as 
well as relocating the diner to allow expansion 
of the amusement area. We also refurbished 
and rebranded the AMF Carlisle centre in time 
for reopening. We took the opportunity that 
lockdown presented to continue the rollout 
of ‘Pins on strings’, installing the technology 
in three centres during June and July, adding 
to the four installations completed during 
the first half.

5

GOVERNANCEFINANCIAL STATEMENTSANNUAL REPORT AND ACCOUNTS 2020STRATEGIC REPORTCEO’s Review
continued

We also did not stop at refurbishments and 
the rebrand. We opened four new centres – 
one Hollywood Bowl in York and three new 
Puttstars centres. York’s Hollywood Bowl 
is located in the new leisure extension to 
the successful Vangarde Way retail scheme, 
co-located with our Puttstars, a Cineworld 
cinema and multiple restaurants. The 28,000 
square feet centre has 24 lanes, opened on 
18 August 2020 and is trading in line with the 
rest of the estate.

We had originally planned to further develop 
the new opening Puttstars pipeline, but the 
pandemic has impacted a number of property 
developers which has slowed negotiations. 
Three new openings have been delayed, with 
the schemes in Swindon and Colchester now 
under review. With the changes to the retail 
landscape and availability of space, we believe 
there will be new opportunities to backfill 
the pipeline and remain confident that from 
FY2022, we will be able to open an average 
of two new centres per year in line with our 
stated strategy.

Sustainability 
Despite these challenging times, managing 
our business in a sustainable manner remains 
a key element of our culture and strategy.

Our customers benefit from our unique 
offering of affordable, inclusive fun which 
allows for quality social engagement and 
has been essential in our communities as 
we have started to emerge from blanket 
lockdowns. Our ongoing team engagement 
and feedback programmes have been vital 
during the periods of closure and we have 
maintained strong focus on team wellbeing.

We are always looking for ways to minimise 
the impact of our operations on the 
environment and finished our second solar 
installation in Bentley Bridge with further 
centres planned for the future. In our 
refurbishment and new centre openings there 
is increased focus on the use of sustainable 
construction supplies and we are making 
progress towards meeting our 70% recycling 
target by the end of FY2021.

Successful launch of new 
Puttstars mini-golf brand 
We are very proud of having opened our new 
Puttstars concept during FY2020. The three 
centres were carefully chosen to ensure a 
robust test of the concept and reflect the 
different types of property location available 
for a rollout once the trials proved successful.

Outlook
The Hollywood Bowl Group is uniquely 
positioned. Offering a safe, fantastic 
value-for-money experience to a wide 
demographic, the business is resilient in 
a recession, well capitalised and ready to 
take full advantage of the opportunities that 
may present themselves after the pandemic.

Puttstars Leeds opened first. It is a key 
leisure anchor, alongside an Odeon Luxe and 
PureGym, in the new Springs retail and leisure 
development adjacent to Junction 46 of the 
M1 at Thorpe Park. Puttstars Leeds which 
occupies 21,000 square feet over two floors, 
opened its doors just before the national 
lockdown and reopened during July.

Puttstars Rochdale is sited in a new leisure 
extension to the Riverside development, 
immediately beneath a new cinema and close 
to several restaurants. The centre occupies 
18,000 square feet, all on one level and 
opened for trade in early August.

Our third centre is co-located with the new 
Hollywood Bowl in York. Like Rochdale, it 
occupies 18,000 square feet and is on the 
floor above the bowling centre.

Early trading has been encouraging, with 
all three centres performing in line with our 
expectations. The bespoke scoring system, 
gamification and digital journey combine 
with an affordable price to offer a unique 
leisure experience that appeals to a wide 
demographic. Customer feedback has been 
overwhelmingly positive and we are very 
excited about the long-term opportunities 
the brand presents.

I am proud of the way our team has 
risen to the challenge of creating a safe 
environment which allows our customers 
to enjoy the same fun-filled experiences 
with us. The strong demand for bookings 
following the opening in August 2020, is 
very encouraging and the feedback we have 
received on our new COVID-secure operations 
has been excellent. We continue to explore 
new ways of working to increase our capacity 
at peak times whilst maintaining a safe and 
compliant environment. Despite the ongoing 
uncertainty presented by Lockdown 2.0 and 
the introduction of variable regional opening 
restrictions, which have meant we are unable 
to open centres located in the highest 
tiers, we remain confident in the continued 
demand for a family focused, value for-money 
and enjoyable experience.

The longer-term strategy remains unchanged: 
our high-quality, well-invested estate is 
primed for growth; the property landscape 
is changing; the tenant mix is becoming 
more leisure focused; and we believe our 
customers will prioritise their leisure pound 
on all-inclusive, value-for-money, family 
entertainment experiences.

6

STEPHEN BURNS
CHIEF EXECUTIVE OFFICER

Q
&
A

In conversation with

Stephen Burns, CEO

Laurence Keen, CFO

&AQHOLLYWOOD BOWL GROUP PLC Q The pandemic has overshadowed 

everyone’s year. What has been its biggest 
challenge for Hollywood Bowl? 

while creating a fun, friendly and safe 
environment for our customers to enjoy. 
We are very grateful to the government for 
the furlough scheme, which has enabled 
us to preserve so many of our team’s jobs.

 SB         We’d had a really strong start to 

the year and although we understood it 
was necessary at the time, the hardest 
thing, without a doubt, was closing our 
doors with no idea as to when we might 
be able to reopen them. We could see the 
lockdown coming and had prepared for it, 
but I don’t think any of us expected that 
our centres would have to remain closed 
for nearly five months. We were delighted 
to reopen again to happy team members, 
and our customers enjoying having a 
safe and fun environment to relax in 
with their families.

 Q When do you expect performance to 

recover to pre-COVID levels?

 LK         Although we remain optimistic for 

a gradual return to more recognisable 
market conditions in 2021, it is too 
soon to make forecasts. We have 
been very encouraged by trading after 
reopening in August and by the strength 
of demand from customers, albeit we 
have been operating at reduced capacity 
in compliance with the COVID-secure 
measures. However, we have learned 
a great deal more about how we can 
maintain a safe space for our customers 
while increasing our capacity and we 
have invested in rolling out new safety 
measures across our centres, including 
lane dividers installed in all of our centres 
by December. These will enable us to 
better fulfil customer demand as our 
centres reopen in line with the regional 
tiered system following the second 
national lockdown in November.

 Q Your team have never seen a year 

like it. How have they responded to 
the challenges?

 Q Puttstars sounds highly promising. 

How fast are you planning to ramp up 
its rollout?

 SB         We’ve been really pleased with 

how Puttstars has performed, particularly 
given the current context. The feedback 
from customers has been excellent and, 
so far, we have once again successfully 
applied our customer-led operating 
model to provide another great value-
for-money activity. We are excited 
about the opportunity and currently 
have several new sites under review for 
our development pipeline, but we have 
always taken a prudent approach to our 
business and will continue to test and 
develop the concept to drive sustainable, 
profitable growth.

 Q How much disruption have the year’s 

events brought to your refurbishment and 
new centre pipeline?

were not able to complete as many 
refurbishments as we had planned 
for the year but our commitment to 
the refurbishment strategy remains 
the same – only the pace of the 
rollout has changed. We continue 
to consider the best use of our cash 
and have conservatively planned to 
complete five refurbishments in FY2021. 
Our commitment to opening new centres 
has not changed, either, but there has 
been some delay in the pipeline as 
a result of the pandemic disrupting 
developers. Such delay is beyond our 
control, but we continue to pursue new 
centre opportunities for Hollywood Bowl 
and Puttstars.

 SB         Brilliantly! I’d like to thank each and 

every one of our team for their individual 
and collective efforts. We’ve said many 
times before that our team are core to 
our success and this is truer today than 
ever before. Team members have played 
a fundamental role in our handling of the 
pandemic, from preparing to reopen and 
adapting to the new ways of working, to 
the taking on of additional tasks – all the 

 Q What about M&A opportunities in 

bowling or leisure activities?

 LK         It’s too soon to tell what the 

opportunities may be. The equity placing 
completed in April strengthened our 
balance sheet allowing us to emerge from 
the first lockdown in a robust enough 
position to invest in any value-enhancing 

opportunities should they arise. However, 
as you’ll appreciate, we are highly focused 
on our existing business at the moment.

  Q Looking beyond the immediate future, 

do you see COVID-19 having any lasting 
impact on the business?

 SB         Interestingly, it reinforced the 

importance of activities offered by our 
business – families were crying out for 
a change of scene, for somewhere safe 
and fun to go. Some of the feedback 
we’ve received since reopening has made 
us realise more than ever the valuable 
role we play in our communities. A number 
of the operational changes we made 
have enhanced our service proposition; 
the simplified menu improving speed of 
service, and lane dividers giving a more 
premium feel.

 Q As part of the measures to protect 

Hollywood Bowl during the pandemic, 
you suspended the dividend. Do you 
expect to reinstate it anytime soon? 
And do you think you’ll be in a position 
to pay a special dividend again in the 
foreseeable future? 

bolster our balance sheet and we are 
a cash-generative business, but it is still 
too early to make predictions given the 
ongoing uncertainty relating to COVID-19. 
The Board continues to assess the most 
suitable use of the Group’s financial 
resources to enhance shareholder 
returns, including the investment in 
new and existing centres, and we remain 
committed to resuming our stated capital 
allocation policy as soon as appropriate.

 Q What are your priorities for FY2021?
 SB         They remain the same as they 

have always been. Our well-proven 
prudent approach, and the strength 
of our business, stood us in good stead 
when we really needed our strong 
foundations. Our focus remains on 
keeping Hollywood Bowl in as robust 
shape as is possible. By doing so, we can 
continue to look after our team members, 
grow the business and deliver value to our 
shareholders while investing in the best 
possible customer experience.

7

 LK         Given the lockdown, we obviously 

 LK         The equity placing helped to 

GOVERNANCEFINANCIAL STATEMENTSANNUAL REPORT AND ACCOUNTS 2020STRATEGIC REPORTCOVID-19 RESPONSE 

Decisive action
IN CHALLENGING 
IN CHALLENGING 
IN CHALLENGING 
CIRCUMSTANCES
CIRCUMSTANCES
CIRCUMSTANCES

The COVID-19 pandemic and associated operating 
restrictions are the biggest challenges Hollywood 
Bowl has faced in its history.

However, since the crisis began, the Group has taken fast and decisive 
action, focusing on the following priorities:

  Protecting the health, safety and wellbeing of our team members and 

of the communities in which we operate 

  Ensuring our business operations have been able to reopen with 

minimal disruption 

  Protecting the financial strength of the Group

OPERATIONAL RESPONSE – 
PROTECTING HEALTH AND 
WELLBEING
The Group focused heavily on team 
member welfare during the closure period 
introducing a three-stage salary strategy 
to reduce costs, retain top talent and 
financially support team members.

In order to maintain team member 
engagement during the closure period, 
we also introduced a variety of initiatives 
including regular virtual Q&A sessions 
with our leadership team, an employee 

20 MARCH
  Government announces pub/gym/leisure closures
  All centres close from 7pm – stock removed and made safe and 

all amusement machines emptied

23 MARCH
  Deep clean of centres completed, long-life products replenished, 

and cash removed from centres

  Centre teams furloughed
  Government announces full lockdown

24 MARCH
  Centres mothballed, new centre construction and refurbishment 

work paused

  Majority of support team furloughed

March

16 MARCH
  Government announces social distancing measures

17 MARCH
  Hollywood Bowl closes every other lane, removes 50% of bar 

furniture and turns off 50% of amusements

  Cash flow forecast produced and discussions with lenders commence

18 MARCH
  Team members have temperature checks and closedown strategy 

put in place

8

april – JUly

17 APRIL
  Equity placing raises £10.5m (net proceeds)

29 APRIL
  June quarter (and beyond) rent negotiations commence 

with landlords

7 MAY
  Extended RCF secured under CLBILS

HOLLYWOOD BOWL GROUP PLCassistance programme, pin badge incentives, 
centre and departmental quiz nights and 
regular posts on our team member app.

To prepare our team appropriately for 
reopening, we took a number of key actions 
including virtual training for all levels of 
the management team to ensure we ‘hit 
the ground running’. Team incentives and 
a bonus scheme were introduced on 
reopening to really get people on board 
with the revised ways of working.

Large quantities of personal protective 
equipment (PPE) – including gloves and 
face coverings, hygiene stations and Perspex 
shielding – were secured for team members 
and customers.

FINANCIAL RESPONSE – CASH 
PLANNING AND REFINANCING
The Group reacted with pace and urgency 
in a variety of ways in order to conserve 
cash flow.

98.6 per cent of team members were 
furloughed within the first week of closure.

Construction work on all new builds and 
refurbishment projects were deferred.

Full payment of rent for the March quarter 
led to a strong negotiating position for 
the June quarter, with rent-free periods 
negotiated with a significant proportion 
of landlords.

The Board gave notice that no interim 
dividend was to be paid for H1 FY2020 and 
the Group agreed an extended RCF, which 
combined with the relaxing of covenants 

16 JULY
  DCMS approve sector COVID-secure operating guidelines 

following significant engagement

28 JULY
  Centre teams unfurloughed and centres prepared for 

1 August reopening

31 JULY
  With less than 24 hours’ notice, government delays reopening 

by two weeks

and the five per cent equity placing, 
strengthened the liquidity position.

management (CRM) campaigns and website 
pre-visit information.

Utilising government schemes including 
rates and VAT Time to Pay, resulted in cash 
savings of £5.9m for FY2020.

CENTRE REOPENING  
– A ROBUST STRATEGY
The Group was instrumental in developing 
the government-approved COVID-secure 
guidelines for the sector, working with the 
sector trade body and DCMS. Importantly, 
the internal size of our centres provides the 
required space to adhere to the sector, and 
wider hospitality sector, guidelines.

Using the guidelines, which included 
reducing customer capacity in the centres, 
we initially adapted our customer journey to 
include only using alternate lanes/golf holes/
amusement machines, pre-booking only 
for peak periods, queue control measures, 
increased distance between bar and diner 
tables, and a new visual guidance campaign 
– ‘Have Fun – Play Safe’ – to educate 
customers about our social distancing 
protocols and to encourage customers to 
follow them.

In addition, comprehensive safety, cleaning 
and operational protocols were introduced 
along with daily health monitoring for team 
members. We reduced our food and drink 
menu (also available as pre-booked options) 
to simplify operational delivery whilst 
protecting margin. To attract customers 
and inform them about our new COVID-
secure measures, we established a relaunch 
marketing programme that included 
digital advertising, customer relationship 

The Group successfully reopened its bowling 
centres, excluding those subject to local 
restrictions, in August. Initial trading to 
30 September 2020 exceeded expectations 
at 66 per cent of prior year revenue, with 
restricted capacity, 10:00pm curfews, 
localised lockdowns and smaller group 
sizes impacting this performance.

Despite the challenging environment, we 
have experienced strong customer demand, 
at levels similar to last year for holiday 
and weekend periods, and the majority of 
centres have traded at maximum capacity 
levels (as permitted by government 
guidance) with the Group being cash 
positive for both August and September. 

The positive feedback from returning 
customers has been very encouraging, 
particularly regarding the new safety 
measures. The Group continues to listen 
closely to its customers and teams to adapt, 
test and trial further new operating initiatives 
such as full height lane dividers to mitigate 
centre capacity restrictions, with the primary 
priority of ensuring customers and team 
members continue to feel safe. The Group 
intends to roll out a number of these new 
COVID-secure initiatives estate-wide before 
the end of November 2020.

Read more on:

Principal Risks on pages 26 - 29

Going concern and viability statement 
on pages 30 and 31

21 SEPTEMBER
  Additional year added to banking facilities (to September 2022)

23 OCTOBER
  Welsh centres close under national lockdown measures 

(reopened 9 November)

2 NOVEMBER
  Scottish centres close under new tier system

5 NOVEMBER
  English centres close under national lockdown (reopened 

2 December in Tier 1 and 2)

AUGUST – december

4 AUGUST
  Centres in Wales reopen at 50% capacity

15 AUGUST
  Centres in England reopen at 50% capacity. Significant media 

presence achieved for the brand including national TV 
interviews for the reopening weekend

24 AUGUST
  Centres in Scotland reopen at 50% capacity

1 SEPTEMBER
  Lane divider and other capacity-increasing measures trialled

9

GOVERNANCEFINANCIAL STATEMENTSANNUAL REPORT AND ACCOUNTS 2020STRATEGIC REPORT 
market review

STRONG LEVELS OF HISTORICAL 
GROWTH

EMERGENCE OF COMPETITIVE 
SOCIALISING

The opportunity
The ten-pin bowling market forms a small, 
but historically fast-growing, part of the 
UK’s increasingly diverse ‘out of home’ 
leisure sector, offering a competitively 
priced experience and broad customer 
appeal. It is estimated that the UK ten-pin 
bowling market was worth £311m1 in 2018.

As with the wider UK leisure market, 
growth in ten-pin bowling (prior to the 
COVID-19 pandemic) was driven by 
macroeconomic factors, as well as the 
spending shift towards experiential leisure.

The opportunity
An important trend supporting the recent 
growth in the leisure sector is that consumers 
are increasingly preferring to share 
experiences with friends, families and 
colleagues rather than spend money 
on material items. 

Participation and social competition 
are important elements of social capital. 
We have seen this shaping how consumers 
allocate their discretionary budget and 
leisure time as they seek to create more 
enjoyment in life and more fun-filled 
memories to share, with each other 
and on social media.

LOW MARKET PENETRATION 

COMBINED RETAIL AND LEISURE 

SECTOR CONSOLIDATION

LEVELS

The opportunity

EXPERIENCES

The opportunity

The opportunity

In the UK, ten-pin bowling has been a relatively 

Even before the pandemic, traditional retail 

There is scope for the major operators to 

low-frequency activity compared with other 

outlets were under increasing pressure 

increase their share of the ten-pin bowling 

forms of leisure, such as going to the cinema. 

from online channels and the rise of the 

market as weaker operators, particularly the 

independents and smaller multiples, may 

become less competitive or exit the market.

In a 2017 Mintel report, almost 70 per cent of 

‘experience economy’.

consumers had not participated in ten-pin 

bowling over the previous 12 months, compared 

with a figure of 32 per cent for cinema visits2.

Larger retail property developers are 

responding to this by expanding their 

leisure offering to create a wider customer 

The accessibility of bowling locations was a 

experience, increase footfall and extend 

factor – an estimated 47 per cent of the UK’s 

dwell time. 

New leisure areas are being created by 

reformatting existing retail space or via 

purpose-built extensions.

population live within a 15-minute drive of a 

bowling centre, compared with 69 per cent 

living within a 15-minute drive of a cinema2. 

As we learn to live with COVID-19, it may 

be that we find consumers feel safer in our 

larger spaces than in other leisure venues 

and that they consider a slightly longer 

drive acceptable for the environment and 

experience we offer. Opportunities also exist 

to increase participation through improved 

customer propositions and competitive 

pricing relative to other leisure experiences.

Our response
Hollywood Bowl Group has driven much 
of the historical market growth through 
its investment in reinvigorating customer 
engagement through digital platforms, 
refocusing the bowling proposition 
towards family leisure, improving ancillary 
product offerings and driving operating 
and service improvements.

We have led corporate consolidation 
in the sector and made significant 
investments, primarily in the 
refurbishment of existing centres 
and, in no small part, in the opening 
of new centres.

Outlook
Whilst the COVID-19 pandemic has stalled 
the historical growth trend of the ten-pin 
bowling sector and other leisure and 
hospitality sectors, we believe our sector 
is well placed to weather the current 
storm as it provides a unique opportunity 
for family groups to be able to enjoy 
themselves in a safe indoor setting. 

The accessible price point of ten-pin bowling 
also makes the sector more resilient to wider 
economic conditions and it has traded well 
through recent recessionary periods.

Our response
The ‘competitive socialising market’ rapidly 
evolved due to strong consumer appetite for 
unique and challenging experiences, including 
updated takes on traditional activities such as 
bowling, mini-golf, table tennis and bingo. 

While this emergent market is being driven by 
younger consumers and concepts are being 
targeted specifically at them by many of the new 
operators in the market, family focused operators 
have adapted to cater to the new demand. 
Hollywood Bowl Group has extended its appeal 
to this market through the ability to change the 
environment, atmosphere and proposition 
in bowling centres during the evening sessions 
popular with this set of customers. 

Outlook
Whilst the COVID-19 pandemic and 
associated government restrictions 
have reduced the immediate participation 
opportunities for competitive socialising, 
we believe this societal change will 
continue to gain pace and the demand 
for experiences will remain strong. 
We have been encouraged by the opening 
performance of our Puttstars mini-golf 
centres which are targeting this market 
alongside the family demographic.

Our response

Our response

Our response

Hollywood Bowl Group has invested 

As the UK’s market-leading operator, 

At 30 September 2020, the UK had 312 

significantly in an active refurbishment 

Hollywood Bowl Group is the ‘go-to’ tenant 

ten-pin bowling venues. Of these, 61 are 

programme, customer service 

in the sector. We have a record of securing 

operated by Hollywood Bowl Group which 

enhancements and digital marketing 

attractive developer contributions on new 

has also increased its market share since 

activity, all designed to attract new visitors 

centres, most recently Hollywood Bowl 

2018 and is the clear market leader in 

and increase the frequency of visits 

York and our three new Puttstars mini-golf 

terms of centres, lane numbers, customer 

by existing customers.

centres. We have a strong pipeline of centres 

proposition and revenues. 

In addition, we have opened ten centres 

While some independently owned centres 

over the past four years in prime locations 

From our established operating model, 

and smaller chains have closed or reduced 

located close to cinemas and have a healthy 

relationships with landlords, strong covenant 

the size of their estate, a process of 

new centre pipeline of seven centres 

and continued maintenance programme 

consolidation though acquisition of other 

up to and including FY2024.

to 2024.

across the estate, Hollywood Bowl Group is 

chains (Bowlplex) and selected single 

well positioned to capitalise on the merging 

centres has led to the Group offering 

of retail and leisure customer propositions.

a greater number of lanes.

Outlook

Outlook

Outlook

The UK has a low penetration of bowling 

Whilst the pace of new retail and leisure 

This trend and associated opportunities are 

centres per head of population relative to 

property development has inevitably slowed 

likely to be accelerated due to the pandemic 

some other international markets, which 

in the last six months, the longer-term view 

and significant pressures being faced by 

indicates that there is still a significant 

looks positive as landlords and developers 

operators who do not have the financial 

potential for further ten-pin bowling centre 

remain committed to future projects and 

strength of Hollywood Bowl Group.

rollout. Ten-pin bowling retains a wide 

the inclusion of leisure venues in these 

demographic appeal and the highest level of 

schemes. Ten-pin bowling and mini-golf are 

participation interest when compared to other 

well positioned to play an important part in 

offerings in the competitive socialising sector.

such schemes as they cannot be replicated 

by an in-home experience.

AS THE CLEAR LEADER 
IN BOTH TEN-PIN 
BOWLING AND 
THE COMPETITIVE 
SOCIALISING MARKET, 
HOLLYWOOD BOWL 
GROUP IS BEST 
PLACED TO CAPITALISE 
ON THE GROWTH 
OPPORTUNITIES IN 
BOTH SECTORS WHEN 
WE EMERGE FROM THE 
COVID-19 CRISIS

312312

TEN-PIN BOWLING  
CENTRES

 Hollywood Bowl Group
 Ten Entertainment Group
 QLP
 Disco Bowl
 Namco
 MFA
 Independents/others

61
45
11
8
7
6
174

10

HOLLYWOOD BOWL GROUP PLC 
STRONG LEVELS OF HISTORICAL 

EMERGENCE OF COMPETITIVE 

GROWTH

The opportunity

SOCIALISING

The opportunity

The ten-pin bowling market forms a small, 

An important trend supporting the recent 

but historically fast-growing, part of the 

growth in the leisure sector is that consumers 

UK’s increasingly diverse ‘out of home’ 

are increasingly preferring to share 

leisure sector, offering a competitively 

experiences with friends, families and 

priced experience and broad customer 

colleagues rather than spend money 

appeal. It is estimated that the UK ten-pin 

on material items. 

bowling market was worth £311m1 in 2018.

Participation and social competition 

As with the wider UK leisure market, 

are important elements of social capital. 

growth in ten-pin bowling (prior to the 

We have seen this shaping how consumers 

COVID-19 pandemic) was driven by 

allocate their discretionary budget and 

macroeconomic factors, as well as the 

leisure time as they seek to create more 

spending shift towards experiential leisure.

enjoyment in life and more fun-filled 

memories to share, with each other 

and on social media.

Our response

Our response

Hollywood Bowl Group has driven much 

The ‘competitive socialising market’ rapidly 

of the historical market growth through 

evolved due to strong consumer appetite for 

its investment in reinvigorating customer 

unique and challenging experiences, including 

engagement through digital platforms, 

updated takes on traditional activities such as 

refocusing the bowling proposition 

bowling, mini-golf, table tennis and bingo. 

towards family leisure, improving ancillary 

product offerings and driving operating 

and service improvements.

While this emergent market is being driven by 

younger consumers and concepts are being 

targeted specifically at them by many of the new 

We have led corporate consolidation 

operators in the market, family focused operators 

in the sector and made significant 

have adapted to cater to the new demand. 

investments, primarily in the 

refurbishment of existing centres 

Hollywood Bowl Group has extended its appeal 

to this market through the ability to change the 

and, in no small part, in the opening 

environment, atmosphere and proposition 

of new centres.

in bowling centres during the evening sessions 

popular with this set of customers. 

Outlook

Outlook

Whilst the COVID-19 pandemic has stalled 

Whilst the COVID-19 pandemic and 

the historical growth trend of the ten-pin 

associated government restrictions 

bowling sector and other leisure and 

have reduced the immediate participation 

hospitality sectors, we believe our sector 

opportunities for competitive socialising, 

is well placed to weather the current 

we believe this societal change will 

storm as it provides a unique opportunity 

continue to gain pace and the demand 

for family groups to be able to enjoy 

for experiences will remain strong. 

themselves in a safe indoor setting. 

We have been encouraged by the opening 

The accessible price point of ten-pin bowling 

also makes the sector more resilient to wider 

economic conditions and it has traded well 

through recent recessionary periods.

performance of our Puttstars mini-golf 

centres which are targeting this market 

alongside the family demographic.

LOW MARKET PENETRATION 
LEVELS

COMBINED RETAIL AND LEISURE 
EXPERIENCES

SECTOR CONSOLIDATION

The opportunity
In the UK, ten-pin bowling has been a relatively 
low-frequency activity compared with other 
forms of leisure, such as going to the cinema. 
In a 2017 Mintel report, almost 70 per cent of 
consumers had not participated in ten-pin 
bowling over the previous 12 months, compared 
with a figure of 32 per cent for cinema visits2.

The accessibility of bowling locations was a 
factor – an estimated 47 per cent of the UK’s 
population live within a 15-minute drive of a 
bowling centre, compared with 69 per cent 
living within a 15-minute drive of a cinema2. 

As we learn to live with COVID-19, it may 
be that we find consumers feel safer in our 
larger spaces than in other leisure venues 
and that they consider a slightly longer 
drive acceptable for the environment and 
experience we offer. Opportunities also exist 
to increase participation through improved 
customer propositions and competitive 
pricing relative to other leisure experiences.

Our response
Hollywood Bowl Group has invested 
significantly in an active refurbishment 
programme, customer service 
enhancements and digital marketing 
activity, all designed to attract new visitors 
and increase the frequency of visits 
by existing customers.

In addition, we have opened ten centres 
over the past four years in prime locations 
located close to cinemas and have a healthy 
new centre pipeline of seven centres 
to 2024.

The opportunity
There is scope for the major operators to 
increase their share of the ten-pin bowling 
market as weaker operators, particularly the 
independents and smaller multiples, may 
become less competitive or exit the market.

The opportunity
Even before the pandemic, traditional retail 
outlets were under increasing pressure 
from online channels and the rise of the 
‘experience economy’.

Larger retail property developers are 
responding to this by expanding their 
leisure offering to create a wider customer 
experience, increase footfall and extend 
dwell time. 

New leisure areas are being created by 
reformatting existing retail space or via 
purpose-built extensions.

Our response
As the UK’s market-leading operator, 
Hollywood Bowl Group is the ‘go-to’ tenant 
in the sector. We have a record of securing 
attractive developer contributions on new 
centres, most recently Hollywood Bowl 
York and our three new Puttstars mini-golf 
centres. We have a strong pipeline of centres 
up to and including FY2024.

From our established operating model, 
relationships with landlords, strong covenant 
and continued maintenance programme 
across the estate, Hollywood Bowl Group is 
well positioned to capitalise on the merging 
of retail and leisure customer propositions.

Our response
At 30 September 2020, the UK had 312 
ten-pin bowling venues. Of these, 61 are 
operated by Hollywood Bowl Group which 
has also increased its market share since 
2018 and is the clear market leader in 
terms of centres, lane numbers, customer 
proposition and revenues. 

While some independently owned centres 
and smaller chains have closed or reduced 
the size of their estate, a process of 
consolidation though acquisition of other 
chains (Bowlplex) and selected single 
centres has led to the Group offering 
a greater number of lanes.

Outlook
The UK has a low penetration of bowling 
centres per head of population relative to 
some other international markets, which 
indicates that there is still a significant 
potential for further ten-pin bowling centre 
rollout. Ten-pin bowling retains a wide 
demographic appeal and the highest level of 
participation interest when compared to other 
offerings in the competitive socialising sector.

Outlook
Whilst the pace of new retail and leisure 
property development has inevitably slowed 
in the last six months, the longer-term view 
looks positive as landlords and developers 
remain committed to future projects and 
the inclusion of leisure venues in these 
schemes. Ten-pin bowling and mini-golf are 
well positioned to play an important part in 
such schemes as they cannot be replicated 
by an in-home experience.

Outlook
This trend and associated opportunities are 
likely to be accelerated due to the pandemic 
and significant pressures being faced by 
operators who do not have the financial 
strength of Hollywood Bowl Group.

1  Mintel Competitive Socialising Report 2019

2  Mintel Ten-pin Bowling Report 2017

11

GOVERNANCEFINANCIAL STATEMENTSANNUAL REPORT AND ACCOUNTS 2020STRATEGIC REPORT 
our business model

Our purpose

BRINGING FAMILIES 
AND FRIENDS TOGETHER 
FOR AFFORDABLE FUN 
AND SAFE, HEALTHY 
COMPETITION.

At Hollywood Bowl Group, 
we have an unrelenting 
focus on delivering the 
best leisure experience 
for every customer. 

Our business model 
delivers value through 
continual investment in 
enhancing our customers’ 
experience. 

The financial returns 
generated are reinvested 
in our business, used to 
reward our employees 
and provide the returns 
to our shareholders.

What we have in place
A multi-faceted and adaptable business model
Our model drives the success of our strategic objectives – delivering like-for-like growth, 
our active refurbishment programme, the development of new centres and acquisitions, 
focus on our people and leveraging our indoor leisure expertise.

High quality estate
Our centres are predominantly located in out of town multi-use leisure parks, alongside 
cinema and casual dining sites, and adjacent to large retail parks. Our centres have 
an average of 24 bowling lanes (or three mini-golf courses) and a footprint of 30,000 
square feet.

Brands
Hollywood Bowl is the Group’s flagship brand. It has centres in prime locations and 
benefits from the highest levels of investment. AMF centres are generally in secondary 
locations. Puttstars, our new mini-golf brand, has centres in prime locations. 

People
Our people are the face of our business. They are focused and are incentivised 
to ensure our customers have the best possible experience.

operations
Our high-quality centres provide innovative, fun-filled experiences delivered by our 
enthusiastic teams. Our support office includes a 55-seat customer contact centre 
(CCC) that manages all calls and the taking of phone bookings.

PROPERTY AND SUPPLIER RELATIONSHIPS
We have strong relationships with developers and landlords which help to ensure that 
we maintain a pipeline of potential new sites. 

Strong relationships with our principal product suppliers, such as Namco, Molson Coors, 
Brakes and Coca-Cola, enable us to deliver promotions that help drive retail sales and 
ensure we have the latest product offerings in our centres.

STRONG BALANCE SHEET
By driving revenues, continuing to achieve healthy margins and maintaining a strong 
balance sheet with low net debt, we can continue to invest appropriately in all areas of 
our business – expanding and improving our estate, rewarding our team members and 
creating value for our shareholders and other stakeholders.

RISK MANAGEMENT AND GOVERNANCE
Through our Board governance, the Group maintains an effective system of risk 
management. We have the appropriate internal controls to ensure that our business 
is always operating to deliver long-term, sustainable growth.

12

HOLLYWOOD BOWL GROUP PLCWhat we do and 
how we do it
MULTIPLE REVENUE STREAMS
Alongside bowling (and mini-golf in Puttstars’ centres), 
our customers can enjoy amusements, food and beverages. 
These give an all-round entertainment experience and 
increase reasons to visit, dwell time and secondary spend.

great customer experience
Delivering a fun-filled, safe and great-value experience on each 
visit builds our reputation and attracts new customers. It also 
increases the likelihood of customers visiting us again sooner 
and more often, and of recommending us to friends and family. 

Motivated & engaged teams
We strive to ensure our teams deliver a positive customer 
experience every time. We invest constantly in ensuring that 
team members are motivated and engaged with our culture 
and behaviours. Our positive culture promotes consistent 
behaviours and attitudes across the business.

technology & customer insight
We invest in market research and ongoing customer 
experience programmes to continually monitor customer 
satisfaction. This enables us to react quickly to any 
operational issue or respond to wider customer trends.

We use our sector-leading CRM systems and our new 
scoring system to facilitate targeted marketing programmes 
before and after customer visits. Our digital channels are a 
key strategic focus area and an increasing source of revenue 
and enhanced customer experience. 

FINANCIAL AND KPI PERFORMANCE
The Group’s financial performance and the progress we are 
making against our key performance indicator (KPI) metrics 
are the principal ways we measure our achievements. 

capital investment programme
As well as delivering our new centres, our capital investment 
programme supports centre refurbishments and our ongoing 
maintenance spend.

We continually invest in technology-led innovation including 
our CRM and reservation system, our scoring system, our 
back-of-house equipment and our amusement offering.

The value we create and 
how we share it
OUR CUSTOMERS
Ten-pin bowling is an inclusive leisure activity that all ages 
can participate in and thoroughly enjoy together in family, 
work or friend-based groups. 

We reinvest a significant element of our financial returns 
to ensure we not only have the best team members to 
deliver exceptional service, but also continue to provide 
our customers with unique, contemporary, safe and 
exciting environments in which to spend quality time 
together and a highly accessible price point.

our People
Our team members are the face of our business. 
They are highly focused and are incentivised to ensure 
our customers have the best possible experience during 
every visit. Management programmes are in place to 
attract, retain and nurture top talent. We have a highly 
targeted incentive structure for our centre management 
teams, based on customer feedback as well as 
financial performance.

OUR PARTNERS AND SUPPLIERS
Our financial returns enable us to continue to support a wide 
eco-system of partners and suppliers through commercial 
arrangements designed to build mutually beneficial long 
term relationships.

OUR COMMUNITIES
Our centres are important community facilities for 
different customer groups to enjoy our unique activities. 
The inclusive nature of bowling and mini-golf means 
they are an important contributor to social wellbeing 
and we offer subsidised access for concessionary user 
groups. On average, our centres provide 30 employment 
opportunities to members of the community. 

OUR INVESTORS
We are focused on sustainable, profitable growth through 
consistently driving revenues and managing our margins and 
cash position to provide attractive returns to shareholders.

13

GOVERNANCEFINANCIAL STATEMENTSANNUAL REPORT AND ACCOUNTS 2020STRATEGIC REPORTour stakeholders

WORKING WITH, 
LISTENING TO AND 
CONTINUALLY 
ENGAGING WITH 
OUR STAKEHOLDERS 
IS ESSENTIAL IN 
BEING ABLE TO 
SUCCESSFULLY STEER 
AND DEVELOP THE 
GROUP THROUGH 
AND BEYOND THE 
PANDEMIC PERIOD

HOW THE BOARD 
GATHERS FEEDBACK FROM 
OUR STAKEHOLDERS
Engaging effectively with 
our various stakeholder 
groups is a key enabler for 
the long-term success of 
Hollywood Bowl Group. 

The Board ensures that the 
interests and views of all 
stakeholders are carefully 
considered as part of its 
decision-making process.

14

OUR CUSTOMERS

OUR PEOPLE

OUR INVESTORS

OUR PARTNERS

OUR COMMUNITIES 

Consistently delivering 
fun-filled, great value- 
for-money and safe leisure 
experiences for our 
customers is what we  
do as a business.

Our teams are key to 
ensuring our customers  
have the best possible 
experience. We strive 
to maintain the positive 
and inclusive environment 
in which our people thrive.

Why we listen
  To remain passionately focused on the 
customer and allow us to deliver on 
our purpose

  To assess our performance across 

all areas

  To respond to customer needs 

and demands

  To stimulate innovation in our 

leisure offering

Why we listen
  Because we value the thoughts and 
opinions of our team members
  To maintain our high level of team 

member engagement

  To attract and retain top talent
  To develop the skills and capabilities 

of our teams

  To ensure consistent culture and 
behaviours across the business

59,792

Customer satisfaction surveys gathered 
and analysed during FY2020

1,467

Team members awarded pin badges 
in recognition of demonstrating great 
behaviours (including during the centre 
closure period) and delivering exceptional 
customer service

How we gather feedback
  Customer satisfaction surveys
  Mystery shopping programmes
  Social media
  Via our team members and customer 

contact centre

  Focus groups and other 

primary research

  Regular Board member visits to 

our centres

How we gather feedback
  Annual team member survey
  Centre and assistant manager 

listening sessions 

  Female-only listening groups
  Management conferences
  Regular Board member visits to centres
  Fourth Engage app
  Regular video conference updates and 
Q&A sessions with the leadership team 
(open to all team members)

As a listed business on 

the main market of the 

London Stock Exchange, 

we provide investors with 

detailed and transparent 

information which aids 

their understanding of our 

strategy and performance.

We work hard to build open 

As a multi-site business,  

and strong relationships 

with our key strategic 

partners, landlords, 

government, health and 

safety authorities,  

and suppliers.

we provide an important 

family leisure venue and 

employment opportunity  

in the communities in 

which we operate.

Why we listen

Why we listen

Why we listen

  To maintain our excellent relationships 

  To ensure that our strategic partnerships 

  To support local economies through 

with our loyal and highly supportive 

are collaborative

employment opportunities

  To ensure cultural alignment 

  To provide highly valued community 

shareholder base

  To assist investors in making 

informed decisions

  To enhance long-term shareholder value

opportunities arise

with suppliers

  To access innovations as the 

  To access new property opportunities 

  To maintain competitive advantage

  To ensure we are fully compliant with 

facilities and safe environments  

that help improve family wellbeing

  To develop charity relationships with  

a family focus

  To build a strong relationship with 

our communities

reduce the environmental impact 

of our operations

central and local government directives

  To continue to look for ways to 

£10.9M

£2.2M

120

Raised via an equity placing with our 

Investment in ‘Pins on strings’ and new 

Local jobs created in our new Puttstars 

shareholders to strengthen the Group 

scoring technology to continue to improve 

centres in York, Leeds and Rochdale, 

balance sheet after COVID-19 closures

the customer experience

and in York’s Hollywood Bowl

How we gather feedback

  Individual investor meetings and calls

  Annual General Meeting

  Results presentations and Q&As 

  Participation in investor conferences

How we gather feedback

  Contract negotiation process

  Regular meetings to discuss 

contract performance 

  External benchmarking

  Regular meetings with our 

primary authority 

  Meetings with local MPs and local 

authority representatives

How we gather feedback

  Charity relationships and events

  School engagement events

  Centre managers meeting local bowling 

clubs and concessionary groups

  Recruitment events

HOLLYWOOD BOWL GROUP PLCOUR CUSTOMERS

OUR PEOPLE

OUR INVESTORS

OUR PARTNERS

OUR COMMUNITIES 

Consistently delivering 

fun-filled, great value- 

for-money and safe leisure 

experiences for our 

customers is what we  

do as a business.

Our teams are key to 

ensuring our customers  

have the best possible 

experience. We strive 

to maintain the positive 

and inclusive environment 

in which our people thrive.

Why we listen

Why we listen

  To remain passionately focused on the 

  Because we value the thoughts and 

customer and allow us to deliver on 

opinions of our team members

  To assess our performance across 

member engagement

our purpose

all areas

  To respond to customer needs 

  To stimulate innovation in our 

and demands

leisure offering

  To maintain our high level of team 

  To attract and retain top talent

  To develop the skills and capabilities 

of our teams

  To ensure consistent culture and 

behaviours across the business

59,792

and analysed during FY2020

1,467

Customer satisfaction surveys gathered 

Team members awarded pin badges 

in recognition of demonstrating great 

behaviours (including during the centre 

closure period) and delivering exceptional 

customer service

How we gather feedback

  Customer satisfaction surveys

  Mystery shopping programmes

  Social media

How we gather feedback

  Annual team member survey

  Centre and assistant manager 

listening sessions 

  Via our team members and customer 

  Female-only listening groups

contact centre

  Focus groups and other 

primary research

our centres

  Management conferences

  Regular Board member visits to centres

  Fourth Engage app

Q&A sessions with the leadership team 

(open to all team members)

  Regular Board member visits to 

  Regular video conference updates and 

As a listed business on 
the main market of the 
London Stock Exchange, 
we provide investors with 
detailed and transparent 
information which aids 
their understanding of our 
strategy and performance.

Why we listen
  To maintain our excellent relationships 
with our loyal and highly supportive 
shareholder base

  To assist investors in making 

informed decisions

We work hard to build open 
and strong relationships 
with our key strategic 
partners, landlords, 
government, health and 
safety authorities,  
and suppliers.

As a multi-site business,  
we provide an important 
family leisure venue and 
employment opportunity  
in the communities in 
which we operate.

Why we listen
  To ensure that our strategic partnerships 

Why we listen
  To support local economies through 

are collaborative

  To ensure cultural alignment 

with suppliers

  To access innovations as the 

  To enhance long-term shareholder value

opportunities arise

  To access new property opportunities 
  To maintain competitive advantage
  To ensure we are fully compliant with 

employment opportunities

  To provide highly valued community 
facilities and safe environments  
that help improve family wellbeing
  To develop charity relationships with  

a family focus

  To build a strong relationship with 

our communities

central and local government directives

  To continue to look for ways to 

reduce the environmental impact 
of our operations

£10.9M

£2.2M

120

Raised via an equity placing with our 
shareholders to strengthen the Group 
balance sheet after COVID-19 closures

Investment in ‘Pins on strings’ and new 
scoring technology to continue to improve 
the customer experience

Local jobs created in our new Puttstars 
centres in York, Leeds and Rochdale, 
and in York’s Hollywood Bowl

How we gather feedback
  Individual investor meetings and calls
  Annual General Meeting
  Results presentations and Q&As 
  Participation in investor conferences

How we gather feedback
  Contract negotiation process
  Regular meetings to discuss 

contract performance 
  External benchmarking
  Regular meetings with our 

primary authority 

  Meetings with local MPs and local 

authority representatives

How we gather feedback
  Charity relationships and events
  School engagement events
  Centre managers meeting local bowling 

clubs and concessionary groups

  Recruitment events

15

GOVERNANCEFINANCIAL STATEMENTSANNUAL REPORT AND ACCOUNTS 2020STRATEGIC REPORTEngagement with our Stakeholders
Section 172

Introduction
The Board is mindful of all stakeholders 
when making decisions of strategic 
importance. Stakeholder engagement, 
balanced with our culture and the desire 
to maintain an industry-leading standard, 
is fundamental to the formulation and 
execution of our strategy and is critical in 
achieving long-term sustainable success. 

The needs of our different stakeholders, 
as well as the consequences of any decision 
on long-term performance, are well 
considered by the Board. It is not always 
possible to provide positive outcomes 
for all stakeholders, though, and the 
Board sometimes has to make decisions 
despite competing stakeholder priorities. 
Our stakeholder engagement processes 
enable the Board to understand what matters 
to stakeholders, carefully consider all the 
relevant factors and select the best course of 
action for business success in the long term.

Both individually and collectively, the 
Directors believe that in all decisions 
taken by the Board during FY2020 they 
have acted to promote the success of the 
Company, having regard to the stakeholders 
and matters set out in section 172 of the 
Companies Act 2006.

KEY STAKEHOLDERS
The Board considers the Company’s key 
stakeholders to be its people (employees), 
customers, shareholders, suppliers, the 
communities in which it operates and 
the environment. 

S172(1) statement:
In accordance with section 172(1) of the 
Companies Act 2006, a director of a company 
must act in the way he or she considers, in 
good faith, would be most likely to promote 
the success of the Group for the benefit of 
its members as a whole and, in doing so 
have regard, amongst other matters, to: 

a.   the likely consequences of any decision 

in the long term; 

b.   the interests of the Group’s employees;

c.   the need to foster the Group’s 

business relationships with customers 
and suppliers;

d.   the impact of the Group’s operations on 
the community and the environment; 

e.   the desirability of the Group maintaining 

a reputation for high standards of 
business conduct; and

f.   the need to act fairly between members 

of the Group.

The following disclosure describes how the 
Directors of the Group have taken account 
of the matters set out in section 172(1) (a) 
to (f) and forms the Directors’ statement 
required under section 172 of the Companies 
Act 2006.

How the Group engages with its key 
stakeholders
The Board and Group’s approach to 
considering and engaging with our key 
stakeholder groups is described below, 
with cross references to specific disclosures 
elsewhere in the Annual Report. 

The response to the Coronavirus crisis is 
set out fully on pages 8 and 9. The Board 
instituted a series of weekly Board video 
calls to receive regular reports from 
the Executive Committee and consider 
critical decisions required in that period. 
The decisions taken throughout the crisis 
have shown the regard the Board has for 
all stakeholders. This is exemplified by the 
Board’s: process of closing sites in line 
with our health and safety concerns and 
government’s guidelines; committing to 
set out its salary plans even before the 
government introduced the Coronavirus Job 
Retention Scheme; topping up pay so that 
furloughed salaried staff received at least 
80 per cent of their actual salary for the first 
three months; engaging with landlords early 
in the closure period to agree rent payment 
plans on all centres whilst closed and into 
the reopening timeline; liaising closely with 
suppliers throughout the closure and getting 
involved through industry bodies to ensure 
the best possible outcome for the business 
and the sector.

Our people
Our people are key to our business success. 
Therefore, communication and engagement 
with our teams is vital to the business 
and part of the Board’s decision making. 
The Board reviews the annual engagement 
survey results, the senior leadership team 
hold bi-annual feedback sessions with 
management and team members across 
the country, and individual Directors interact 
directly with team members throughout the 
year when out on centre visits (COVID-19 
guidelines permitting). During the second 
half of the year, the senior leadership team 
held fortnightly virtual Q&A sessions to 
ensure that our team members were kept 
up to date on the ever-changing landscape 
that COVID-19 brought to our business, 
as well as being able to ask any questions 
they had.

The Talent Director also attends Board 
and Remuneration Committee meetings 
to provide updates on areas impacting team 
members, and monitors pay and conditions 
across the Group.

We host an annual conference to which 
support team members and centre managers 
are invited. This allows the Directors to set 
out the strategy for the year ahead, as well 
as celebrate successes of the prior year. 

The Group operates an all-employee 
Sharesave scheme (with annual grants 
in normal circumstances), giving all team 
members the opportunity to become 
shareholders in the Group. 

In the course of the decision-making during 
the COVID-19 pandemic, the interests of 
team members, in particular in regard 
to their health, safety and wellbeing, 
have been a key consideration for the 
Board. Further information on the Board’s 
engagement with the wider workforce is 
set out in the Corporate Governance report 
on page 50.

Customers
The principle of providing our customers 
with a great experience every time they 
visit is a key consideration for the Board 
in its decision-making. Subject to COVID-19 
guidelines, the Board regularly visits centres 
with other members of the Group, as 
well as discussing the Group’s investment 
opportunities to expand its demographic 
reach and LFL sales performance via 
promotional activity enabled through 
the Group’s database.

The Group engages directly with its 
customers through social media and, 
during the COVID-19 pandemic, kept 
customers informed of reopening dates 
for its centres. Once the dates had been 
set, the Group published a video on all social 
media feeds, as well as through its database, 
showing the safety measures it had put 
in place for customer and team member 
safety and promoted social distancing to 
minimise the risk of COVID-19 spreading 
in its centres.

Shareholders
The Board recognises the importance of 
keeping shareholders updated on strategic 
intent. The CEO and CFO hold meetings with 
institutional shareholders throughout the 
year, particularly following interim and full 
year results. Feedback from those meetings 
is shared with, and discussed by, the Board. 
Shareholders are also invited to submit/ask 
questions at the Annual General Meeting 
(AGM). The arrangements for the FY2020 are 
noted on page 73. 

16

HOLLYWOOD BOWL GROUP PLCCommunity and the environment
The Board is committed to the 
communities in which the Company 
operates. The Company takes pride in being 
an active part of its communities, with school 
outreach programmes, concession discounts 
and charity fundraising for our national 
partner, Barnardo’s.

Community impact and environmental 
issues are taken into account in strategic 
decision making by the Board and the 
CEO leads the Company’s sustainability 
working group which looks for ways to 
reduce the environmental impact of its 
operations. The Board continues to look 
for ways to increase the recycling of waste, 
reduce energy taken from the National 
Grid – including by installing solar panels 
– and reduce the use of plastic. 

Please see the Sustainability section 
on pages 38 to 41 for more information.

During the enforced closure in H2 FY2020, 
further consideration was given to the 
liquidity of the Company and engagement 
was sought with shareholders in respect 
of an equity raise. As well as increasing 
liquidity through the COVID-19 closure, 
the Board considered the equity raise 
as providing long-term financial stability. 
Individual meetings were offered to all 
institutional shareholders to update them 
on requirements, the steps being taken to 
get centres open in a COVID-secure way 
and other cost-efficiency measures taken. 

Our Remuneration Committee Chair will 
continue to consult with shareholders 
on any major changes to the Policy. 
The Remuneration Report is set out on 
pages 57 to 70.

Suppliers
The Company has a small number of 
main suppliers, in particular for IT services, 
amusements, food and beverages. 
Under normal circumstances, engagement 
with our suppliers would be face to face 
and be led by the relevant member of the 
senior leadership team (including Executive 
Directors). However, once agreements had 
been reached over the suspension of supply 
during the enforced COVID-19 closure 
period, meetings were put on hold. Once the 
centres were reopened, the meetings were 
re-established. 

Supplier relationships, especially with our 
landlords, were factors considered by the 
Board during its weekly video calls, with 
a clear strategy agreed for each material 
supplier. All suppliers pre COVID-19 are still 
suppliers now we have reopened. 

In respect of our landlords, the March 2020 
rents were paid on time and virtual meetings 
were set up to discuss the approach to the 
following quarters’ property costs. The CEO 
and CFO, along with the Company’s external 
property adviser, held each of these calls, 
setting out the actions the Company had 
taken to preserve liquidity, including, but 
not limited to, the equity raise and CLBILS. 

Heads of department attend Board 
meetings, at least annually, to update 
on key supplier matters and relationships, 
as well as any material contract changes 
or new contractual arrangements.

Our key suppliers are audited annually 
on their compliance with modern slavery 
and human trafficking legislation.

We publish our payment practices twice 
a year at Companies House, as required.

17

GOVERNANCEFINANCIAL STATEMENTSANNUAL REPORT AND ACCOUNTS 2020STRATEGIC REPORTOur strategic objectives

Overview
We drive LFL revenue growth by attracting 
new customers, increasing the frequency of 
visits of existing customers and stimulating 
higher spend per game. LFL revenue is 
defined on page 25.

Progress
In FY2020, our LFL revenue grew by 0.4 
per cent. LFL spend per game was the 
key driver for this, being up 5.3 per cent, 
to £10.15. Our approach is to increase 
dwell time and gain a greater share of 
customers’ leisure spend. Pre COVID-19, 
our LFL revenue grew by 8.6 per cent. 

key performance indicators
LFL growth (%)

2020

0.4

2020 H1

8.6

2019

5.5

2018

1.8

Priorities
Continued unrelenting focus on improving 
the customer experience through planned 
investments in technology, the digital 
customer journey, marketing, developing 
our people and ensuring we have the 
right products available.

Optimising space and 
lane capacity
In several of our highest-
lineage centres, we have 
reconfigured the layout to 
combine the bar and diner 
areas, enlarge the amusements 
area and add extra lanes. 
This successful initiative 
has helped increase revenues 
in bowling and amusements, 
with no impact on bar and 
diner spend.

DRIVING 
DRIVING 
LIKE-FOR-LIKE 
LIKE-FOR-LIKE 
REVENUE GROWTH
REVENUE GROWTH

18

HOLLYWOOD BOWL GROUP PLCAN ACTIVE
 AN ACTIVE
AN ACTIVE
REFURBISHMENT 
REFURBISHMENT 
REFURBISHMENT 
PROGRAMME
 PROGRAMME
PROGRAMME

Overview
Our refurbishment programme generates 
improved sales and profitability at 
existing centres through investment in 
the customer experience – including the 
introduction of VIP lanes, our new scoring 
system, new external signage, internal 
digital signage and leaderboards, an 
upgraded bar offer and Hollywood Diner. 
Our upgrades attract new customers and 
increase customer satisfaction, encourage 
repeat usage and, through encouraging 
higher spend per game, drive revenue.

Progress
In FY2020, we refurbished/rebranded 
three centres.

key performance indicators
Number of centres 
refurbished/rebranded

2020

4

2019

2018

8

9

Priorities
We continue to focus on ongoing 
enhancement of our existing estate 
so we deliver consistent quality and 
continue to reduce our environmental 
impact through refurbishments and 
installation of new energy initiatives.

We have five to seven refurbishments 
planned for FY2021 and we are confident 
we can maintain a strong level of ROI 
as we continue to invest in our family-
focused model.

19

refurbishment
Watford Woodside was originally 
refurbished in 2014.

The second-generation 
refurbishment took place 
in 2019 before the peak 
Christmas period and included 
a combined bar and diner, 
new scoring, expanded 
amusements area, upgraded 
bowlers seating and digital 
merchandising installations.

GOVERNANCEFINANCIAL STATEMENTSANNUAL REPORT AND ACCOUNTS 2020STRATEGIC REPORTOur strategic objectives

DEVELOPMENT  
DEVELOPMENT  
 OF NEW CENTRES AND                
OF NEW CENTRES AND 
ACQUISITIONS
ACQUISITIONS

Overview
There are growth opportunities via new-
build centres and in the acquisition and 
rebranding of the sites of other operators.

Progress
One new bowling centre, York, opened in 
August and is performing to expectations.

Three new Puttstars mini-golf centres 
opened – Leeds (March), York and 
Rochdale (both in August). All are trading 
in line with expectations. 

Leases are signed for new centres in 
seven locations, which secures our 
pipeline to FY2024, and we have a 
number of other opportunities in legals.

key performance indicators
Number of new centres opened

4

2020

2019

2018

2

2

PRIORITIES
We will continue to expand our estate 
and look for profitable opportunities 
to grow, dependent on meeting 
our opening criteria, rental and 
sustainability expectations, and 
will continue to consider selective 
acquisition opportunities.

20

York Hollywood Bowl 
Co-located with a new 
Puttstars centre, at a 
gross capex of £2.7m.

Hollywood Bowl York opened 
to excellent customer 
feedback and features the 
latest generation VIP lanes 
and digital installations.

HOLLYWOOD BOWL GROUP PLCOverview
Our people underpin our business. 
Attracting and retaining top talent 
is a key priority for the Group.

Progress
We continue to build on the 
success of our centre manager 
and assistant manager in training 
programmes. In FY2020, 73 per cent 
of centre management positions were 
filled internally.

key performance indicators
percentage of management 
positions filled internally

2020

2019

2018

57

49

49

Priorities
Our team members are the face of our 
business and are responsible for ensuring 
that our customers enjoy the best 
possible experience every time they visit. 
Training, development, internal succession 
and team wellbeing remain key focus 
areas for the Group.

Digital: supporting 
team member 
engagement
  97 per cent completion 
rate for online training 
modules at the end 
of FY2020

  79 per cent of our 

team use the Fourth 
Engage app weekly, 
making an average of 
51 posts. The app was a 
valuable communications 
tool during the 
lockdown period

 FOCUSING 
FOCUSING 
FOCUSING 
 ON OUR PEOPLE
ON OUR PEOPLE
ON OUR PEOPLE

21

GOVERNANCEFINANCIAL STATEMENTSANNUAL REPORT AND ACCOUNTS 2020STRATEGIC REPORTOur strategic objectives

LEVERAGING OUR 
LEVERAGING OUR 
LEVERAGING OUR 
INDOOR LEISURE 
INDOOR LEISURE 
INDOOR LEISURE 
 EXPERIENCE
EXPERIENCE
EXPERIENCE

Overview
We recognise that other types of leisure 
activities could benefit from our customer-
led operating model and believe there 
are potential sustainable, profitable 
growth opportunities through acquisition 
or organic expansion into other indoor 
leisure sectors.

Progress
We developed a unique concept in the 
family-focused indoor mini-golf market 
combining unique course design with 
technology innovations. 

We opened three trial centres for our new 
indoor mini-golf brand, Puttstars, in Leeds 
(March), York and Rochdale (both August).

KEY PERFORMANCE INDICATORS
NUMBER OF PUTTSTARS OPENed

2020

3

Priorities
Our initial focus has been on launching 
and operating the three Puttstars trial 
centres and fully evaluating their customer 
feedback and financial performance. 

The three centres have performed in 
line with pre-COVID revenue expectations 
and have received excellent local 
publicity and customer feedback, giving 
us confidence for the further rollout of our 
unique concept to a fragmented market 
of close to 1,000 venues which we believe 
is ready for our innovative proposition.

22

HOLLYWOOD BOWL GROUP PLCPUTTSTARS – THE GREAT NEW 
MINI-GOLF BRAND
Puttstars is a successful new concept 
that extends the Hollywood Bowl Group’s 
passion for offering competitive fun to all 
the family into an entertaining new mini-
golf game. 

Our Puttstars centres, all in prime 
locations alongside leisure, dining and 
retail offerings, a complete entertainment 
experience with three nine-hole interactive 
courses and a unique scoring system 
that replaces the traditional pencil 
and scorecard method.

Once inside, digital installations 
encourage increased dwell time while 
bar, diner and reception merchandising 
screens encourage ancillary spend, and 
also show the top scores in the form 
of leaderboards.

Aside from mini-golf, visitors can enjoy 
a stylish bar and diner and an extensive 
amusement area, with leading games 
and the opportunity to convert wins 
into fun prizes. 

A variety of centre configurations, 
course layouts and internal designs 
have been trialled and additional system 
development is being carried out to 
further enhance the customer experience 
and improve operational efficiency. 

Along with customer and team member 
feedback, this will allow us to refine and 
optimise the next iteration of Puttstars’ 
centres to further capitalise on our 
successful innovation.

1  Google review September 2020.

23

“THE GOLF IS AWESOME, 
QUIRKY AND DIFFERENT”

“REALLY CLEVER SYSTEM 
IN PLACE TO KEEP TRACK 
OF SCORES!”

“LOTS OF FUN. GREAT SET 
UP, FRIENDLY STAFF”1

GOVERNANCEFINANCIAL STATEMENTSANNUAL REPORT AND ACCOUNTS 2020STRATEGIC REPORTKEY FINANCIAL PERFORMANCE INDICATORS

WE MONITOR OUR 
PERFORMANCE 
BY REGULARLY 
REVIEWING KPI 
METRICS1. WE USE 
THESE TO GAIN 
A THOROUGH 
UNDERSTANDING OF 
THE DRIVERS OF OUR 
PERFORMANCE, OF 
OUR OPERATIONS AND 
OF OUR FINANCIAL 
CONDITION.

1 

 Some of the measures described are 
not financial measures under generally 
accepted accounting principles (GAAP), 
including International Financial 
Reporting Standards (IFRS), and should 
not be considered in isolation or as 
an alternative to the IFRS Financial 
Statements. These KPIs have been 
chosen as ones which represent the 
underlying trade of the business and 
which are of interest to our shareholders.

24

REVENUE 
(£M)

2020

2019

2018

REVENUE-GENERATING 
CAPEX (£M)

79.5

2020

129.9

2019

8.9

8.1

120.5

2018

4.3

Definition

Definition

Revenue is generated from customers 
visiting our centres to bowl or play mini-
golf, and spending money on one of the 
ancillary offers – our amusements, diner 
or bar.

Capital expenditure on refurbishments, 
rebrands and new centres (excluding 
maintenance capex).

Comment

Comment

Revenue was impacted by the COVID-19 
closure of nearly five months, as well 
as the restrictions once reopened. 
Revenue decreased by 38.8 per cent 
to £79.5m.

Revenue-generating capex increased 
by 9.3 per cent (£0.8m) due to a 
£2.3m increase in new centre opening 
capital netted off by lower spend on 
refurbishments in FY2020.

GROUP ADJUSTED EBITDA 
(£M)

PROFIT BEFORE TAX 
(£M)

2020

2019

2018

29.8

2020

1.2

38.2

2019

27.6

36.2

2018

23.9

Definition

Definition

Group adjusted EBITDA is calculated 
as operating profit before depreciation, 
amortisation, loss on disposal of property, 
plant, equipment and software and 
exceptional items. A reconciliation between 
Group adjusted EBITDA and statutory 
operating profit is provided on page 34.

Profit before tax as shown in the 
Financial Statements.

Comment

Comment

Group adjusted EBITDA decreased by 
£8.4m largely due to the COVID-19 impact.

Profit before tax fell due to the impact 
of COVID-19 as well as the introduction 
of IFRS 16.

HOLLYWOOD BOWL GROUP PLCLIKE-FOR-LIKE REVENUE 
GROWTH (%)

NET DEBT 
(£M)

GROSS PROFIT 
(%)

2020

8.7

2020

2020

0.4

2019

5.5

2019

2.1

2018

1.8

2018

2.5

2019

2018

85.5

85.7

86.1

Definition

Definition

Definition

LFL revenue growth is total revenue excluding 
any new centres and closed centres. 
New centres are included in the LFL growth 
calculation for the period after they complete 
the calendar anniversary of their opening 
date. During FY2020, any centre closed 
due to COVID-19 was excluded from the 
LFL calculation during its closure period 
and the comparable period in the prior 
year. Due to the government announcement, 
the LFL closure period for the March 
lockdown starts on 16 March 2020.

Comment

LFL revenue increased 8.6 per cent pre the 
COVID-19 impact. For the full period, LFL 
revenue increased by 0.4 per cent.

Net debt is defined as borrowings from bank 
facilities (£29.5m) excluding issue costs, less 
cash and cash equivalents (£20.8m).

Gross profit percentage is calculated 
as revenue minus the cost of sales and 
any irrecoverable VAT, divided by revenue. 
Bowling has a gross profit of 100 per 
cent, with the costs of operating bowling 
in administrative costs, while each of the 
other revenue streams has an associated 
cost of sales.

Comment

Comment

Net debt has continued to be controlled 
during the year.

Gross profit percentage reduced slightly 
year-on-year. This was impacted by 
the stock write-offs due to the 
COVID-19 closure.

GROUP ADJUSTED OPERATING 
CASH FLOW (£M)

GROUP ADJUSTED 
EBITDA MARGIN (%)

TOTAL AVERAGE SPEND 
PER GAME (£)

2020

2019

2018

14.8

2020

37.5

2020

10.15

25.1

2019

29.4

2019

24.7

2018

30.0

2018

9.64

9.22

Definition

Definition

Definition

Group adjusted operating cash flow 
is calculated as adjusted EBITDA less 
working capital, less maintenance capex, 
less corporation tax paid. A reconciliation 
of Group adjusted operating cash flow 
to net cash flow is provided on page 35.

Group adjusted EBITDA margin is 
calculated as Group adjusted EBITDA 
divided by total revenue.

Total average spend per game is defined 
as total revenue divided by the number 
of bowling games played.

Comment

Comment

Comment

Group adjusted operating cash flow 
decreased due to a combination of lower 
Group adjusted EBITDA, maintenance 
capital and working capital unwinding.

Group adjusted EBITDA margin percentage 
increased in the main due to the IFRS16 
impact. Pre IFRS 16, Group adjusted 
EBITDA margin was 17.6 per cent.

Average spend per game increased by 
5.3 per cent, to £10.15, due to customers 
continuing to spend more during 
their visits.

25

GOVERNANCEFINANCIAL STATEMENTSANNUAL REPORT AND ACCOUNTS 2020STRATEGIC REPORTPRINCIPAL RISKS – effective risk management

OUR APPROACH TO RISK
When we look at risk, we specifically 
consider the effects it could have on our 
business model, our culture and therefore 
our ability to deliver our long-term strategic 
purpose (see pages 2 to 41).

We consider both short- and long-term 
risks within a timeframe of up to three years. 
We consider social, operational, technical, 
governance and environmental risks, as well 
as financial risks.

covid-19
The COVID-19 pandemic, the associated 
lockdown and the closure of our business 
significantly impacted our financial year. 
Our colleagues, customers and suppliers 
have all experienced significant disruption 
with numerous personal and operational 
challenges arising. The pandemic and 
the social and macroeconomic impact 
it brought has created a risk event for 
the Group, which has been considered 
as set out in the viability statement.

Where the impact of the pandemic 
has exacerbated a principal risk, we 
have incorporated a commentary on 
the COVID-19 mitigation being taken.

Our principal risks are described on the 
following pages, along with a summary 
of our mitigation activities.

Risk management activities
Risks are identified via: operational reviews 
by senior management; internal audits; 
control environments; our whistleblowing 
helpline; and independent project analysis.

The internal audit team provides independent 
assessment of the operation and effectiveness 
of the risk framework and process in 
centres, including the effectiveness of the 
controls, reporting of risks and reliability 
of checks by management.

We have undertaken an extensive review 
of the organisation’s risk profile to verify 
that current and emerging risks have been 
identified and considered by management.

Each risk has been scaled as shown on the 
risk heat map below:

In our initial response phase to COVID-19, 
our priority was to safeguard the health 
and wellbeing of our colleagues and 
customers, and to mitigate the closure 
of our centres. We moved into a resilience 
phase early in the lockdown period following 
extensive modelling of the financial impact 
of COVID-19. It was necessary to impose 
tighter control over liquidity, which informed 
our decisions on a series of measures, 
including the furloughing of colleagues 
and negotiating payment terms with our 
suppliers, as well as landlords in regard 
to rental payments. Resilience will remain 
central to our risk management focus 
throughout 2021; however, in readiness 
for the easing and removal of lockdown 
restrictions, we are preparing for the 
recovery phase and, ultimately, new 
ways of working.

Risk heat map

3

d
o
o
h

i
l
e
k

i

L

1

  Financial 1

2   Financial 2

3   Financial 3

4   Operational 1

5   Operational 2

6   Operational 3

7

  Operational 4

8   Operational 5

9   Technical 1

10   Regulatory 1

2

8

1

7

10

4

5 6

9

Impact

RISK APPETITE
This describes the amount of risk we are 
willing to tolerate as a business. We have 
a higher appetite for risks accompanying 
a clear opportunity to deliver on the strategy 
of the business.

We have a low appetite for, and tolerance of, 
risks that have a downside only, particularly 
when they could adversely impact health 
and safety or our values, culture or 
business model.

OUR RISK MANAGEMENT PROCESS
The Board is ultimately responsible for 
ensuring that a robust risk management 
process is in place and that it is being 
adhered to. The main steps in this 
process are:

  Department heads formally review 
their risks on a six-monthly basis to 
compile their department risk register. 
They consider the impact each risk 
could have on the department and 
overall business, as well as the mitigating 
controls in place. They assess the 
likelihood and impact of each risk.
  The Executive team reviews each 

departmental risk register. Any risks 
which are deemed to have a level above 
our appetite are added to/retained on the 
Group risk register (GRR) which provides 
an overview of such risks and how they 
are being managed. The GRR also includes 
any risks the Executive team is managing 
at a Group level. The Executive team 
determines mitigation plans for review 
by the Board.

  The Board challenges and agrees the 

Group’s key risk, appetite and mitigation 
actions twice yearly and uses its findings 
to finalise the Group’s principal risks.
  The principal and emerging risks are 
taken into account in the Board’s 
consideration of long-term viability 
as outlined in the viability statement 
(see pages 30 and 31).

  We acknowledge that risks and 

uncertainties of which we are unaware, 
or which we currently believe are 
immaterial, may have an adverse 
effect on the Group.

26

HOLLYWOOD BOWL GROUP PLCTrend change 

Risk type

Risk and impact

Mitigating factors

FINANCIAL 1 
revenue risk 

  Adverse economic conditions 
may affect Group results.

  A decline in spend on 

discretionary leisure activity 
could lead to a reduction 
in profits.

  Lack of free cash flow 
may impact on the 
refurbishment strategy.

  A prolonged period 
of uncertainty as a 
result of the COVID-19 
pandemic could cause 
significant disruption 
to business operations.

  An economic contraction is likely, impacting consumer confidence and 

discretionary income. The Group has the lowest price per game of the branded 
operators and whilst it would suffer in such a recession, the Board is comfortable 
that the majority of centre locations are based in high-footfall areas which should 
stand up to a recessionary decline. 

  Along with appropriate financial modelling and available liquidity, a focus on 
opening new centres only with appropriate property costs, as well as capital 
contributions, remains key to the Group’s new centre-opening strategy. 
Recent new openings continue to provide strong returns. 

  We have an unrelenting focus on service, safety, quality and value, and are 
continuing to invest in our centres. Plans are developed to mitigate many 
cost increases. 

  During the COVID-19 pandemic and period of closure, management identified 
and implemented measures to preserve cash, reduce discretionary spend and 
facilitate reopening expediently to minimise revenue loss, as well as utilising 
the CJRS.

  We have developed a comprehensive framework of protocols for operating 
our centres in a COVID-secure way. This framework was developed in line 
with government guidelines for the wider hospitality and leisure sectors and 
also includes specific protocols for bowling. We have introduced enhanced 
cleaning protocols and equipment, capacity limits within each centre and 
appropriate social distancing measures in all areas of our spacious centres. 
To provide further confidence and guidance to our customers, we have 
implemented a comprehensive communication plan (‘Have Fun – Play Safe’) 
providing customers with information, videos and FAQs via email, on our website 
and in the centres themselves.

FINANCIAL 2 
covenant 
breach risk

  Adversely impacted by 

  The pandemic has elevated this risk, and financial resilience has therefore become 

a failure to review funding 
arrangements when they 
become due, or a failure 
to meet banking covenants.

  Covenant breach would 

result in a review of banking 
arrangements and potential 
liquidity issues.

central to our decision-making and will remain key for the foreseeable future.
  Appropriate financial modelling has been undertaken to support the assessment 
of the business as a going concern. The Group has headroom on the current 
facility with net debt and cash flow cover below its covenant levels, as shown in 
the monthly Board packs. We prepare short-term and long-term cash flow, EBITDA 
and covenant forecasts to ensure risks are identified early. Tight controls exist over 
the approval for capital expenditure and expenses.

  Early in the period of the first lockdown due to the pandemic, the Group was 
able to access substantial liquidity (£10.5m) through an equity placing and an 
incremental RCF of £10m through the CLBILS, as well as agree relaxing of various 
financial covenants (as set out on pages 34 and 35). The Group has also agreed 
a one-year extension on its current credit facility.

  The Group was able to take advantage of the government support for business 
through CJRS, business rates holiday and the VAT deferment scheme (for the 
March 2020 quarter). In addition, the Group worked in partnership with landlords 
and key suppliers to reduce cash outflow through a mixture of payment waivers 
and deferrals.

  The Directors consider that the combination of events required to lower the 
profitability of the Group to the point of breaching bank covenants is unlikely, 
but not implausible. In the event that the Group fails to meet one or more 
of its covenants, the Directors believe it likely that an agreement could be 
reached with its lending bank, to waive or amend covenants further. However, 
no such commitment for further covenant waivers is currently in place with 
the lending bank. 

Change since Annual Report FY2019

  Increasing

  Unchanged

  Decreasing

27

GOVERNANCEFINANCIAL STATEMENTSANNUAL REPORT AND ACCOUNTS 2020STRATEGIC REPORTPRINCIPAL RISKS – effective risk management
continued

Risk type

Risk and impact

Mitigating factors

FINANCIAL 3 
brexit risk

  The result of Brexit could 

  Collaborative relationships with key suppliers, Brakes and Molson Coors, to help 

cause disruption to business 
conditions and increase 
input costs for certain food 
and drink due to additional 
import costs.

identify any potential cost increases under both a ‘no deal’ Brexit and a continued 
EU relationship.

  The COVID-19 pandemic puts extra financial pressure on the Group’s suppliers, 
however, given their size and liquidity, it is management’s belief that all should 
survive this period. 

  Minimal fresh ingredients, which are likely to see the largest financial cost impact, 

in the business.

  Increased stock holdings on all identified risk lines upon consultation 

with suppliers.

operational 1 
core systems 
risk

  Failure in the stability or 
availability of information 
through IT systems could 
affect Group business 
and operations.

  Customers not being able 
to book through website. 
  Inaccuracy of data could 

lead to incorrect business 
decisions being made.

  All core systems (non-cloud based) are backed up to our disaster recovery centre. 
  The reservation/CRM systems, provided by a third party, are hosted by Microsoft 
Azure Cloud for added resilience and performance. This also has full business 
continuity provision and scalability for peak trading periods.

  The reservations system also has an offline mode, so customers could still 

book but the CCC and online booking facility would be down. A back-up system 
exists for CCC to take credit card payments offline. A full audit process exists for 
offline functionality. 

  The business has migrated to Microsoft365 for added resilience and to ensure 

that email is always available for communications. 

  All technology changes which affect core systems are authorised via change 

control procedures.

  The Group undertakes periodic strategic reviews of its core system set up with 
associated market comparisons of available operating systems to ensure that 
it has the most appropriate technology in place.

operational 2 
supplier risk

  Operational business failures 
from key suppliers (non-IT).
  Unable to provide customers 

with a full experience.

  The Group has key suppliers in food and drink under contract to tight service level 
agreements (SLAs). Other suppliers that know our business could be introduced, 
if needed, at short notice. Centres hold between 14 and 21 days of food, drink and 
amusement product. Regular reviews and updates are held with external partners 
to identify any perceived risk and its resolution.

operational 3 
amusement 
supplier risk

  Any disruption which affects 
Group relationship with 
amusement suppliers.

  Customers would be unable 
to utilise a core offer in 
the centres.

  Regular key supplier meetings between our Head of Amusements, and Namco and 
Inspired Gaming. There are quarterly meetings between the CEO, CFO and Namco. 

  Namco is a long-term partner that has a strong UK presence and supports the 

Group with trials, initiatives and discovery visits.

  Namco also has strong liquidity which should allow for a continued relationship 

post any consumer recession.

operational 4 
centre manager 
retention risk 

  Loss of key personnel – 

centre managers.
  Lack of direction at 

centre level with effect 
on customers.

  More difficult to execute 

business plans and strategy, 
impacting on revenue 
and profitability.

  The Group runs centre manager in training (CMIT) and assistant manager in training 
(AMIT) programmes annually, which identify potential centre talent and develop 
staff ready for these roles. Centre managers in training run centres, with assistance 
from the regional support manager as well as experienced centre managers from 
across the region, when a vacancy needs to be filled at short notice.

  The centre manager bonus scheme has been reviewed for FY2021 to ensure it 
is still a strong recruitment and retention tool. Small amends to make it more 
attractive include a long-term retention plan, as well as quarterly payouts.

  Wellbeing guides were issued across the business during the pandemic, as well 
as frequent Group Zoom Q&A sessions and updates via our team member app, 
to ensure team engagement.

Change since Annual Report FY2019

  Increasing

  Unchanged

  Decreasing

28

HOLLYWOOD BOWL GROUP PLCRisk type

Risk and impact

Mitigating factors

operational 5 
food safety 
risk

  Major food incident including 
allergen or fresh food issues.

  Loss of trade and 

reputation, potential closure 
and litigation.

  Food and drink audits are undertaken in all centres based upon learnings of prior 
year and food incidents seen in other companies, as well as for health, safety and 
legal compliance. STRIKES training, which includes allergen and intolerance issues, 
to be reviewed, understood and complied with. 

  Allergen information has been updated and remains a focus for the centres. 

This was enhanced further in the new menu, along with an online allergens list. 
A primary local authority partnership is in place with South Gloucestershire 
covering health and safety, as well as food safety.

TECHNICAL 1 
gdpr & cyber 
security risk

  Data protection or 
GDPR breach.

  Obtaining all customer email 
addresses and impact on 
reputation with customer 
database. The Group does 
not hold any customer 
payment information.

  The Group’s IT networks are protected by firewalls and secure passwords. 
Vulnerability scans are frequently run on firewalls to ensure their integrity.
  A data protection officer has been in position for 36 months and has attended 

external courses to continue to build knowledge. 

  All team members have been briefed via online presentations. A training course 
on GDPR awareness was created on STRIKES and all team members have to 
complete pre being able to work on shift. 

  A cyber security partner is in place to handle any cyber security breaches 
and will work with the Group on a priority basis – 365x24x7 – if necessary.

  Regular penetration testing is conducted through a third-party cyber 

security company.

REGULATORY 1 
compliance 
risk

  Failure to adhere to regulatory 
requirements such as listing 
rules, taxation, health and 
safety, planning regulations 
and other laws.

  Potential financial penalties 
and reputational damage.

  Expert opinion is sought where relevant. We run continuous training and 

development for appropriately qualified staff.

  The Board has oversight of the management of regulatory risk and ensures 

that each member of the Board is aware of their responsibilities. 

  Compliance documentation for centres to complete for health and safety, 
and food safety, are updated and circulated twice per year. Adherence to 
company/legal standards is audited by the internal audit team.

29

GOVERNANCEFINANCIAL STATEMENTSANNUAL REPORT AND ACCOUNTS 2020STRATEGIC REPORTgoing concern and viability statement

2020, closed centres due to local tier trading 
restrictions, as well as taking into account 
the impact of socially distanced operations. 

Under this base case scenario, in FY2021 the 
Group continues to remain profitable with 
sufficient liquidity and no covenant breaches.

satisfied that the Group has adequate 
resources to continue in operation for 
the foreseeable future, a period of at least 
12 months from the date of this report. 
Accordingly, the Group continues to adopt 
the going concern basis in preparing these 
Financial Statements.

Going concern 
As part of the adoption of the going concern 
basis, the Group has considered the Group’s 
cash flow, liquidity and business activities, 
as well as the uncertainty caused by the 
COVID-19 outbreak. All of the Group’s centres 
were closed for trade from 20 March 2020 
with a phased reopening from 4 August 2020 
and the majority of the centres reopening 
on 15 August 2020. 

As part of the review of the potential impact 
of the COVID-19 outbreak on the Group’s 
cash flows and liquidity over the next 
12 months, a base case and multiple 
downside scenarios were prepared, 
including a severe downside. Under each 
scenario, mitigating actions included are 
only those within management control 
and ones that can be initiated as they relate 
to discretionary spend. These actions include 
reducing employee costs, maintenance and 
marketing spend, as well as all non-essential 
and non-committed capital expenditure. 
The Group also agreed with its lending bank, 
Lloyds Banking Group Plc (Lloyds Bank plc), 
to a combination of liquidity-enhancing 
amendments to its borrowing facility. 
These included a £10m extension of the 
Group’s RCF under CLBILS, a number of 
covenant test relaxations and waivers (listed 
below), and an additional year to extend the 
current facility out to September 2022.

  Leverage covenants amended to:

 – September 2020

 – 2.25x

 – December 2020

 – waived

 – March 2021

 – June 2021

 – waived

 – 1.50x

 – September 2021

 – 1.50x (this 
covenant 
remains at 
this level until 
June 2022)

  Cash cover covenant waived for 

September 2020, December 2020 
and March 2021.

The most severe downside scenario 
was prepared using the following 
key assumptions:

  revenue assumed at 11 percentage points 
down on the base case for open centres 
in FY2021;

  the centres closed due to the local tier 
trading restrictions that commenced on 
2 December 2020, to remain closed until 
the end of February 2021;

  in line with the revenue reduction, 

reduced employee costs. When centres 
are forced to close, taking advantage of 
the CJRS and no additional top up pay 
for centre teams;

  reduced maintenance and marketing 
spend, as well as reducing all non-
essential and non-committed capital 
expenditure in FY2021; and

  no dividend payments in FY2021.

The most severe downside scenario 
modelled would still provide sufficient 
liquidity to pass the liquidity and cash cover 
covenant tests. However, under this severe 
downside, the TTM Group adjusted EBITDA 
(pre IFRS 16) loan covenant, whilst not 
breached, would be challenged at March 
2021. In the event this covenant is breached, 
an extension of this covenant would need 
to be negotiated with Lloyds Bank plc. 

The Directors believe this is likely to be 
attained, particularly given the strong cash 
position of the Group in this scenario being 
between £18m and £22m, depending on 
capital expenditure, as well as its strong 
relationship and success on obtaining 
covenant waivers with its lending bank 
recently. The Group would also have 
access to £11m in undrawn RCFs. 

New covenants introduced for December 
2020 and March 2021:

  Liquidity, including balance sheet cash 
and undrawn RCFs, at least £17m.
  Trailing twelve month (TTM) Group 

adjusted EBITDA pre IFRS 16, minimum 
of -£3m. 

Nevertheless in the event of extended 
lockdown measures impacting the Group’s 
operations, the possibility of a covenant 
breach at the end of March 2021 cannot 
be discounted, and as such represents 
a material uncertainty that may cast 
significant doubt on the Group’s ability 
to continue as a going concern.

The base case has FY2021 monthly revenues 
at levels of between -56 per cent and -15 
per cent of FY2020 (five months actual 
performance and seven months budget), 
excluding the English lockdown in November 

Taking the above and the principal risks 
faced by the Group into consideration, and 
the Directors expectation that they could 
negotiate an extension to the covenant 
should the need arise, the Directors are 

30

Viability statement
In accordance with the 2018 UK Corporate 
Governance Code, the Directors have 
assessed the prospects of the Group over 
a period significantly longer than 12 months. 
The Directors have assessed the viability 
of the Group over a three-year period to 
30 September 2023. The Directors believe 
this period to be appropriate as the 
Group’s strategic planning encompasses 
this period, and because it is typically 
a reasonable period over which the impact 
of key risks can be assessed within a fast-
moving hospitality business. The Directors 
are mindful, however, of the heightened 
uncertainty driven by the COVID-19 
pandemic and accept that forecasting 
across this timeframe is now materially 
more challenging and have, therefore, 
also focused on understanding the level 
of headroom available before the Group 
reaches a position of financial stress.

In making this viability statement, the 
Directors have reviewed the overall 
resilience of the Group and have specifically 
considered a robust assessment of the 
impact, likelihood and management of 
principal risks facing the Group, including 
consideration of those risks that could 
threaten its business model, future 
performance, solvency or liquidity or 
sustainability. The assessment of viability 
has specifically considered risks that could 
threaten the Group’s day to day operations 
and existence. The assessment considered 
how risks could affect the business now, 
and how they may develop over three years; 
and financial analysis and forecasts showing 
current financial position and performance, 
cash flow and covenant requirements.

The Group’s business model and strategy 
are central to an understanding of its 
prospects, and details can be found in 
the Strategy section on pages 2 to 41.

Context
The Group undertook a review of the 
previously approved financial plan and 
forecasts in light of the current economic 
uncertainty caused by COVID-19. The output 
of this review has created a new base case 
for the period ending 30 September 2021 
where short-term volatility is expected 
to have an adverse effect on the results. 

HOLLYWOOD BOWL GROUP PLCThe Group established a base case model 
of financial performance over the three-
year assessment period, a ‘viability scenario’ 
upon which the Board has made its 
assessment of the Group’s ongoing viability, 
and which reflects prudent expectations of 
future customer demand and the successful 
execution of the Group’s strategic plans.

the CJRS, as well as the extended job 
support scheme, where relevant.

The Board considers this scenario to be 
reasonable. Since the COVID-19 crisis began, 
the Group was able to reopen most centres 
from 15 August 2020. Revenues to date, 
in FY2021, are in line with the base case.

Viability statement
The Board has a reasonable expectation 
that the Group will be able to continue in 
operation and meet its liabilities as they 
fall due; retain sufficient available cash and 
not breach any covenants under any drawn 
facilities over the remaining term of the 
current facilities. 

Assessment process
The Directors subsequently made a 
robust consideration of the key risks 
and uncertainties that could impact the 
future performance of the Group and the 
achievement of its strategic objectives, 
as discussed on pages 26 to 29 of this 
Annual Report. Particular regard was paid 
to the potential impacts of COVID-19, 
while acknowledging that the significant 
uncertainties surrounding the future 
trajectory of the pandemic and the related 
government response present an additional 
source of variability.

The viability scenario takes into account 
all of the principal risks and uncertainties 
facing the Group across the three-year 
period in order to assess the Group’s 
ability to withstand multiple challenges. 
The impacts of COVID-19 have been built 
into the scenario, but the impact of further 
one-off events that cannot be reasonably 
anticipated have not been included.

Key assumptions
The base case forecast, which is prepared 
on a prudent basis, assumes a double-digit 
decline in FY2021 LFL annual revenues 
when compared with FY2019, with FY2022 
seeing a recovery to FY2019 levels, with low 
single-digit growth thereafter. The process 
undertaken considers the Group’s adjusted 
EBITDA, capital spend, cash flows and 
other key financial metrics over the 
projection period.

The base case assumes no significant 
change in gross margin percentage and that 
dividend payments will resume from FY2021. 
Employee, maintenance and other operating 
costs, which are discretionary in nature, are 
reduced on a linear basis with LFL revenue 
declines. Capital expenditure reduces at 
discretionary levels as LFL revenues permit.

Mitigating actions have been taken in year 
one to preserve cash which include, but 
are not limited to, reducing planned capital 
expenditure, employee costs, discretionary 
marketing, maintenance and other operating 
costs as well as suspension of the dividend 
for the period ended 30 September 2020. 
External mitigations include the utilisation 
of the government business rates holiday, 

Assessment of viability
Although the viability scenario reflects 
the Board’s best estimate of the future 
prospects of the Group, the Board has 
also tested the potential impact of a 
severe downside scenario, by quantifying 
the financial impact and overlaying this 
on the detailed financial forecasts in place.

The range of downside scenarios include 
a severe downside which has a further LFL 
decline of 11 per cent beyond that already 
included in the base case.. 

These downside scenarios are most 
sensitive to changes in the length of the 
COVID-19 impacting period and the depth 
of the impact. Without firm guidance from 
the government on a possible ‘exit strategy’, 
a prudent approach has been taken to 
stress test the base case with our downside 
sensitivity. The impact of the downside 
scenario on the revenue is as follows:

  the centres closed due to the local tier 
trading restrictions that commenced on 
2 December 2020, to remain closed until 
the end of February 2021;

  centres that are open trade at -35 per 
cent, -30 per cent and -20 per cent 
for December 2020, January 2021 and 
February 2021 respectively versus the 
same period in FY2020;

  all bowling centres to trade at -20 

per cent for the remainder of FY2021 
versus FY2019;

  all bowling centres to trade at -5 per 
cent in Q1 FY2022 versus FY2019, and 
flat versus FY2019 for the remainder 
of FY2022;

  all bowling centres to trade flat versus 

FY2019 for FY2023; and

  golf centres to trade, when open, in line 
with year one revenue expectations.

While the assumptions we have applied 
in this scenario are plausible, it does not 
represent our view of the likely outturn. 
However, the results of this scenario help 
to inform the Directors’ assessment of the 
viability of the Group.

The current banking facility runs to 
September 2022. The Board would expect 
these to be renewed well in advance 
of this date.

31

GOVERNANCEFINANCIAL STATEMENTSANNUAL REPORT AND ACCOUNTS 2020STRATEGIC REPORTFINANCE REVIEW

FOR A LEASEHOLD 
BUSINESS TO ENDURE 
FIVE MONTHS OF CLOSURE 
AND STILL POST A PROFIT, 
DEMONSTRATES THE 
UNDERLYING STRENGTH 
OF THE GROUP.

FY2020
(IFRS 16)

FY2020
(pre IFRS 16)

FY2019
(pre IFRS 16)

Movement
(pre IFRS 16)

£79.5m

£67.9m

85.5%

£58.1m

£29.8m

£1.2m

£79.5m

£67.9m

85.5%

£64.6m

£14.0m

£2.4m

(£4.2m)

(£4.2m)

£8.9m

£10.15

£8.9m

£10.15

£129.9m

£111.4m

-38.8%

-39.0%

85.7%

-0.2%pts

£82.9m

£38.2m

£27.6m

£15.1m

£8.1m

£9.64

-22.1%

-63.8%

-91.2%

n/a

+9.3%

+5.3%

Laurence Keen

CHIEF FINANCIAL OFFICER

  Read biography  
on page 44

Group Financial Results

Revenue

Gross profit

Gross profit margin

Administrative expenses

Group adjusted EBITDA1

Group profit before tax

Free cash flow2

Group expansionary capital expenditure3

Average spend per game

1  Group adjusted EBITDA (earnings before interest, tax, depreciation and amortisation) reflects the underlying trade of the overall business and excludes any 
one-off benefits (VAT rebates for prior years) and costs. It is calculated as statutory operating profit plus depreciation, amortisation, loss on disposal of 
property, right-of-use assets, plant and equipment and software, any exceptional costs or income, and also shown pre IFRS 16 as well as adjusted for IFRS 16. 
The reconciliation to operating profit is set out below in this section of this announcement.

2  Free cash flow is defined as net cash flow pre dividends, bank funding and any equity placing.

3  Group expansionary capital expenditure includes all capital on new centres, refurbishments and rebrands only.

32

HOLLYWOOD BOWL GROUP PLC 
The results for FY2020 are presented on 
an IFRS 16 and pre IFRS 16 basis to enable 
a comparison with FY2019. For the purposes 
of this review, the commentary will clearly 
state when it is referring to figures on an 
IFRS 16 or pre IFRS 16 basis.

In addition to the cost savings noted 
above, we reduced marketing spend 
significantly, with minimal spend focused 
on our social media channels and existing 
database communication.

Total revenue for FY2020 was obviously 
impacted by the lockdown which started 
on 20 March 2020. During this lockdown, 
and until the gradual reopening of the 
sector, the Group saw no revenues. 
The majority of the estate reopened on 
15 August 2020 and was therefore without 
revenues for 21.3 weeks of the financial 
year. For the first half, the Group saw LFL 
revenue growth of 8.6 per cent, and total 
revenue growth of 3.3 per cent. Since the 
reopening of the sector, and with the Group 
operating within the approved guidelines as 
outlined in the COVID-19 Response section 
on pages 8 and 9, it has seen LFL revenues 
at 66 per cent of the comparable period 
to 30 September 2020. 

The total revenue for FY2020 was £79.5m 
(FY2019: £129.9m).

Gross profit margin
As a result of the closure, gross profit margin 
reduced to £67.9m (FY2019: £111.4m), with a 
margin rate of 85.5 per cent. Gross margin 
for combined diner and bar was impacted 
by increased waste as the Group entered 
lockdown, as well as the late notice of the 
delayed reopening that was planned for 
1 August. In total, £0.2m was written off due 
to expiration dates of specific food and drink 
product categories. Excluding this write off, 
gross margin was in line with the prior year, 
at 85.7 per cent. 

Administrative expenses
Administrative expenses, on a pre IFRS 16 
basis, were £64.6m, a decrease of £18.4m 
(22.1 per cent) on the corresponding period 
in the prior year. During the four full months 
of lockdown, the Group saw a reduction of 
59.5 per cent in administrative expenses, 
excluding depreciation and amortisation. 
This was principally due to the reduction 
in employee costs with the support of the 
CJRS, rent savings as agreed with landlords, 
and the business rates suspension from 
1 April 2020. 

Mitigating actions to reduce costs
Upon closure of our centres, we were 
able to reduce the estate running costs 
significantly: maintenance was reduced 
(to health and safety requirements only) 
until late July when preparing the sites for 
reopening; utilities were reduced, although 
not to zero as standing charges were still 
incurred; costs from our external cleaning 
company were reduced to zero. 

During the closure period, we reviewed our 
support centre structure to ensure we were 
set up in the most efficient way to exit the 
lockdown and continue to drive the Group’s 
strategy. This review led to a reduction of 
14 per cent in our headcount, an annualised 
saving of £0.4m in Corporate costs. 

Some of these savings were offset by one-
off expenses to ensure that centres were 
opened in a COVID-secure way as stipulated 
by the guidelines. These costs included the 
development and rollout of COVID-secure 
protocols and measures; investment to 
develop our own COVID track and trace app; 
and an app-based food and drink ordering 
system. The total cost of these was £0.2m. 
Corporate costs decreased by £3.3m in 
FY2020 (FY2019: £11.9m). 

Support from UK government initiatives
  Compared to the prior year, the 12-month 
business rates relief, from April 2020 to 
March 2021, provides a cash saving of 
£7.3m, with £3.9m for FY2020 and the 
rest to be seen in FY2021. From a profit 
and loss income statement perspective, 
the total amount is split equally between 
FY2020 and FY2021.

  The HMRC Time to Pay arrangement for 
the March 2020 VAT quarter results in a 
deferred cash benefit of £2.1m. Based on 
recent government legislation, this will 
now be paid over 11 equal monthly 
instalments, starting in March 2021.
  The CJRS meant that we were able to 

furlough 98.6 per cent of our team from 
23 March to shortly before the centres 
reopened, in phases, from 4 August 
2020. The Group took the decision to 
pay all hourly paid team members the 
higher of the furlough rate and their 
contracted hours for the first four weeks 
of lockdown, and then moved onto the 
furlough scheme rules post that period. 
For all salaried team members, the Group 
elected to top up salaries to 100 per cent 
of salary for March, April and May, and 
then moved to the government scheme 
of 80 per cent of salary for the rest of 
the lockdown period. The total support 
claimed from the CJRS in the period was 
£8.2m, of which £7.7m cash was received 
in FY2020, with the September claim 
being received in full, post year end. 
  We have a strong relationship with our 
landlords which was further enhanced 
with full payment of the March rent 
quarter. This meant that, in April, we 
were able to engage with our landlords 
on how to work in partnership to ensure 
an equitable solution for the June and 

September quarters. We were able 
to agree with the vast majority rent-
free periods of varying lengths, as well 
as some lease regears which we had 
been working on previously. For those 
landlords that have not engaged, we 
have taken advantage of the Corporate 
Insolvency and Governance (CIG) Bill, 
and deferred rent payments for June 
and September quarters. The total value 
of this deferment is £1.3m, exclusive 
of VAT, and we continue to look for 
engagement on these units over the 
coming months. These deferments did 
not impact the IFRS 16 income statement 
charge for FY2020 but did reduce the 
cash rent outflow, thereby supporting 
operating cash flow. If no agreements 
are reached, this deferred amount will 
be due for payment on 31 December 
2020, unless the CIG Bill is extended. 
  The above actions resulted in Group 

cash rent for June of £1.0m and £1.3m 
in September, which is a saving of £3.6m 
and £3.2m respectively. Of these savings, 
£0.7m in June and £0.8m in September, 
is deferred and will be due for payment 
as noted above.

Excluding property lease assets 
depreciation, the depreciation charge 
was £10.1m, compared to £9.0m in FY2019, 
as a result of the continued capital 
investment programme, including new 
centres, refurbishments and centre scoring 
technology rollout. Post the adoption of 
IFRS 16, depreciation has increased from 
£9.0m in FY2019 to £19.4m in FY2020. 

Centre employee costs were £15.0m for 
FY2020, a decrease of £10m on an overall 
Group basis on the same period in the prior 
year. Excluding the CJRS benefit, we would 
have expected employee costs to increase 
by 3.1 per cent due to a combination of 
National Minimum/Living Wage increases 
and new centre openings. 

Following the adoption of IFRS 16, 
administrative expenses exclude property 
rents and include the depreciation of 
property right-of-use assets. On this 
statutory basis, administrative expenses 
decreased by £24.9m (30.0 per cent) 
compared with FY2019.

Group adjusted EBITDA and 
operating profit
During H1, Group adjusted EBITDA, pre IFRS 16, 
continued to grow, albeit impacted by the 
COVID-19 enforced closure, and increased 
by 2.4 per cent compared to the prior year 
period, to £21.6m. However, the closure of 
all centres from 20 March until the phased 
reopening from 4 August, resulted in FY2020 
Group adjusted EBITDA, pre IFRS 16, of 
£14.0m (FY2019: £38.2m).

33

GOVERNANCEFINANCIAL STATEMENTSANNUAL REPORT AND ACCOUNTS 2020STRATEGIC REPORTFINANCE REVIEW
continued

Operating profit

Depreciation

Amortisation

Loss on property, right-of-use assets, plant and equipment and software disposal

Exceptional items

Group adjusted EBITDA under IFRS 16

IFRS 16 adjustment1

Group adjusted EBITDA pre IFRS 16

FY2020  
£’000

9,861

19,418

507

22

–

29,808

(15,840)

13,968

FY2019  
£’000

28,444

9,041

502

596

(380)

38,203

–

38,203

1 

IFRS 16 adoption has an impact on EBITDA, with the removal of rent from the calculation. For Group adjusted EBITDA pre IFRS 16, it is deducted for 
comparative purposes and is used by investors as a key measure of the business.

Management use EBITDA adjusted for exceptional items and IFRS 16 rent adjustment (Group adjusted EBITDA pre IFRS 16) as a key 
performance measure of the business. 

Statutory operating profit reduced to £9.9m in FY2020, a reduction of £18.6m compared to the same period last year for the reasons noted 
above in respect of COVID-19. 

Exceptional costs
There were no exceptional costs for the period. The VAT rebate shown in the period to FY2019 relates to a one-off retrospective reclaim 
in respect of unclaimed input VAT on professional fees. 

Share-based payments
During the first half of the year, the Group granted further Long Term Incentive Plan (LTIP) shares to the senior leadership team, including 
the CEO and CFO. These awards vest in three years providing continuous employment during this period and the attainment of certain 
performance conditions relating to earnings per share (EPS). The Group also started a new Sharesave scheme, open to all team members, 
in February 2020. 

The Group recognised a total charge of £729,829 (FY2019: £633,075) in relation to the Group’s share-based payment arrangements.

None of these non-cash costs are classified as exceptional costs.

Finance costs
Finance costs increased to £8.8m in FY2020 (FY2019: £1.0m) comprising the implied interest relating to the lease liability under IFRS 16 
of £7.8m and £1.0m associated with our bank borrowing facilities. 

Taxation
The Group has incurred a tax credit of £0.2m compared to a charge of £5.3m in the comparable period in the prior year.

Earnings
Statutory profit before tax for the year was £1.2m, a decrease of £26.4m on the corresponding period in FY2019 due to the factors discussed 
above. The impact of IFRS 16 on FY2020 is to reduce profit before tax by £1.2m.

The Group delivered profit after tax of £1.4m (FY2019: £22.3m) and basic earnings per share were 0.90 pence (FY2019: 14.86 pence).

Financing
As highlighted previously, all centres were closed on 20 March, in line with government guidance. 

In light of the COVID-19 uncertainty, the Group conducted an equity placing of 7,500,000 new ordinary shares (representing five per cent 
of the issued share capital) which raised £10.9m gross proceeds (£10.5m net of costs).

The Group also agreed with its lending bank, Lloyds, to a combination of liquidity-enhancing amendments to its borrowing facility. 
These included a £10m extension of the Group’s RCF under CLBILS, a number of covenant test relaxations and waivers (listed opposite), 
and an additional year to extend the current facility out to September 2022. The RCF under the CLBILS remains undrawn.

34

HOLLYWOOD BOWL GROUP PLC  Leverage covenants extended to:

 – September 2020

 – December 2020

 – March 2021

 – June 2021

 – September 2021

2.25x

waived

waived

1.50x

1.50x  
(this covenant remains at this level until June 2022)

  Cash cover covenant waived for September 2020, December 2020 and March 2021

New liquidity and Group adjusted EBITDA (pre IFRS 16) covenant tests have been agreed for December 2020 and March 2021:

  Liquidity including balance sheet cash and any unutilised RCFs at least £17m. 
  TTM Group adjusted EBITDA pre IFRS 16, minimum of -£3m.

Cash flow and net debt
Net debt at 30 September 2020 is £8.7m (FY2019: £2.1m), consisting of £20.8m cash at bank and £29.5m gross debt.

Group adjusted EBITDA

Movement in working capital

Maintenance capital expenditure

Taxation

Payment of capital elements of leases

Adjusted operating cash flow (OCF)1

Adjusted OCF conversion

Expansionary capital expenditure

Exceptional items

Net bank loan interest paid

Lease interest paid

Debt repayments

Free cash flow (FCF)2

Drawdown on RCF

Dividends paid

Equity placing (net of fees)

Net cash flow

FY2020  
£’000

29,808

(3,546)

(4,862)

(3,116)

(3,500)

14,785

49.6%

(8,852)

–

(858)

(7,770)

(1,500)

(4,195)

4,000

 FY2019  
£’000

38,203

969

(8,606)

(5,517)

–

25,050

65.6%

(8,098)

390

(711)

–

(1,500)

15,131

–

(14,489)

(15,244)

10,541

(4,144)

–

(1,113)

1  Adjusted operating cash flow is calculated as Group adjusted EBITDA less working capital, maintenance capital expenditure, taxation and payment of 

capital element of leases. This represents a good measure for the cash generated by the business after taking into account all necessary maintenance 
capital expenditure to ensure the routine running of the business. This excludes one-off exceptional items, net interest paid, debt drawdowns and any 
debt repayments.

2  Free cash flow is defined as net cash flow pre dividends and equity placing.

The Group’s free cash flow was significantly impacted by the closure of its centres, although the impact would have been greater if not for 
the considerable work undertaken on managing capital expenditure through lockdown, and more notably the negotiations undertaken with 
the Group’s landlords.

Capital expenditure
Total net capital expenditure was down £3.0m year on year (17.9 per cent) on the comparable period in the prior year, to £13.7m. 

At the start of the first lockdown, there were a number of capital projects underway and therefore already committed to. These included 
the new Puttstars centres in both York and Rochdale, the new Hollywood Bowl in York, and refurbishments in Crawley and Carlisle. 
These projects were all completed within a week of the English centres being permitted to open (15 August), and we also used the closure 
of centres to install ‘Pins on strings’ in two further centres. It is anticipated that all of these projects will generate returns in line with Board 
expectations. Four centres opened in FY2020, resulting in net capital spend on new centres of £7.7m, an increase of £2.3m on FY2019.

35

GOVERNANCEFINANCIAL STATEMENTSANNUAL REPORT AND ACCOUNTS 2020STRATEGIC REPORTFINANCE REVIEW
continued

Dividend
As part of its COVID-19-related actions, the Board is not recommending any dividend for FY2020.

The Group operates a highly cash generative business model, and therefore once the overall impact of COVID-19 and the subsequent 
recovery has been more clearly established, the Board believes it will be in a position to reinstate its dividend policy. The RCF available 
under the CLBILS would need to be closed for dividends to recommence.

IFRS 16
The Group has applied IFRS 16 as at 1 October 2019. A right-of-use asset and a lease liability is included on the balance sheet, and interest 
and depreciation has been charged to the consolidated income statement instead of existing rental expenses. 

IFRS 16 has no effect on how the business is run, and there will be no change to the Group’s cash flow and growth plans due to its adoption. 

The Group has adopted the modified retrospective method. Under this method, comparative data is not restated and the cumulative effect 
of applying IFRS 16 is recognised in retained earnings at the date of initial application.

A summary of the impact on the Group consolidated income statement and consolidated statement of financial position (balance sheet), 
is as below:

Administrative expenses:

  Rent1

  Depreciation

  Gain on lease surrenders

Net reduction to administrative expenses

Finance costs (interest)

Net decrease to profit before tax

1 

IFRS 16 adoption has an impact on EBITDA, with the removal of rent from the calculation.

Impact on the Group consolidated statement of financial position

Assets

Deferred tax asset

Lease liability

Retained earnings

FY2020  
£’000

15,840

(9,300)

6

6,546

(7,770)

(1,224)

FY2020  
£’000

135,176

5,611

(173,804)

(33,017)

Going concern 
As part of the adoption of the going concern basis, the Group has considered the Group’s cash flow, liquidity and business activities, as well 
as the uncertainty caused by the COVID-19 outbreak. All of the Group’s centres were closed for trade from 20 March 2020 with a phased 
reopening from 4 August 2020, with the majority of the centres reopening on 15 August. 

As part of the review and the potential impact of the COVID-19 outbreak on the Group’s cash flows and liquidity over the next 12 months, 
a base case and multiple downside scenarios were prepared. Under each scenario, mitigating actions are within management control and 
can be initiated as they relate to discretionary spend. The actions include reduced employee costs, maintenance and marketing spend, 
as well as reducing all non-essential and non-committed capital expenditure. The Group also agreed with its lending bank, Lloyds, to a 
combination of liquidity-enhancing amendments to its borrowing facility. These include a £10m extension of the Group’s RCF under CLBILS, 
a number of covenant test relaxations and waivers, and an additional year to extend the current facility out to September 2022. 

The base case has FY2021 revenues at levels of between -45 per cent and -15 per cent of FY2020 (five months actual and seven months 
budget), excluding the English lockdown in November 2020, closed centres due to local tier trading restrictions, as well as taking into 
account the impact of socially distanced operations. 

Under this base case scenario, in FY2021 the Group continues to remain profitable with sufficient liquidity and no covenant breaches.

As detailed in note 2 to the Financial Statements, the most severe downside scenario modelled would still provide sufficient liquidity to 
pass the liquidity and cash cover covenant tests. However, under this severe downside, the TTM Group adjusted EBITDA (pre IFRS 16) loan 
covenant, whilst not breached, would be challenged at March 2021. In the event this covenant is breached, an extension of this covenant 

36

HOLLYWOOD BOWL GROUP PLCwould need to be negotiated with Lloyds Bank plc, which particularly given the cash position of between £18m and £22m, as well as the 
Group’s success negotiating recent covenant waivers, would likely be attained. 

Nevertheless in the event of extended lockdown measures impacting the Group’s operations, the possibility of a covenant breach at the end 
of March 2021 cannot be discounted, and as such represents a material uncertainty that may cast significant doubt on the Group’s ability to 
continue as a going concern.

Taking the above and the principal risks faced by the Group into consideration, and the Directors expectation that they could negotiate an 
extension to the covenant should the need arise, the Directors are satisfied that the Group has adequate resources to continue in operation 
for the foreseeable future, a period of at least 12 months from the date of this report. Accordingly, the Group continues to adopt the going 
concern basis in preparing these Financial Statements.

LAURENCE KEEN
CHIEF FINANCIAL OFFICER
14 December 2020

37

GOVERNANCEFINANCIAL STATEMENTSANNUAL REPORT AND ACCOUNTS 2020STRATEGIC REPORTEVEN IN THESE 
CHALLENGING 
TIMES, MANAGING 
OUR BUSINESS IN 
A SUSTAINABLE 
MANNER REMAINS A 
KEY ELEMENT OF THE 
GROUP’S CULTURE 
AND STRATEGY.

SUSTAINABILITY REPORT

As a nationwide multi-site business, we 
continuously seek to enhance the wellbeing 
of our team members, our customers and 
the communities in which we operate and 
strive to introduce initiatives to minimise the 
impact of our operations on the environment.

OUR CUSTOMERS AND 
COMMUNITIES 
Bowling is an activity that promotes healthy 
competition and provides an inclusive, 
interactive experience, enabling families and 
friends to spend quality social time together 
to the benefit of their general wellbeing. 
The value of fun, inclusive activities like 
bowling has certainly been highlighted since 
the start of the COVID-19 pandemic as many 
user groups experienced significant isolation 
during our government-mandated closure.

Other than during COVID-19 restrictions, our 
centres are open to all. Each has access 
for customers with disabilities and we are 
committed to delivering an inclusive fun-
filled experience for everyone, whatever 
their prowess with a bowling ball or, at our 
Puttstars centres, a putter. This includes 
making sure that we are affordable to 
all with concessionary discounts being 
available across a number of user groups.

Once inside our centres, customers 
find that our food menu offers a selection 
of healthier eating options and our popular 
range of sugar-free drinks includes 
carbonated soft drinks, sugar-free slush 
and low-calorie mixers. We continue to 
work with our food and drink suppliers on 
a programme of reducing the salt and sugar 
content of the food and beverages we offer. 

We take care to serve up appropriate 
content in our amusements area, too. 
We maintain regular contact with regulatory 
bodies and our key partners, such as 
Namco, to ensure the correct decisions 
are taken in terms of our game content, 
quantity and age-appropriate mix.

TEAM MEMBERS
Hollywood Bowl is an all-round people 
business with our team at the heart of 
everything we do. For that reason, we strive 
to attract and retain the best possible talent.

We are always looking at new ways to 
improve our team engagement. In 2020, 
we increased our focus on team member 
wellbeing to ensure that our culture 
continues to promote a positive working 
environment across all of our centres.

We are proud to have a mental health first 
aider and wellbeing champion to provide 
proactive support to team members. 
We have also upskilled our managers and 
heads of department so that they can take 
care of both their own wellbeing and that 
of their teams during these challenging times. 

We have introduced wellbeing elements in 
all of our top talent programmes and within 
all monthly and annual reviews across the 
business, and run a dedicated wellbeing 
email service. We continue to promote 
our employee assistance programme (EAP) 
which is available to all team members via 
a 24-hour freephone helpline and our own 
app, Fourth Engage.

Fourth Engage gives management the 
means to instantly communicate with 
the wider team. This was particularly 
useful during lockdown when 98.6 
per cent of our team were furloughed. 
The app has achieved excellent engagement 
– 79 per cent of our team log onto the 
portal weekly and the average number 
of posts weekly is 51. Fourth Engage allows 
teams to communicate in centre groups, 
and nationally.

In a people-led business such as Hollywood 
Bowl, ongoing feedback from our teams is 
critical to ensure the growing success of 
the organisation. A member of the Executive 
team runs regular ‘Dynamic Operations’ 
listening groups for which we invite our 
centre management and team members 
to suggest ideas or innovations as well 
as give feedback on any issue important 
to them. 

In 2020, we conducted our tenth team 
member engagement survey and the 
second where we have partnered with 
Best Companies. Our overall response 
rate was 80 per cent and we remain 
in the ‘One to Watch’ category with 
our overall score improving. 

Gender equality is one area which we 
have focused on. We took the feedback 
from the previous learning group with our 
female centre managers to explore and 
understand the issues that stop women 
seeking senior leadership roles within our 
business. From this, we actioned a variety 
of suggestions, such as updating our 
employer branding and launching a new 
careers website which is designed to increase 
the diversity of applicants. We are committed 
to providing an inclusive environment and 
firmly believe that no-one should suffer 
discrimination on the grounds of race, colour, 
ethnicity, religious belief, political affiliation, 
gender (we hold all-female listening groups 
to support achieving a more equal gender 
balance at a senior level in the Group), 
sexual orientation, age or disability. 

Our industry-leading internal top-talent 
development programmes continue to 
support and develop careers across the 
organisation. We are proud that, in FY2020, 
96 of our team members benefited from 
them which enabled us to fill 57 per cent 
of our management vacancies through 
internal promotions. These included eight 
centre manager appointments (73 per cent 

38

HOLLYWOOD BOWL GROUP PLCof centre manager appointments in the year) 
and we were able to promote two of our 
team on our senior leadership development 
programme into senior support roles.

We have also implemented Long Term 
Incentive Plans for centre managers, 
assistant managers and senior support 
centre team members.

The Hollywood Bowl Group has a 
primary authority agreement with South 
Gloucestershire Council covering both 
health and safety generally, and food safety. 

Training starts for all team members when 
they commence their Hollywood Bowl 
career journey. Having recently launched 
our virtual cultural induction and ways of 
working training, we are investing in new 
ways to ensure our teams receive the 
comprehensive training needed to fully equip 
them for their role and to support them in 
providing an excellent customer experience. 
Team members’ continuous development is 
supported by our 29-module online learning 
system, which recorded a 97 per cent 
completion rate for FY2020.

For our assistant managers and deputy 
managers, we run our management skills 
development programme as a precursor to 
our CMIT programme. In FY2020, 63 of our 
assistant managers undertook this training.

For senior managers, we have been running 
our i2i programme since September 2019, 
a 12-month development course to help 
unlock managers’ professional and personal 
potential. This programme consists of 
individual and group activities that give 
participants greater insight into how people 
work. This year, we were pleased to be 
able to continue this programme, virtually, 
throughout lockdown.

To maintain engagement and upskill our 
managers whilst our centres were closed, 
we ran eight different virtual training modules 
covering cultural, leadership and operational 
training. 100 per cent of our centre managers 
attended one or more sessions.

A key part of our wider engagement and 
retention strategy is to recognise and reward 
great performance and the right behaviours 
of our team. We recognise great behaviours 
with Hollywood Bowl pin badges, which 
team members wear with pride. We were 
pleased to award 1,476 pins during the year. 

At centre manager level, we continued 
to celebrate success through our awards 
ceremony and conference, and recognised 
our top performing centre managers.

At Hollywood Bowl Group, we pay all our 
teams the relevant National Living/National 
Minimum Wage (NL/NMW) or in excess of 
this and are committed to ensuring our 
team members have a fair pay deal. 

We offer our team members benefits which 
they have told us they value. These include 
free bowling and discounted food and drink 
when they visit the centres socially with their 
friends and family, as well as an ‘at-work’ 50 
per cent discount on food and drink.

We launched our third Save-As-You-Earn 
(SAYE) Sharesave scheme in February 
2020, giving all our team members another 
opportunity to share in the financial success 
of the business. We are pleased that 126 
employees signed up to this latest launch.

Gender balance statistics
A breakdown of our Board, senior management 
and all employees by gender is as follows:

FY2020 number of employees

BOARD

1 female

SENIOR MANAGERS

4 female

TEAM

951 female

5 male

12 male

770 male

CHARITY ENGAGEMENT
As a business operating in multiple locations 
around the UK, we believe that we should 
support the communities in which we 
operate by offering employment and through 
charity fundraising, awareness and access.

In FY2020, we introduced a new nationwide 
charity partnership with Barnardo’s across 
64 centres and our Hemel Hempstead 
support centre.

Barnardo’s primarily focuses on benefiting 
younger people and their families. Prior  
to the centre closures in March 2020, 
fundraising events took place across the 
country and a donation of £15 for each 
team member who successfully completed 
their induction programme was made to 
the charity.

Whilst the five-month centre closure has 
impacted our donations and fundraising 
activities, both Hollywood Bowl Group and 
Barnardo’s are committed to reigniting the 
partnership in FY2021.

HEALTH AND SAFETY
Bowling and mini-golf are fun, inclusive and 
safe ways to keep active and we like to keep 
it that way. We design our centres and 
train our teams with this in mind, both for 
our customers’ and our teams’ safety and 
welfare. We comply with all safety legislation 
and act on all reported incidents. As part 
of our internal audit reviews, we undertake 
safety audits. The output from these reviews, 
as well as any incident reports, are reviewed 
by the Board on a monthly basis.

COVID-secure operations
The Group has worked closely with 
the primary authority, local and central 
government and Public Health England 
on developing its COVID-secure operating 
protocols, risk assessments and safety 
innovations, including lane seating dividers 
(read more on pages 8 and 9).

Environment
Hollywood Bowl Group has a strong and 
genuine commitment to conduct all of its 
operations in an ethical and responsible 
manner. This is demonstrated in our 
environmental and energy achievements 
(the latter being skewed this year by the 
centre closure period due to the COVID-19 
pandemic when electricity and gas usage, 
and waste generation, were minimal). 

Solar
The second solar array was installed at 
Hollywood Bowl Bentley Bridge with 225.62 
kWp and was commissioned in November 
2019. This was funded by Green Nation 
and electricity will be purchased through 
a Power Purchase Agreement (PPA).

A rollout to other centres is planned and 
this will include self-funded projects and 
also PPAs.

Greenhouse gas emissions
Greenhouse gas (GHG) emissions for FY2020 
have been measured as required under 
the Large and Medium-Sized Companies 
and Groups (Accounts and Reports) 
Regulations 2008 as amended in 2013. 
The GHG Protocol Corporate Accounting 
and Reporting standards (revised edition) 
and the electricity and gas consumption 
data has been provided by Schneider 
Electric and Total. Conversion factors taken 
from https://www.gov.uk/government/
publications/greenhouse-gas-reporting-
conversion-factors-2020.

39

GOVERNANCEFINANCIAL STATEMENTSANNUAL REPORT AND ACCOUNTS 2020STRATEGIC REPORTSUSTAINABILITY REPORT
continued

Scope 1 emissions
This is made up of natural gas, company car (Hollywood Bowl no longer has any company cars) and also refrigerant gas losses.

Natural gas

Company car

F gas losses

Total

Scope 2 emissions
Emissions from electricity are 11,560,010 x 0.23314 = 2,695,100.7 kgCO2e or 2,695tCO2e.

Intensity ratio

Scope 1 emissions

Scope 2 emissions

Total Scope 1 and 2 emissions

Intensity ratio (tCO2e per centre)

tCO2e

520.4

–

48

568.4

tCO2e

568.4 

2,695

3,263.4

55.1

Over 91.55 per cent of all Scope 1 emissions were from natural gas. This includes heating, hot water and cooking as it is not possible to 
accurately determine the specific percentage from each.

100 per cent of electricity used was from UK operations.

Total electricity and gas usage

FY2016

FY2017

FY2018

FY2019

FY2020

Electricity 
(kWh)

Gas (kWh)

17,380,346

4,866,065

18,581,702

4,384,837

18,849,729

5,260,995

19,573,573

4,104,855

11,560,010

2,830,792

Data from centres where the landlord supplies electricity/gas has been excluded.

Electricity usage
Our commitment to efficiently and ethically use natural resources is ongoing. 

We have reduced our emission ratio for Scope 1 and 2 emissions by 107.1 or 66 per cent for FY2020 compared with the base year (FY2016). 

FY2016

FY2017

FY2018

FY2019

FY2020

Scope 1

Scope 2

Scope 1+2

Intensity ratio

895.7

807.5

967.8

773.6

568.4

8,195.0

6,532.6

5,335.6

5,003.0

2,695.0

9,090.7

7,340.1

6,303.4

5,776.6

3,263.4

162.3

132.9

113.7

102.6

55.1

Whilst in FY2020 we achieved our goal, set in FY2019, of an intensity ratio of under 100, this was significantly influenced by the 
COVID-19 lockdown. 

The target is therefore to maintain an intensity level of under 100 in FY2021.

Usage
Action plan for reducing environmental impact and increasing onsite generation of renewable electricity:

  Behaviour change within our teams, such as conscious efforts to reduce electricity use
  Continuation of the rollout of more energy-efficient air handling plant (plant changed in Birmingham in FY2020)
  CSR meetings are chaired by CEO
  Rollout of solar panels (through self-funds and PPAs)

Waste recycling
We recycle the waste that we produce as part of our commitment to mitigate the environmental impacts of our operations. In FY2016, 
we recycled 63.3 per cent of our waste – this increased to 67.8 per cent in FY2020.

Waste volumes were impacted by the COVID-19 centre closures.

40

HOLLYWOOD BOWL GROUP PLCFY2016

FY2017

FY2018

FY2019

FY2020

FY2016

FY2017

FY2018

FY2019

FY2020

General

7,334.14

Mixed recycling 
/ organic

Glass

1,477.8

11,164.04

7,443.72

1,621.44

12,695.88

6,770.04

1,652.26

12,978.86

7,096.24

1,831.92

12,745.42

4,160.00

1,215.12

7,560.74

General

Recycling

Total waste

7,334.14

12,641.84

19,975.98

7,443.72

14,317.32

21,761.04

6,770.04

14,631.12

21,401.16

7,096.24

14,577.34

21,673.58

4,160.0

8,775.86

12,935.86

Recycling 
percentage

63.3%

65.8%

68.4%

67.3%

67.8%

All waste data supplied by Biffa measured in tonnes.

This excludes data from centres where the landlord manages the waste streams.

Utility Targets

111
222
333
444

100 per cent of the electricity 
we purchase to come from 
renewable sources by 2022

By 2028, 20 per cent of our 
electricity to be generated from 
onsite renewables

By 2021, 70 per cent of waste 
generated to be recycled with 100 
per cent diversion from landfill

By 2025, 75 per cent of waste 
generated to be recycled with 100 
per cent diversion from landfill

NON-FINANCIAL INFORMATION STATEMENT 
We aim to comply with the new Non-Financial Reporting requirements contained in sections 414CA and 414CB of the Companies Act 2006. 
The table below and the information it refers to is intended to help stakeholders understand our position on key non-financial matters. 

Requirement

Environment

Policies and standards which govern our approach
  Environmental statement 
  Health and safety policy 

Employees

  Equal opportunities policy
  Diversity policy
  Board diversity policy approved post financial year end

Human rights

Social matters

  Data protection policy
  Slavery and human trafficking policy
  Whistleblowing policy
  IT and Information security policy
  The Company does not have a social matters policy per se 

but works with suppliers to reduce salt and sugar content and 
offer healthier eating options on food and drink menus; works 
with regulatory bodies and suppliers to ensure correct decisions 
are made concerning amusement area games; and provides 
a community charity engagement programme page 39

Risk management and additional information

Health and safety and food safety disclosures pages 38 and 39
Stakeholders pages 14 and 15
Environment, greenhouse gas emissions and electricity usage 
disclosures pages 39–41
Case study on reducing environmental impacts page 39

Stakeholders pages 14 and 15 
Our people pages 38 and 39 
Employee numbers by gender page 39 
Employee involvement and policy regarding disabled persons page 73
Board engagement with the business page 50
Diversity policy and Board diversity policy page 52
CEO’s remuneration compared to employees’ page 68
Gender Pay Gap Report published on the Company’s website

Review and approval of the Group’s modern slavery and human 
trafficking statement page 48
Stakeholders pages 14 and 15
Whistleblowing page 49

Stakeholders pages 14 and 15
Our customers and engaging with the local community page 38

Anti-corruption and 
anti-bribery

Policy embedding, due 
diligence and outcomes

Principal risks and impact 
on business activity

Description of business 
model

Non-financial key 
performance indicators

  Anti-bribery policy 

Non-audit services page 56

Governance framework and structure page 46
Board activity during the year page 48
Audit Committee report pages 53–56

Principal risks and effective risk management pages 26–29
Risk management and regulatory disclosure page 48

Our business model pages 12 and 13

Strategy pages 18–23 
Operational highlights page 1
Stakeholders pages 14 and 15

The Strategic Report was approved by the Board on 14 December 2020 and signed on its behalf by:

STEPHEN BURNS
CHIEF EXECUTIVE OFFICER
14 December 2020

41

GOVERNANCEFINANCIAL STATEMENTSANNUAL REPORT AND ACCOUNTS 2020STRATEGIC REPORTChairman’s introduction

Board of Directors

Corporate Governance report

Board activity during the year

Stakeholder engagement

p43

p44

p46

p48

p50

Report of the Nomination Committee

p51

Supplementary information on 
succession and evaluation

Report of the Audit Committee

Supplementary information on audit, 
risk and internal controls

Report of the 
Remuneration Committee

Directors’ Remuneration Policy

Annual Report on Remuneration

Directors’ report

Statement of Directors’ 
responsibilities

Independent auditor’s report

p52

p53

p55

p57

p60

p63

p71

p74

p75

E
E
E
C
C
C
N
N
N
A
A
A
N
N
N
R
R
R
E
E
E
V
V
V
O
O
O
G
G
G

42

HOLLYWOOD BOWL GROUP PLCCHAIRMAN’S INTRODUCTION

OUR POSITIVE 
CULTURE AND 
ROBUST GOVERNANCE 
FRAMEWORK HAVE 
SERVED US WELL IN 
A CHALLENGING YEAR

Peter Boddy

CHAIRMAN

  Read biography 
on page 44

Dear shareholders,
On behalf of the Board, I am pleased to 
present our Corporate Governance report 
for the year ended 30 September 2020. 
The 2018 UK Corporate Governance Code 
(the Code) applied to the Group for the first 
time in FY2020, and I am happy to report 
that we have complied with the principles 
and provisions of the Code during the year. 
The Board has maintained its focus on high 
standards of corporate governance and 
this section of the Annual Report sets out 
how we have applied the principles of the 
Code, highlighting the key activities of the 
Board and its Committees in the period. 
We routinely consider our approach to 
governance to ensure it is appropriate in 
supporting the long-term success of the 
Group and its stakeholders.

The challenges presented by the COVID-19 
pandemic, with all of our centres closed from 
the end of March to the beginning of August, 
have obviously impacted significantly on the 
Board’s activities during the year. Our positive 

culture and robust governance framework 
have served us well, enabling the Board 
to act quickly and support the Executive 
team in making important decisions to 
ensure our continuing financial stability, 
and to provide a COVID-safe environment 
for team members and customers when 
our centres reopened. In making those 
decisions, the Board was mindful of both 
the impact on stakeholders and likely long-
term consequences, and we believe that the 
actions taken have ensured that we are well 
positioned to return to a positive trajectory 
for the business once a more normal trading 
environment resumes. Our statement setting 
out how the Directors have discharged 
their duty under s172 of the Companies 
Act 2006, which includes a description of 
how the Company has engaged with its key 
stakeholders, is set out on pages 16 and 17 
of the Strategic Report.

The culture and values of our business 
have always been key drivers of our 
success. The Board continuously monitors 
culture through our interactions with team 
members, and regular reports from the 
Executive team. As a Board, we recognise 
that our team members are fundamental 
to the success of the business, and it is 
therefore essential that we continue to 
promote a culture and values that support 

them in providing a positive, safe and 
enjoyable environment for our customers. 
We also recognise our responsibility to lead 
by example and demonstrate our culture 
and values in the way we conduct ourselves 
as a Board. Open and transparent debate 
is encouraged around the Board table and 
the Non-Executive Directors have access 
to team members at all levels across 
the Group.

Our Board and Committee evaluation 
process (described on page 49) was 
again conducted by way of detailed 
questionnaires, with an increased focus 
this year on qualitative feedback. The Board 
has discussed and reviewed the responses 
to those questionnaires, and has agreed 
an action plan to take forward some of 
the recommendations arising from the 
process. The responses have shown that 
the Directors continue to believe the Board 
and its Committees are operating well, and 
that each individual Director continues to 
be committed to the business and effective 
in their role.

PETER BODDY
CHAIRMAN
14 December 2020

43

GOVERNANCEFINANCIAL STATEMENTSANNUAL REPORT AND ACCOUNTS 2020STRATEGIC REPORT 
BOARD OF DIRECTORS

C

C

P B O W LING S
220220

O
T

O

R
E

P B O W LING S
186186

O
T

O

R
E

P B O W LING S
191

O
T

C

O

R
E

Peter Boddy

NON-EXECUTIVE CHAIRMAN

Stephen Burns

CHIEF EXECUTIVE OFFICER

Laurence Keen

CHIEF FINANCIAL OFFICER

Appointment
Peter joined the Group as Non-Executive 
Chairman in 2014.

Skills and experience
Peter has extensive non-executive 
experience at board level, including 
roles at Thwaites plc (SID and Chair 
of remuneration committee 2007–2015), 
Novus Ltd (Chairman 2015–2018), 
Xercise4less (Chairman 2013–2019) 
and The Harley Medical Group 
(Chairman 2012–2019). Previously, 
he held the position of CEO or Managing 
Director in a number of successful private 
equity-backed leisure sector companies 
including Fitness First UK, Megabowl 
Group Limited and Maxinutrition Limited. 
Peter has a degree in economics from 
De Montfort University and an MBA 
from Warwick Business School.

Committee membership 

N

Appointment
Stephen joined the Group as Business 
Development Director in 2011. He was 
promoted to Managing Director in 2012 
and became Chief Executive Officer 
in 2014.

Skills and experience
Before joining the Group, Stephen worked 
within the health and fitness industry, 
holding various roles within Cannons 
Health and Fitness Limited from 1999. 
He became Sales and Client Retention 
Director in 2007 upon the acquisition of 
Cannons Health and Fitness Limited by 
Nuffield Health, and became Regional 
Director in 2009. In 2011, Stephen was 
appointed to the operating board of MWB 
Business Exchange, a public company 
specialising in serviced offices, meeting 
and conference rooms, and virtual offices. 
Stephen was appointed Chairman at the 
Club Company Limited (operator of UK 
country clubs) in June 2018.

Committee membership 
N/A

Appointment
Laurence joined the Group as Finance 
Director in 2014.

Skills and experience 
Laurence has a first-class degree in 
business, mathematics and statistics 
from the London School of Economics 
and Political Science. He qualified as 
a chartered accountant in 2000 and 
has been an ICAEW Fellow since 2012. 
Previously, Laurence was UK Development 
Director for Paddy Power from 2012. 
He has held senior retail and finance 
roles for Debenhams plc, Pizza Hut (UK) 
Limited and Tesco plc.

Committee membership 
N/A

44
44

HOLLYWOOD BOWL GROUP PLCCommittee membership

A   Audit Committee

N   Nomination Committee

R   Remuneration Committee

  Chair

  Member

P B O W LING S
203

O
T

C

O

R
E

P B O W LING S
144

O
T

C

O

R
E

P B O W LING S
165

O
T

C

O

R
E

Nick Backhouse

SENIOR INDEPENDENT  
NON-EXECUTIVE DIRECTOR 

Claire Tiney

INDEPENDENT  
NON-EXECUTIVE DIRECTOR

Ivan Schofield

INDEPENDENT  
NON-EXECUTIVE DIRECTOR

Appointment
Claire joined the Group as an Independent 
Non-Executive Director in June 2016.

Appointment
Ivan joined the Group as an Independent 
Non-Executive Director in October 2017. 

Skills and experience 
Claire has over 20 years’ Board-level 
experience encompassing executive and 
non-executive roles in blue-chip retailing, 
property development and the services 
sector across the UK and Western Europe. 
Claire spent 20 years as an Executive 
Director in a number of businesses 
including Homeserve plc, Mothercare plc 
and WH Smith Group plc. Most recently, 
Claire was HR Director at McArthurGlen 
Group, the developer and owner of 
designer outlet malls throughout Europe. 
Claire was previously a Non-Executive 
Director of Family Mosaic and is currently 
a Non-Executive Director of Volution plc 
and of Topps Tiles plc. She has an MBA 
from Stirling University.

Committee membership 

A N R

Skills and experience 
Ivan has extensive experience in the leisure 
sector in the UK and across continental 
Europe. He held a number of senior roles 
for Yum Brands Inc. over 15 years, notably 
as Managing Director of KFC France and 
Western Europe and more recently as 
CEO of itsu. Prior to this, he held roles 
at Unilever and LEK Consulting. Ivan is 
also currently Chairman of Thunderbird 
Fried Chicken Limited and runs his 
own business as a senior executive 
coach and mentor. Ivan holds a BSc in 
economics with econometrics from the 
University of Bath, an MBA from INSEAD 
and is a graduate of the Meyler Campbell 
Business Coaching Programme.

Committee membership 

A N

R

Appointment
Nick joined the Group as Senior 
Independent Non-Executive Director 
in June 2016.

Skills and experience 
Nick has extensive experience at Board 
level, including non-executive roles at 
Guardian Media Group plc (2007–2017) 
where he was also the Senior Independent 
Director, All3Media (2011–2014) and 
Marston’s PLC (2012–2018), and has 
chaired the Audit Committee of each 
of those businesses. He is currently 
Chairman at the Giggling Squid restaurant 
group, the Senior Independent Director 
at Loungers plc and a Non-Executive 
Director (and Chair of the Audit Committee) 
at Hyve Group plc. In his executive career, 
Nick was the Deputy Chief Executive 
Officer of the David Lloyd Leisure Group 
and was previously Group Finance Director 
of NCP and Chief Financial Officer of the 
Laurel Pub Company and of Freeserve 
PLC. Prior to that, he was a Board Director 
of Baring Brothers International. Nick is 
a Fellow of the ICAEW and has an MA in 
economics from Cambridge University.

Committee membership 

A N R

45

GOVERNANCEFINANCIAL STATEMENTSANNUAL REPORT AND ACCOUNTS 2020STRATEGIC REPORTCORPORATE GOVERNANCE REPORT

UK CORPORATE GOVERNANCE CODE 
– COMPLIANCE STATEMENT
As a company with a premium listing on 
the London Stock Exchange, Hollywood 
Bowl Group plc is required under the FCA 
Listing Rules to comply with the provisions 
of the UK Governance Code (the Code) 
(a copy of which can be found on the 
website of the Financial Reporting Council 
www.frc.org.uk). For the financial year ended 
30 September 2020, and as set out in the 
following report, the Company complied 
with all provisions of the Code.

GOVERNANCE FRAMEWORK 
AND STRUCTURE
The Board is responsible for ensuring 
an appropriate system of governance 
is in operation throughout the Group. 
This includes a robust system of internal 
controls and a sound risk management 
framework. The Schedule of Matters 
Reserved to the Board and the Board 
Committees’ terms of reference, which 
are available to view on the Group’s 
website www.hollywoodbowlgroup.com, 
as well as Group policies and procedures 
which address specific risk areas, are 
core elements of the Group’s governance 
framework. These are reviewed annually 
by the Board and Committees to ensure 
that they remain appropriate to support 
effective governance processes.

Matters outside of the Schedule of Matters 
Reserved or the Committees’ terms of 
reference fall within the responsibility and 
authority of the CEO, including all executive 
management matters.

GENERATION AND PRESERVATION 
OF VALUE
The Group’s business model and strategy 
are set out on pages 1–41 and detail how 
the Group strategy generates value in 
the long term.

THE BOARD AND CULTURE
The Board establishes the Group’s purpose, 
values and strategy, and is satisfied that 
these are aligned with the culture of the 
business and demonstrated throughout 
the Group. The Board also continuously 
monitors the culture of the Group, through 
interactions with team members, regular 
reports to the Board on team member 
and stakeholder engagement, and specific 
updates on team culture and development 
from the Operations and Talent Directors.

KEY BOARD ROLES AND 
RESPONSIBILITIES
The Chief Executive Officer, Chief Financial 
Officer and Executive Committee are 
responsible for executing the strategy 
determined by the Board. There is a 
clear division of responsibilities between 
the Chairman and Chief Executive 
Officer. The key responsibilities of 
members of the Board are set out below. 
Biographies of each Director, which 
describe the skills and experience 
he or she brings to the Board, can 
be found on pages 44 and 45.

NON-EXECUTIVE CHAIRMAN
PETER BODDY
Peter is responsible for the leadership 
and overall effectiveness of the Board 
and for upholding high standards of 
corporate governance throughout the 
Group and particularly at Board level. 
In line with the culture promoted 
throughout the business, the Chairman 
encourages open debate and discussion 
in the interaction of the Board, and 
facilitates the effective contribution 
of the Non-Executive Directors.

CHIEF EXECUTIVE OFFICER (CEO) 
STEPHEN BURNS 
Stephen is responsible for all executive 
management matters, including: performance 
against the Group’s strategy and objectives; 
leading the executive leadership team in 
dealing with the day to day operations of 
the Group; and ensuring that the culture, 
values and standards set by the Board are 
embedded throughout the organisation.

SENIOR INDEPENDENT DIRECTOR 
(SID) 
NICK BACKHOUSE 
Nick provides a valuable sounding board for 
the Chairman and leads the Non-Executive 
Directors’ annual appraisal of the Chairman. 
Nick is available to shareholders if they have 
concerns which are not resolved through the 
normal channels of the CEO or Chairman, or 
where such contact is inappropriate.

CHIEF FINANCIAL OFFICER (CFO) 
LAURENCE KEEN 
Laurence works with the CEO to develop 
and implement the Group’s strategic 
objectives. He is also responsible for the 
financial performance of the Group, the 
Group’s property interests and supports 
the CEO in all investor relations activities.

NON-EXECUTIVE DIRECTORS 
NICK BACKHOUSE, CLAIRE TINEY, 
IVAN SCHOFIELD
Nick, Claire and Ivan provide objective 
and constructive challenge to management 
and help to develop proposals on strategy. 
They also scrutinise and monitor financial 
and operational performance, and support 
the executive leadership team, drawing 
on their background and experience 
from previous roles.

BOARD INDEPENDENCE
The Board consists of six Directors 
(including the Chairman), three of whom 
are considered to be independent as 
indicated in the table below:

Non-Independent

Peter Boddy (Chairman)

Stephen Burns (Chief Executive Officer)

Laurence Keen (Chief Financial Officer)

Independent

Nick Backhouse (SID) 

Claire Tiney

Ivan Schofield

BOARD AND COMMITTEE 
ATTENDANCE
The Board normally meets formally at least 
nine times per year, with ad-hoc meetings 
or calls convened to deal with urgent matters 
between formal Board meetings, but met 
formally on ten occasions during FY2020. 
In response to the COVID-19 pandemic 
and centre closures, a programme of 
weekly Board update calls was established, 
focused on ensuring the Board was 
informed of key operational actions. 
Additional ad-hoc meetings (all held via 
conference call during lockdown) were also 
convened where specific Board approvals 
were required (e.g. in connection with the 
equity placing in April 2020, and borrowing 
under CLBILS). The table opposite shows 
the attendance of each Director at the 
formal scheduled meetings of the Board 
and of the Committees of which they are 
a member:

46

HOLLYWOOD BOWL GROUP PLCMembership and attendance of Board Committees

Director

Peter Boddy1

Stephen Burns

Laurence Keen

Nick Backhouse

Ivan Schofield 

Claire Tiney

Board

9/10

10/10

10/10

10/10

10/10

10/10

Audit 
Committee

Remuneration 
Committee

Nomination 
Committee

2/2

2/2

2/2

2/2

3/3

3/3

3/3

2/2

2/2

2/2

1  Peter Boddy was unable to attend the scheduled Board meeting held in March 2020 having contracted 
Coronavirus. In his absence, the Board was chaired by Nick Backhouse (Senior Independent Director).

In addition to the Chief Executive and Chief Financial Officer, the Chief Marketing and 
Technology Officer, Chief People Officer and Chief Operating Officer were present at Board 
meetings during the year, to take questions from the Non-Executive Directors.

Where Non-Executive Directors are unable 
to attend a Board or Committee meeting, they 
are encouraged to submit any comments 
or questions on the matters to be discussed 
to the Chairman (or Committee Chair, as 
appropriate) in advance to ensure that their 
views are recorded and taken into account.

All Directors attended a full strategy review 
session in December and the Non-Executive 
Directors remain in regular contact with the 
Chairman, whether in face-to-face meetings 
or by telephone, to discuss matters relating 
to the Group without the executives present.

Executive Committee

C

C

P B O W LING S
151

O
T

O

R
E

P B O W LING S
144

O
T

O

R
E

P B O W LING S
187

O
T

C

O

R
E

Mathew Hart

Melanie Dickinson

CHIEF MARKETING AND TECHNOLOGY OFFICER 

CHIEF PEOPLE OFFICER

Darryl Lewis

CHIEF OPERATING OFFICER

Mathew joined the Group as 
Commercial Director in January 2015. 
He has over 25 years of commercial, 
marketing, e-commerce and general 
management experience across the 
travel, leisure and healthcare sectors.

Mathew has held executive positions 
at Holiday Autos (Managing Director), 
Lastminute.com (Group Marketing 
Director), Cannons Health Clubs (Group 
Marketing and Commercial Director), 
Nuffield Health (Group Marketing 
Director) and Encore Tickets (Group 
Marketing Director).

Melanie joined the Group as Talent 
Director in October 2012. She has over 
20 years of HR experience across the 
leisure and hospitality sectors.

Starting her career in retail operations 
before moving into HR, Melanie has held 
HR roles at Pizza Express, Holmes Place 
Health Clubs and Pizza Hut UK, and has 
a post-graduate diploma in personnel 
and development. Most recently, she 
headed the people function at Zizzi 
Restaurants, part of the Gondola Group.

Darryl joined the Group as Regional 
Director in September 2013. He has over 
25 years’ experience in key operational 
roles across the leisure sector, including 
cinema and theme parks. 

Darryl worked in general management, 
film and content planning and senior 
operational support roles in the cinema 
industry for 20 years with Showcase 
Cinemas, Warner Bros, International 
Theatres and Vue.

47

GOVERNANCEFINANCIAL STATEMENTSANNUAL REPORT AND ACCOUNTS 2020STRATEGIC REPORTCORPORATE GOVERNANCE REPORT 
continued

ACTIVITY DURING THE YEAR
The Board approves an annual calendar of agenda items to ensure that all matters are given due consideration and are reviewed at the 
appropriate point in the regulatory and financial cycle. The activity of the Board during 2020 is shown in the table below:

Board agenda for year to 30 September 2020

Oct

Dec

Jan

Mar

Apr

May

Jun

Jul

Sep

Corporate governance

Detailed feedback on Dynamic Operations and Team Member 
Listening Sessions (workforce engagement)

Directors’ conflicts of interest

Board, Director and Committee performance evaluation

Review Schedule of Matters Reserved to the Board

Committee terms of reference (approve changes)

Compliance and risk

Reviewing the principal risks and uncertainties affecting the Group

Going concern review and approval of long-term viability statement

Review and approval of Modern Slavery and Human Trafficking 
Statement

Approve anti-bribery policy

Review of Gender Pay Gap reporting

Review of Disclosure Policy, Insider List & Share Dealing Code

Group insurances

Operations, customers and suppliers

Reviewing customer experience measures

Review food supply contract

COVID-secure reopening plans

People

Review results of Team Engagement Survey

Review of team member incentive schemes

Team training and engagement

Support centre structure

Culture and development update

Performance

Approval of full-year results, the Annual Report and Accounts, 
half-year results, the Notice of Annual General Meeting and dividends

Investment review (refurbishments)

Budget

Review of dividend policy

Strategy

IT projects update













































































































Review of progress on strategic projects







48

HOLLYWOOD BOWL GROUP PLCCONFLICTS OF INTEREST
In accordance with the Board-approved 
procedure relating to Directors’ conflicts 
of interest, all Directors have confirmed 
that they did not have any conflicts of 
interest with the Group during the year.

WHISTLEBLOWING POLICY
The Group has adopted procedures 
by which employees may, in confidence, 
raise concerns relating to possible 
improprieties in matters of financial 
reporting, financial control or any other 
matter. The Whistleblowing Policy applies 
to all employees of the Group, who are 
required to confirm that they have read 
the policy and are aware of how the 
procedure operates as part of an ongoing 
internal training programme. The Board 
receives regular updates with respect 
to the whistleblowing procedures during 
the year, with all incidents reported 
to the Board having been addressed 
under appropriate Group HR policies 
and procedures.

INFORMATION AND SUPPORT
Agendas and accompanying papers are 
distributed to the Board and Committee 
members well in advance of each Board 
or Committee meeting via an electronic 
Board paper system for efficiency and 
security purposes. These include reports 
from Executive Directors, other members 
of senior management and external 
advisers. The Non-Executive Directors are 
also in regular contact with the Executive 
Directors and other senior executives 
outside of formal Board meetings.

All Directors have direct access to 
senior management should they require 
additional information on any of the items 
to be discussed.

The Board and the Audit Committee receive 
regular and specific reports to allow the 
monitoring of the adequacy of the Group’s 
systems of internal controls (described in 
more detail in the Audit Committee report 
on page 55).

APPOINTMENT AND ELECTION
Each Non-Executive Director is expected 
to devote sufficient time to the Group’s 
affairs to fulfil his or her duties. Their letter 
of appointment anticipates that they will 
need to commit a minimum of two days 
per month to the Group, specifying that 
more time may be required. This time 
commitment was reviewed and confirmed 
as appropriate by the Nomination Committee 
during the year, and each of the Non-
Executive Directors has confirmed that 
they continue to be able to devote sufficient 
time to discharge their duties effectively 
as a Director of the Company.

The performance of each Director was 
assessed as part of the Board evaluation 
process this year, with the results showing 
that the Board continues to consider each of 
the Directors to be effective and committed 
to their role. In accordance with provision 18 
of the Code, all members of the Board will 
be offering themselves for re-election at the 
Company’s AGM on 29 January 2021.

All of the Directors have a service agreement 
or a letter of appointment. The details of 
their terms are set out on page 68.

INDUCTION
All new Directors appointed to the Board 
undertake a tailored induction programme 
designed by the Chairman and Executive 
Directors, with assistance from the Company 
Secretary. The purpose of the induction is 
to give new Directors an overview of the 
Group, focusing on its culture, operations 
and governance structure.

PERFORMANCE EVALUATION
In accordance with the principles and 
provisions of the Code, the Board’s intended 
practice is to conduct a thorough review of 
the effectiveness of the performance of the 
individual Directors, the Board as a whole 
and its Committees on an annual basis. 

The 2020 evaluation was conducted by 
way of detailed questionnaires designed 
to assess the effectiveness, and assist in 
the objective review of the performance 
of, the individual Directors, the Board and 
the Committees. Separately, the Senior 
Independent Director conducted interviews 
with other Board members in order to 
evaluate the performance of the Chairman.

The findings of these questionnaires 
were reviewed and discussed at the 
Board’s meeting in December 2020 with 
the outcomes and suggested actions 
from the evaluations of the Board and 
its Committees summarised into an 
action plan for the coming year. 

The outcomes of the evaluation process 
indicated that the Board and Committees 
continue to perform effectively, and their 
operation reflects the culture and values 
of the Group. Areas of focus for the coming 
year include continuing to develop the 
Board’s monitoring of and engagement 
with team members and succession plans 
(through the Nomination Committee).

Progress in these areas will be reviewed 
and monitored by the Board and Nomination 
Committee, and assessed as part of the 
Board evaluation exercise next year. 

In accordance with provision 21 of the Code, 
during the year the Chairman considered 
whether to conduct an externally facilitated 
evaluation process but concluded that it 
would not be appropriate to do so given 
the need to focus on minimising cost within 
the business. The Chairman will continue 
to keep under consideration the appropriate 
timing for an externally facilitated evaluation.

49

GOVERNANCEFINANCIAL STATEMENTSANNUAL REPORT AND ACCOUNTS 2020STRATEGIC REPORTCORPORATE GOVERNANCE REPORT 
continued

RELATIONS WITH SHAREHOLDERS
As part of its ongoing investor relations 
programme, the Group aims to maintain 
an active dialogue with its shareholders, 
including institutional investors, to discuss 
issues relating to the performance of the 
Group. Communicating and engaging with 
investors means the Board can express 
clearly its strategy and performance and 
receive regular feedback from investors. 
It also gives the Board the opportunity 
to respond to questions and suggestions. 

The Non-Executive Directors are available 
to discuss any matter shareholders might 
wish to raise and to attend meetings 
with investors and analysts, as required. 
Investor relations activity is a standing 
item on the Board’s agenda and ensuring 
a satisfactory dialogue with shareholders, 
and receiving reports on the views of 
shareholders, is a matter reserved to 
the Board.

The Company’s AGM will be held on 
29 January 2021. Electronic proxy voting 
will be available to shareholders through 
both our registrar’s website and the CREST 
service, and shareholders will be able to 
submit questions on the business to be 
discussed at the meeting in advance to 
the email address stated in the AGM Notice. 
Voting at the AGM will be conducted by way 
of a poll and the results will be announced 
through the Regulatory News Service and 
made available on the Group’s website. 

More information on AGM arrangements 
are included in the AGM Notice which will 
be distributed to shareholders and made 
available on the Group’s website.

STAKEHOLDER ENGAGEMENT
ENGAGEMENT WITH THE 
WORKFORCE
The Chairman and the Non-Executive 
Directors frequently visit the Group’s centres, 
including attending new or refurbished 
centre openings, accompanied by regional 
support managers and centre management 
teams. At those centre visits, the Non-
Executive Directors take the opportunity 
to engage directly with team members 
at all levels, allowing them to assess 
the understanding of the Group’s culture 
across the business. Our team members 
are encouraged to engage openly with 
all colleagues, and as a result the Non-
Executives are able to effectively gauge 
the views of the workforce.

The closure of our centres, resulting 
in the majority of our team being 
placed on furlough, obviously curtailed 
the Board’s ability to directly engage 
with team members in the normal way. 
However regular updates on team member 
engagement activity during centre closure 
were provided to the Board by the CEO, 
Chief People Officer and Chief Operating 
Officer, including feedback from regular 
team member Q&A sessions and the 
return to work survey conducted in 
the lead up to reopening.

In normal circumstances, the Board receives 
a bi-annual presentation from the Chief 
Operating Officer on the output and feedback 
from centre management and team member 
listening sessions. The Chairman and Non-
Executive Directors are also invited to attend 
the annual conference, which provides further 
opportunity to engage with team members 
in a more informal environment; however, 
the conference was cancelled this year 
due to COVID-19. 

The Board has assessed the various 
methods by which the Directors engage 
with the wider workforce and continues 
to be of the view that the combination 
of the methods described above ensures 
that the Board is appropriately informed 
about, and understands, workforce views. 
The Board therefore believes that this 
approach appropriately addresses the 
requirement to engage with the workforce 
under provision 5 of the Code and does 
not currently intend to adopt one of the 
three workforce engagement methods 
suggested in that provision. The Board will, 
of course, continue to keep its stakeholder 
engagement mechanisms under review.

50

HOLLYWOOD BOWL GROUP PLCREPORT OF THE NOMINATION COMMITTEE
REPORT OF THE NOMINATION COMMITTEE

Peter Boddy

NOMINATION COMMITTEE CHAIR

  Read full biography 
on page 44

Nomination Committee

Chair

Committee members

Number of meetings 
held in the year

Peter Boddy

Nick Backhouse
Claire Tiney
Ivan Schofield

2

ROLE AND RESPONSIBILITIES
The role of the Nomination Committee is set out in its terms of reference, which were 
updated in September 2020 and are available on the Group’s website. The Committee’s 
primary purpose is to develop and maintain a formal, rigorous and transparent procedure 
for identifying appropriate candidates for Board appointments and reappointments, 
and to make recommendations to the Board.

Specific duties of the Committee include:
  regularly reviewing the structure, size and composition (including the skills, 

knowledge, experience and diversity) of the Board and making recommendations 
to the Board with regard to any changes;

  keeping under review the leadership needs of the organisation, both Executive 

and Non-Executive, with a view to ensuring the continued ability of the organisation 
to compete effectively in the marketplace; and

  reviewing annually the time commitment required of Non-Executive Directors.

The Nomination Committee is also responsible for keeping Board succession plans 
under review, monitoring compliance with the Company’s Board Diversity Policy, 
and for making recommendations on the composition of the Board Committees.

Activity during the year
The Nomination Committee has met on two occasions during the year and once since the 
year end. Committee meetings have focused on the matters set out in the table below:

Activities of the Committee during the year to 30 September 2020

Performance 
Evaluation

Board and Committee 
composition

Review of results from Committee performance evaluation 
and discussion on related actions
Review of the Committee’s terms of reference

Review of composition of the Board
Review of Non-Executive Directors’ independence
Review of time commitment requirements, including each 
Director’s external interests

Board appointments 
and reappointments

Review the reappointment of Ivan Schofield as a Non-Executive 
Director for a second three-year term

Succession planning

Consideration of succession planning for Executive Directors
Membership of Board and Committees 
Reviewing Non-Executive Director succession plans in place

Diversity Policy

Review of Board Diversity Policy 

51

GOVERNANCEFINANCIAL STATEMENTSANNUAL REPORT AND ACCOUNTS 2020STRATEGIC REPORT 
REPORT OF THE NOMINATION COMMITTEE 
continued

Following its annual review of Board and Committee composition, the independence of Non-Executive Directors and their time 
commitment, the Committee confirmed to the Board that it remains satisfied that the balance of skills, experience, independence 
and knowledge on the Board and Committees is appropriate.

Diversity
The Committee reviews the Board Diversity Policy on an annual basis and continues to be responsible for monitoring compliance with 
the objectives of that Policy. The Policy recognises the benefits of greater diversity, including gender diversity and sets out the Board’s 
commitment to ensuring that the Company’s Directors bring a wide range of skills, knowledge, experience, backgrounds and perspectives 
to their role. The key objective of the Policy is to set out the process to be followed by the Nomination Committee during the recruitment 
process in order to ensure that an appropriately diverse pool of candidates is considered to enhance the balance of skills and backgrounds 
on the Board. As there has been no Board recruitment process during the year, there is no progress to report against that objective; however, 
the policy also sets out additional Nomination Committee responsibilities and objectives, and progress against those items is set out below:

Objective/responsibility

Progress/activity in FY2020

Review regularly the structure, size, and composition of the Board 
(including the balance of skills, knowledge, and experience), taking 
into account this Policy, and make recommendations to the Board   
for any changes.

When considering Board succession planning, have regard to the 
Board Diversity Policy.

Review the Board Diversity Policy annually, assessing its effectiveness 
and recommending any changes to the Board.

This is an annually recurring item on the Committee’s agenda and 
was reviewed by the Committee at its meeting in September 2020. 
No changes to the composition of the Board were proposed. 

The NED succession planning matrix highlights current diversity 
statistics on the Board and will continue to be considered against 
the Board Diversity Policy.

The Policy was reviewed by the Committee in December 2020, 
with no proposed changes. It will continue to be reviewed annually 
by the Committee.

The Board currently consists of one female (17 per cent) and five male (83 per cent) Directors. Board meetings are typically attended by the 
other members of the Company’s Executive Committee and, taking into account their attendance, the proportion of females contributing 
to Board discussions increases to 22 per cent. Overall gender diversity across the business is good (as shown in the statistics on page 39), 
with the Committee and the Executive team recognising the need to support the development of women into senior management roles.

The Committee is mindful of the Investment Association’s expectations concerning female representation on FTSE small-cap boards. 
Although there is no short-term intention to change the composition of the Board (which continues to operate effectively), diversity 
considerations will be a factor of any future Board recruitment process in line with the Board Diversity Policy described above.

Succession planning
The Committee’s oversight of Executive succession planning continued during the year, with the aim of ensuring that the Group’s future 
leadership will have the qualities necessary to support the delivery of our strategic objectives. The Executive Team maintains a detailed 
succession planning matrix identifying at least one potential internal successor for each key role. The usual programme of opportunities 
for potential executive successors to meet and present to the Board to further their development has been slightly curtailed during the 
year as a result of the COVID-19 situation, but the Committee recognises the need to ensure that such opportunities continue to be made 
available in the future.

A Non-Executive succession planning matrix is used as a tool to support consideration of the timing for future appointments and to identify 
key search criteria (including skills, experience and diversity) for potential candidate shortlists. This includes a plan to ensure that the current 
Non-Executives (all but one of whom were appointed at IPO) do not stand down from the Board at the same time, and that the orderly 
succession of Committee Chairs is also considered.

Annual evaluation
Although the option of conducting an externally facilitated Board and Committee evaluation process during the year was considered, due 
to the exceptional circumstances relating to the COVID-19 pandemic and the need to focus on minimising costs, it was decided it would 
not be appropriate to do so on this occasion. 

An internal evaluation process, by way of questionnaires completed by Committee members and other attendees, was conducted following 
the year end with the results discussed at the Committee’s meeting in December 2020. In general, the evaluation confirmed that the 
Committee has operated effectively during the year, with feedback indicating that good progress has been made on succession plans.

PETER BODDY
CHAIR OF THE NOMINATION COMMITTEE
14 December 2020

52

HOLLYWOOD BOWL GROUP PLCREPORT OF THE AUDIT COMMITTEE

Nick Backhouse

AUDIT COMMITTEE CHAIR

  Read full biography 
on page 45 

The table below sets out the members of the Audit Committee as at 30 September 2020:

Audit Committee

Chair

Committee members 

Nick Backhouse

Claire Tiney
Ivan Schofield

ROLE AND RESPONSIBILITIES
The Audit Committee’s duties and responsibilities are set out in full in its terms of 
reference, which are available on the Company’s website. The terms of reference 
were reviewed by the Committee during the year and were updated with the approval 
of the Board.

SPECIFIC DUTIES OF THE COMMITTEE INCLUDE:
  monitoring the integrity of the annual and interim Financial Statements;
  keeping under review the internal financial control systems; and
  overseeing the relationship with the internal and external audit functions.

.

DEAR SHAREHOLDERS,
On behalf of the Board, I am pleased to 
present the Audit Committee report for 
the year ended 30 September 2020. 

The year has very much been one of two 
halves, with positive financial performance 
in the first half then significantly impacted 
by the COVID-19 pandemic and the closure 
of the Group’s centres from the end of 
March. The Committee’s role, in particular 
in monitoring the integrity of annual 
and half-year Financial Statements and 
monitoring the effectiveness of financial 
controls and risk management systems, is 
always important, but has undoubtedly been 
heightened this year as a result of COVID-19. 

We maintain a formal schedule of annual 
activity which ensures that we cover 
our key responsibilities under our terms 
of reference and that we adhere to the 
Code and other regulatory requirements. 
COVID-19 aside, areas of particular focus 
this year have been the significant financial 
judgements identified by the finance team 
(see more detail in the table on page 55), 
completing the adoption of IFRS 16 Leases, 
and continuing to develop the Committee’s 
engagement with the internal audit function.

The impact of COVID-19 has inevitably 
resulted in a focus on the liquidity and 
cash position of businesses. As described 
elsewhere in the report, the Board took 
steps during lockdown to ensure the 
continuing strength of the Company’s 
cash position, and we are satisfied that 
the financial position of the Group supports 
both the going concern basis of accounting 

53

GOVERNANCEFINANCIAL STATEMENTSANNUAL REPORT AND ACCOUNTS 2020STRATEGIC REPORT 
REPORT OF THE AUDIT COMMITTEE 
continued

and the long-term viability statement 
(set out on pages 30 and 31). In the absence 
of an external audit review at the half year, 
the Committee ensured that the scenarios 
prepared by management to assess the 
impact of COVID-19 on future forecasts, 
and the going concern assessment, were 
appropriately challenged and scrutinised.

The Group adopted IFRS 16 Leases with 
our initial disclosure under the new standard 
in our half-yearly report. Initially, the Group 
adopted a single discount rate for property 
leases; however, since the half-year report 
the Committee has considered and agreed 
with management’s recommendation 
to adopt a rate range, with the rationale 
for the change explained in note 2 to the 
Financial Statements.

We have continued to engage with the 
Group’s internal audit function to increase 
its scope and provide additional assurance 
over specifically identified controls and 
procedures. Although internal audit activity 
during the second half of the year was 
limited due to the closure of the Group’s 
centres, the Committee received an 

update on the internal audit function’s 
ongoing review of food and drink standards 
within centres, and was satisfied that 
the process, and level of engagement 
of local management teams where 
areas for improvement were identified, 
was appropriate.

Our annual review of the effectiveness of the 
external audit process is described in more 
detail on page 56. We have reviewed KPMG 
LLP’s (KPMG) continuing independence, 
and the Committee is satisfied that KPMG 
continues to be independent and provides 
an effective audit service. 

The Audit Committee has evaluated its 
own performance this year by way of a 
questionnaire completed by each member 
of the Committee and other regular 
attendees. We discussed the outcome 
of the evaluation process at our meeting 
in November 2020. The evaluation responses 
indicated that the Committee continues 
to operate effectively. Although no particular 
areas of concern were highlighted, the 
need for the Committee to ensure that 
risk areas associated with COVID-19 remain 

in focus in FY2021 was noted. There have 
been no changes to the composition of 
the Committee during the year and we 
therefore continue to be comprised wholly 
of independent Non-Executive Directors. 
The Board has confirmed that it is satisfied 
that I have recent and relevant financial 
experience as recommended under the 
Code by virtue of my qualification as 
a chartered accountant, my executive 
background in finance roles, and my 
experience as an audit committee chair 
in other non-executive positions. As all 
members of the Committee have experience 
as Directors of other companies in the retail 
and leisure sector, the Board is also satisfied 
that the Audit Committee as a whole 
continues to have competence relevant 
to the sector in which the Group operates.

NICK BACKHOUSE
CHAIR OF THE AUDIT COMMITTEE
14 December 2020

MEETINGS AND ATTENDEES
The Audit Committee meets at least three times per year. The names of the attendees of the Audit Committee meetings are set out in the 
table on page 47.

The external auditor has the right to attend meetings. Outside of the formal regular meeting programme, the Audit Committee Chair 
maintains a dialogue with key individuals involved in the Group’s governance, including the Chairman, the Chief Executive Officer, the Chief 
Financial Officer and the external audit lead partner.

ACTIVITY DURING THE YEAR
The Audit Committee was scheduled to meet four times during the year however, due to the COVID-19 pandemic, three meetings were 
convened and the Committee has met once since the year end, and discussed the topics set out in the table below.

Activities of the Committee during the year to 30 September 2020

Nov

May

Sep

Financial Statements and reports 

Review and recommendation to the Board of full-year results, the Annual Report and Accounts and half-year results

Going concern assessment

Fair, balanced and understandable assessment

Review of significant accounting policies

Risk register review

External audit

External audit plan and engagement

External auditor reports to the Committee (including full-year reports)

Assessment of external auditor effectiveness

Independence confirmation and review of non-audit services, spend and policy

Internal controls

Annual review of internal audit function requirement

Review of risk management and internal controls

Internal audit reports

Assessment of internal audit effectiveness

54









































HOLLYWOOD BOWL GROUP PLCActivities of the Committee during the year to 30 September 2020

Nov

May

Sep

Other

Review of results from Committee performance evaluation and discussion of related actions

Review of the Committee’s terms of reference

IFRS accounting standards update (in particular, review of the impact of IFRS 16)













The key areas of focus of the Committee are discussed in more detail in the rest of this report.

SIGNIFICANT ISSUES CONSIDERED IN RELATION TO THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS
Significant issues and accounting judgements are identified by the finance team and the external audit process and are reviewed by the 
Audit Committee. The significant issues considered by the Committee in respect of the year ended 30 September 2020 are set out in the 
table below:

Significant issues and judgements

How the issues were addressed

Going concern

Determining the incremental borrowing rate to measure liabilities

Valuation of property, plant and equipment and right-of-use assets

The Committee considered the base case, downside and severe but 
plausible downside scenarios produced by management in support 
of the going concern assessment, and challenged managements 
assumptions around continuing COVID restrictions, like-for-like 
revenue forecasts. Notwithstanding the material uncertainty relating 
to the possibility of a convent breach, taking account of the cash 
available to the business, cash flow forecasts and covenant headroom 
under these scenarios (including the Company’s ability to repay 
debt), the committee agreed with management’s recommendation 
that it is appropriate to adopt the going concern basis of accounting. 
Refer to note 2 to the Financial Statements for more information.

The Committee reviewed the calculations and assumptions underlying 
the trigger tests for impairment of PPE and ROU assets at the Group’s 
cash generating units (CGUs). Key considerations included capital 
expenditure assumptions, and the determination of the discount rate 
to be applied to forecast cash flows. The Committee agreed with 
managements estimates of the recoverable amount of PPE and ROU 
assets, and that there was no impairment to CGUs.

The Committee reviewed the calculations and assumptions 
supporting the Group’s adoption of IFRS 16 Leases, having 
received regular updates on the intended approach and policy 
throughout the year. In particular, the Committee discussed and 
challenged the application of a range of discount rates to groups 
of property leases depending on lease length. The Committee is 
satisfied that the estimate of valuation of lease liabilities and ROU 
assets on transition to IFRS 16 is appropriate. Refer to page 36 and 
also note 2 to the Financial Statements for further information.

RISK MANAGEMENT AND INTERNAL CONTROLS
The Board has overall responsibility for setting the Group’s risk appetite and ensuring that there is an effective risk management framework 
to maintain appropriate levels of risk. The Board has, however, delegated responsibility for review of the risk management methodology, 
and the effectiveness of internal controls, to the Audit Committee.

The Group’s system of internal controls comprises entity-wide, high-level controls, controls over business processes and centre-level 
controls. Policies and procedures, including clearly defined levels of delegated authority, have been communicated throughout the Group. 
Internal controls have been implemented in respect of the key operational and financial processes of the business. These policies are 
designed to ensure the accuracy and reliability of financial reporting and govern the preparation of the Financial Statements. The Board 
is ultimately responsible for the Group’s system of internal controls and risk management and discharges its duties in this area by:

  holding regular Board meetings to consider the matters reserved for its consideration;
  receiving regular management reports which provide an assessment of key risks and controls;
  scheduling annual Board reviews of strategy including reviews of the material risks and uncertainties (including emerging risks) 

facing the business;

  ensuring there is a clear organisational structure with defined responsibilities and levels of authority; 
  ensuring there are documented policies and procedures in place; and
  reviewing regular reports containing detailed information regarding financial performance, rolling forecasts, actual and forecast covenant 

compliance, and financial and non-financial KPIs.

55

GOVERNANCEFINANCIAL STATEMENTSANNUAL REPORT AND ACCOUNTS 2020STRATEGIC REPORTREPORT OF THE AUDIT COMMITTEE 
continued

The process by which the Audit Committee 
has monitored and reviewed the 
effectiveness of the system of internal 
controls and risk management during 
the year has included:

  a rigorous review and subsequent 

updating of the Group’s risk register 
which is compiled and maintained 
by senior managers within the Group;
  reviewing the system of financial and 
accounting controls, and considering 
the view of the external auditor in relation 
to the effectiveness of such controls;
  reporting and updating the Board on the 
risk and control culture within the Group; 
and

  considering the Financial Reporting 
Council’s 2014 ‘Guidance on Risk 
Management, Internal Control and 
Related Financial and Business Reporting’.

During the first quarter of FY2020, the 
Audit Committee was made aware of a 
cyber security fraud that had taken place, 
resulting in a payment of £93,000 to a bank 
account that was fraudulently portrayed as 
a supplier’s new bank account. The fraud 
was quickly identified using the Group’s 
weekly payment checks, and although 
£88,000 was subsequently recovered, 
the incident identified a flaw in the 
internal controls process for bank account 
changes. A full review of the process was 
undertaken, with a number of changes 
being implemented to prevent a breach 
occurring again. No other weaknesses in 
the risk management and internal control 
systems have been raised or identified, 
and the Audit Committee is satisfied that 
the systems are effective. 

The Committee conducted a review of 
the full risk register in May 2020, with a 
particular focus on ensuring that the impact 
of COVID-19 was appropriately captured in 
new and existing risks, and a further session 
to review the detailed risk register was held 
with the Board in September 2020. 

INTERNAL AUDIT
The Group has an internal audit function 
which focuses on performing regular testing 
of the processes and controls implemented 
in centres. Internal audit findings are 
presented to the relevant centre manager 
and the Chief Financial Officer for review. 
A member of the internal audit team attends 
Audit Committee meetings at least once per 
year to provide updates on the activities of 
the internal audit function. The Committee 
has assessed the effectiveness of the 
internal audit function as part of its annual 
performance evaluation process and is 
satisfied that the current arrangements 

remain appropriate and effective for the 
Company. During the year, the internal 
audit function’s remit has been increased 
to include a review of team loyalty benefits 
(which was placed on hold following the 
closure of centres) and to provide assurance 
on a revised accounts payable process.

EXTERNAL AUDITOR
The Audit Committee is responsible for 
overseeing the Group’s relationship with 
its external auditor, KPMG. During the year, 
the Audit Committee has discharged this 
responsibility by:

  agreeing the scope of the external audit 
and negotiating the remuneration of the 
external auditor;

  receiving regular reports from the 

external auditor, including with regard 
to audit strategy and year-end audits;
  regularly meeting the external auditor 
without management present; and
  assessing the auditor’s independence 
and the effectiveness of the external 
audit process.

EXTERNAL AUDIT   
EFFECTIVENESS REVIEW
The Committee reviewed the effectiveness 
of the external audit process following 
completion of the FY2019 audit. A report was 
prepared by the finance team summarising 
its view of KPMG’s effectiveness based on 
interactions during the audit and set out 
under three headings: ‘Mindset and Culture’; 
‘Skills, Character and Knowledge’; and 
‘Quality Control’. The Committee also took 
into account its own interactions with the 
external auditor in forming its conclusion 
that both KPMG and the external audit 
process were effective, and that KPMG 
provide an appropriate level of professional 
scepticism and openness to the process.

NON-AUDIT SERVICES
The engagement of the external audit 
firm to provide non-audit services to the 
Group can impact on the independence 
assessment. The Company has a policy 
which requires Audit Committee approval 
for any non-audit services which exceed 
£25,000 in value. The engagement of the 
external auditor to provide any non-audit 
services for less than £25,000 (with the 
exception of the issuance of turnover 
certificates and financial covenant tests, 
for which authority was delegated to the 
Chief Financial Officer to approve where 
the fee is less than £5,000 per certificate) 
must be discussed with the Audit 
Committee Chair in advance. All requests 
to use the external auditor for non-audit 
services must be reviewed by the Chief 

Financial Officer. The policy recognises that 
certain non-audit services may not be carried 
out by the external auditor (in accordance 
with the EU Statutory Audit regime).

During the year ended 30 September 2020, 
KPMG was engaged to provide permitted 
non-audit services relating to the issuance 
of turnover and covenant certificates for a 
fee of £13,500, representing 5.8 per cent of 
the total audit fee. The external auditor is 
best placed to undertake other accounting, 
advisory and consultancy work in view of 
its knowledge of the business, as well as 
confidentiality and cost considerations. 
This is shown in further detail in note 6 
to the Financial Statements.

APPOINTMENT AND TENURE
KPMG was first appointed as the Group’s 
external auditor in 2007. Peter Selvey was 
appointed as the lead audit partner for the 
FY2017 audit and, in line with the policy on 
lead partner rotation, is anticipated to rotate 
off the Group’s audit after the FY2021 audit.

The Audit Committee continues to be 
satisfied with the scope of the external 
auditor’s work, the effectiveness of the 
external audit process, and that KPMG 
continues to be independent and objective. 
The Committee is therefore pleased to 
recommend that KPMG be re-appointed 
as the Group’s auditor at the 2021 AGM.

During the year, the Committee considered 
the appropriate timing for putting the 
external audit contract out to tender, but 
concluded there was no immediate need 
to do so. In accordance with the Code and 
EU legislation, it remains the Committee’s 
intention that the external audit contract 
will be put out to tender at least every 
ten years (commencing from the date of 
the Group’s IPO, at which point it became 
a ‘public interest entity’ for the purpose 
of EU audit tendering requirements).

NICK BACKHOUSE
CHAIR OF THE AUDIT COMMITTEE
14 December 2020

56

HOLLYWOOD BOWL GROUP PLCREPORT OF THE REMUNERATION COMMITTEE

Claire Tiney

REMUNERATION COMMITTEE 
CHAIR

  Read full biography 
on page 45

Remuneration Committee

Chair

Committee members 

Number of meetings held in the year

Claire Tiney

Nick Backhouse
Ivan Schofield

2

ROLE AND RESPONSIBILITIES
The role of the Remuneration Committee is set out in its terms of reference, which are 
available on the Group’s website. The Committee’s primary purpose is to develop and 
determine the Group’s Remuneration Policy for the Executive Directors, Chairman and 
senior management.

SPECIFIC DUTIES OF THE COMMITTEE INCLUDE:
  setting the Remuneration Policy for Executive Directors, Chairman and 

senior management;

  determining individual pay awards within the terms of the agreed Policy; 
and ensuring that the Remuneration Policy operates to align the interests 
of management with those of shareholders.

The Committee also has responsibility for reviewing pay and conditions across the 
Group and the alignment of incentives and rewards with culture.

DEAR SHAREHOLDERS,
On behalf of the Remuneration Committee, 
I am pleased to present the Directors’ 
Remuneration Report for the year ended 
30 September 2020. 

This report has been prepared in 
accordance with The Large and Medium-
sized Companies and Groups (Accounts 
and Reports) (Amendment) Regulations 2013, 
The Companies (Directors’ Remuneration 
Policy and Directors’ Remuneration Report) 
Regulations 2019, the FCA Listing Rules and 
the Code. The report is split into three parts:

  the annual statement by the Chair 
of the Remuneration Committee;

  a summary of the Directors’ 

Remuneration Policy which was put to 
a binding shareholder vote at the AGM 
in January 2020 and applies for three 
years from the date of approval; and
  the annual report on remuneration 

which sets out payments made to the 
Directors and details the link between 
Company performance and remuneration 
for FY2020. The annual report on 
remuneration is subject to an advisory 
shareholder vote at the 2021 AGM.

57

GOVERNANCEFINANCIAL STATEMENTSANNUAL REPORT AND ACCOUNTS 2020STRATEGIC REPORT 
REPORT OF THE REMUNERATION COMMITTEE 
continued

REMUNERATION FRAMEWORK
The Directors’ Remuneration Policy 
(the Policy) continues to support our 
remuneration principles, which are to:

  attract and retain the best talent;
  drive behaviours which support the 

Group’s strategy and business objectives 
which are developed in the long-
term interests of the Company and 
its shareholders;

  reward senior management 

appropriately for their personal and 
collective achievements;

  provide incentives that help to maintain 
commitment over the longer term and 
align the interests of senior management 
with those of shareholders; and
  ensure that a significant percentage 
of the overall reward package for the 
executives and senior managers remains 
at risk dependent upon performance and 
that their pay and benefits adequately 
take account of reward versus risk. 

RESPONSE TO COVID-19
As announced, the Company has been 
proactively taking action to manage the 
impact of COVID-19. The Group furloughed 
98.6 per cent of all its team members as 
well as working closely with key suppliers, 
including landlords, to reduce its cash 
burn during the centre closure period. 
Furthermore, the Board decided to cancel 
its dividend for FY2020. The Board, including 
the Executive Directors, took the decision 
to reduce salary by 20 per cent for a period 
of three months in order to conserve cash 
and to defer this payment until the business 
was able to reopen in line with government 
guidelines. Payment of the deferred salary 
was made in October 2020.

The decision was also taken to leave base 
salaries unchanged; therefore, there will be 
no increases for the Board, including the 
Executive Directors, in November 2020. 

PERFORMANCE IN FY2020 AND 
REMUNERATION OUTCOMES
As a result of the five-month temporary 
closure of the entire estate from March 
due to government-mandated measures, 
revenue declined by 38.8 per cent and the 
threshold level of EBITDA performance to 
trigger a bonus payment under the annual 
bonus plan was not met. Therefore, no 
bonuses are payable to the Executive 
Directors in respect of FY2020.

Although performance up to February 2020 
was strong and ahead of management’s 
budget, due to the impact of actions taken 
by the Company in response to COVID-19 
(including participation in the CJRS, raising 
capital from shareholders through the equity 
placing in April 2020, the cancellation of 
the interim dividend and borrowing under 
CLBILS), the Committee agreed it would 
not be appropriate to exercise its discretion 
to award any bonus amount to reflect the 
positive performance in the earlier part 
of FY2020.

The LTIP award granted in February 2018 is 
due to vest in February 2021, based on EPS 
performance over the three-year period 
to 30 September 2020. The EPS for the 
year ending 30 September 2020 was 0.90 
pence, which fell below the threshold to 
maximum target range of 13.86 pence to 
14.85 pence and therefore the formulaic 
outcome results in nil vesting for this award. 
However, in assessing the level of vesting, 
the Committee carefully considered the 
following factors:

  The adjusted EPS was 14.86 pence for the 
second year of the performance period, 
to 30 September 2019. This represented 
growth of 22 per cent on the adjusted 
EPS of 12.17 pence for the year prior to 
grant (i.e. year to 30 September 2017). 
Had the condition been measured at 
this point, the award would have vested 
in full as this outcome was above the 
maximum target of 14.85 pence.
  Assessing the adjusted EPS for the 

twelve-month period ending in February 
2020, which was the last full month prior 
to closure of the Company’s centres, 
gives an adjusted EPS figure of 16.36 
pence. This is in excess of the maximum 
target of 14.85 pence.

  The targets were set at grant at a 

stretching level, in particular with the ‘on 
target’ threshold being set at 93 per cent 
of maximum.

  Examining the shareholder experience 
over the life of the award, the total 
shareholder return including dividends 
was in excess of 50 per cent in the first 
two years from grant in February 2018, 
prior to the negative impacts on the 
share price of the pandemic.

  The Committee judged the performance 
of the Executive team to be particularly 
strong during the last three years, with 
particular highlights being the excellent 
returns on investment achieved on 
refurbishments and rebrands, the 
success of the new centres, including 
the launch of Puttstars, as well as the 
continued growth of the Group’s culture 
and people focus.

Taking into account these factors, 
the Committee determined that it was 
appropriate to make use of the provisions 
of the Directors’ Remuneration Policy to 
apply discretion to allow the award to vest 
in full based on the annualised adjusted 
EPS of 16.36 pence, reflecting the underlying 
business and Executive team performance. 
However, vesting will be pro-rated to reflect 
the time period over which the condition 
was measured, i.e. 29 months out of the 
original 36-month performance period, 
and therefore the award is due to vest 
at 81 per cent of maximum.

The Committee is conscious that 
shareholders have lost value during 
the pandemic. In order to further align 
management with shareholders over 
the longer term:

  Awards will have a two-year holding 

period applied which was not applicable 
to the original grant and the release 
of the awards will be subject to a 
requirement to remain in service until 
6 February 2023.

  The awards will only be released to the 
extent that the Committee judges the 
business to be performing in line with 
market expectations and to the extent 
that the Group is in a position to resume 
the dividend.

remuneration decisions for 
fy2021
FY2021 bonus
Given the ongoing COVID-19 pandemic, the 
possibility of local and national lockdowns 
which may have an impact on the ability 
of the business to trade, coupled with 
the potential impact COVID-19 could still 
have on the economy, although targets 
have been set for the full financial year, the 
Committee will closely monitor the situation 
on a quarterly basis and may choose to 
make appropriate adjustments to the 
target. Full disclosure will be communicated 
retrospectively in next year’s Remuneration 
Report, as usual.

FY2021 LTIP
During FY2021, the Committee intends to 
grant LTIPs with a maximum opportunity 
of 100 per cent of salary. These levels are 
unchanged from previous years. In light 
of the uncertainty around COVID-19, LTIP 
targets have not yet been approved by 
the Committee and communicated to 
participants. These will be disclosed in next 
year’s Remuneration Report. The intention 
is to monitor performance over the vesting 
period to ensure there is no windfall gain 
on share price.

58

HOLLYWOOD BOWL GROUP PLCSTAKEHOLDER ENGAGEMENT
The Committee is regularly updated on pay and benefits arrangements for team members across the Group, and takes into account 
colleague remuneration as part of its review of Executive Remuneration.

I am always happy to engage with shareholders and investors on remuneration matters, in particular to ensure transparency around our 
decision-making on Executive pay. 

ANNUAL GENERAL MEETING
On behalf of the Board, I would like to thank shareholders for their continued support. As COVID-19 restrictions mean it is uncertain whether 
shareholders will be able to attend the 2021 AGM, I would encourage any shareholders with questions about the Company’s Remuneration 
Policy or arrangements to contact me via the Company Secretary.

CLAIRE TINEY
CHAIR OF THE REMUNERATION COMMITTEE
14 December 2020

The Remuneration Committee met on two occasions during the year and has met once since the year end, and discussed the topics set out 
in the table below:

Activities of the Committee during the year to 30 September 2020

Nov

Sep

Review of FY2019 performance and bonus outturn and approval of Directors’ bonuses for FY2019

Impact of IFRS 16 on LTIP targets

Approval of Directors’ bonus KPIs/targets for FY2020 and FY2020 pay

Agreeing approach to FY2021 bonus targets

Proposed 2020 LTIP performance targets

Share plan awards and vestings

Review of share schemes

Approval of centre managers’ FY2019 bonus outturn

Review of Directors’ Remuneration Report (including to ensure compliance with the Remuneration Reporting Regulations)

Approve Remuneration Policy

Consideration of pay and conditions across the Group

Review of 2019 AGM and proxy advisory comments

Updates on corporate governance developments

Review of the Committee’s terms of reference

COVID-19 impacts on remuneration

































59

GOVERNANCEFINANCIAL STATEMENTSANNUAL REPORT AND ACCOUNTS 2020STRATEGIC REPORTDIRECTORS’ REMUNERATION POLICY

INTRODUCTION
The Directors’ Remuneration Policy (the Policy) was approved by shareholders at the AGM on 30 January 2020 (97.5 per cent of votes cast 
being in favour) and became effective from that date. There are no proposals to amend the Policy at the 2021 AGM.

A summary of the Policy is included for reference to assist with the understanding of the contents of this report. The full Policy can be found 
on the Company’s website, www.hollywoodbowlgroup.com, in the ‘Investors’ section, under ‘Reports and presentations’, in our FY2019 Annual 
Report. The Gender Pay Report is also on the Company’s website.

For ease of reference, the following table summarises each element of remuneration and how it supports the Group’s short and long-term 
strategic objectives.

Performance metrics used, 
weighting and time period 
applicable

None.

Operation

Opportunity

Salaries are normally reviewed 
annually and any changes are effective 
from 1 November. 

When determining an appropriate 
level of salary, the Remuneration 
Committee considers:

  remuneration practices within 

the Company; 

  the performance of the individual 

Executive Director;

  the individual Executive Director’s 
experience and responsibilities; 

  the general performance of 

the Company; 

  salaries within the ranges paid 

by companies in the comparator 
group used for remuneration 
benchmarking; and 

  the economic environment.

The Executive Directors receive 
benefits which include, but are not 
limited to, family private health 
cover, death in service life assurance, 
income protection insurance and 
travel expenses for business-related 
travel (including tax if any).

The Committee retains discretion to 
provide pension funding in the form 
of a salary supplement or a direct 
contribution to a pension scheme. 
Any salary supplement would not 
form part of the salary for the 
purposes of determining the extent 
of participation in the Company’s 
incentive arrangements.

Base salaries will be set at 
an appropriate level with 
a comparator group of 
comparable sized companies 
and will normally increase 
with increases made to the 
wider employee workforce.

Individuals who are recruited 
or promoted to the Board 
may, on occasion, have 
their salaries set below the 
targeted Policy level until 
they become established 
in their role. In such cases, 
subsequent increases in 
salary may be higher than 
the average until the target 
positioning is achieved.

The maximum will be set 
at the cost of providing the 
benefits described.

None.

The current Executive 
Directors receive pension 
funding equal to five per cent 
of base salary.

None.

Future incoming Executive 
Directors will receive pension 
funding in line with the 
level received by the wider 
employee workforce.

How the element supports our 
short- and long-term strategic 
objectives
SALARY
Provides a base level of 
remuneration to support the 
recruitment and retention 
of Executive Directors with 
the necessary experience 
and expertise to deliver the 
Company’s strategy.

BENEFITS
Provide a competitive level 
of benefits.

PENSION
Provides market competitive 
retirement benefits.

60

HOLLYWOOD BOWL GROUP PLCHow the element supports our 
short- and long-term strategic 
objectives
ANNUAL BONUS PLAN
Provides a significant incentive 
to the Executive Directors 
linked to achievement in 
delivering goals that are closely 
aligned with the Company’s 
strategy and the creation of 
value for shareholders.

Operation

Opportunity

Performance metrics used, 
weighting and time period 
applicable

The maximum bonus 
opportunity is 100 per cent 
of base salary.

The bonus payout is based on 
Group financial performance 
measured over the financial year.

The Remuneration Committee will 
determine the bonus payable after 
the year end based on performance 
against objectives and targets. 
Bonus payments per individual 
will be both proportionate to the 
overall size of the bonus pot and 
each individual’s performance versus 
their personal objectives.

Annual bonuses are paid part in cash 
and part in shares deferred for two 
years. The maximum proportion of 
an annual bonus which may be paid in 
cash is 65 per cent. It should be noted 
that the Remuneration Committee 
has taken the view that due to 
their considerable shareholdings 
in the Company, automatic deferral 
of annual bonuses into shares is 
unnecessary for the current Executive 
Directors. As such, the Remuneration 
Committee intends to pay annual 
bonuses to the current Executive 
Directors in cash, but will retain the 
ability to apply an appropriate level 
of deferral following any material sell 
down to ensure that shareholding 
requirements continue to be met. 

On change of control, the Remuneration 
Committee may pay bonuses on a pro-
rata basis measured on performance 
up to the date of change of control. 

Malus and clawback provisions will 
apply to enable the Company to 
recover sums paid or withhold the 
payment of any sum in the event of 
a material misstatement resulting 
in an adjustment to the audited 
consolidated accounts of the Group 
or action or conduct which, in the 
reasonable opinion of the Board, 
amounts to employee misbehaviour, 
fraud or gross misconduct.

61

GOVERNANCEFINANCIAL STATEMENTSANNUAL REPORT AND ACCOUNTS 2020STRATEGIC REPORTHow the element supports our 
short- and long-term strategic 
objectives
LONG TERM INCENTIVE 
PLAN
Awards are designed to 
incentivise the Executive 
Directors to maximise total 
shareholder returns by 
successfully delivering the 
Company’s objectives and to 
share in the resulting increase 
in total shareholder value.

DIRECTORS’ REMUNERATION POLICY 
continued

Operation

Opportunity

Award maximum of 150 per 
cent of base salary.

The Executive Directors 
currently receive LTIP awards 
of 100 per cent of base salary.

Awards are granted annually in the 
form of nil cost options or conditional 
awards of shares. These will vest at the 
end of a three-year period subject to:

  an Executive Director’s continued 

employment at the date of vesting; 
and

  satisfaction of the 

performance conditions.

A further two-year holding period will 
apply post-vesting.

The Remuneration Committee may 
award dividend equivalents on awards 
to the extent that these vest.

Malus and clawback provisions 
will apply to enable the Company 
to recover sums paid or withhold 
the payment of any sum in the 
event of a material misstatement 
resulting in an adjustment to the 
audited consolidated accounts of the 
Company or action or conduct which, 
in the reasonable opinion of the Board, 
amounts to employee misbehaviour, 
fraud or gross misconduct.

Performance metrics used, 
weighting and time period 
applicable

The awards will be subject to 
performance targets aligned 
with the Group’s strategy of 
delivering strong returns to 
shareholders and earnings 
performance. The awards for 
this financial year will be subject 
to EPS in the final year of the 
performance period.

The Remuneration Committee 
retains discretion in exceptional 
circumstances to change 
performance measures and 
targets and the weightings 
attached to performance 
measures part-way through a 
performance period if there is 
a significant and material event 
which causes the Remuneration 
Committee to believe the 
original measures, weightings 
and targets are no longer 
appropriate. Discretion may 
also be exercised in cases 
where the Remuneration 
Committee believes that the 
vesting outcome is not a fair 
and accurate reflection of 
business performance.

ALL-EMPLOYEE PLAN
To encourage wide employee 
share ownership and thereby 
align employees’ interests with 
those of shareholders.

The Company has a Share Incentive 
Plan (which is HMRC approved and 
is open to all eligible staff) in which 
the Executive Directors are eligible 
to participate.

UK scheme in line with HMRC 
limits as amended from time 
to time.

None.

The Company also operates 
a Sharesave scheme.

SHAREHOLDING 
REQUIREMENT
To support long-term 
commitment to the Company 
and the alignment of Executive 
Director interests with those 
of shareholders.

The Remuneration Committee has 
adopted formal shareholding guidelines 
that will encourage the Executive 
Directors to build holdings over a 
five-year period, and subsequently 
hold a shareholding equivalent to 
a percentage of base salary. 

CHAIRMAN AND 
NON-EXECUTIVE 
DIRECTOR FEES
Provide a level of fees to 
support recruitment and 
retention of Non-Executive 
Directors with the necessary 
experience to advise and 
assist with establishing and 
monitoring the Company’s 
strategic objectives.

Adherence to these guidelines is a 
condition of continued participation 
in the equity incentive arrangements.

Non-Executive Directors are paid 
a base fee. An additional payment 
is paid to the Senior Independent 
Director in respect of the additional 
duties of this role. No additional fees 
are paid to Non-Executive Directors 
or the Chairman of the Company for 
the membership or chairmanship 
of Committees.

Fees are reviewed annually, based 
on equivalent roles in an appropriate 
comparator group used to review 
salaries paid to the Executive Directors.

62

200 per cent of salary.

None.

The base fees for Non-
Executive Directors are 
set with reference to the 
market rate.

None.

HOLLYWOOD BOWL GROUP PLCANNUAL REPORT ON REMUNERATION

SINGLE TOTAL FIGURE OF REMUNERATION (AUDITED)
Executive Directors (audited)
The table below sets out the single total figure of remuneration and breakdown for each Executive Director in respect of FY2020. 
Comparative figures for FY2019 have been provided. Figures provided have been calculated in accordance with the UK disclosure 
requirements: The Large and Medium-Sized Companies and Groups (Accounts and Reports) (Amendment) Regulations 2013 
(Schedule 8 to the Regulations).

Name

Stephen Burns

Laurence Keen

Salary1
£’000

392.1

389.6

254.6

251.3

Benefits2
£’000

Pension
£’000

2.7

3.4

2.4

2.4

19.5

14.6

12.6

11.2

Bonus
£’000

0.0

286.1

0.0

185.8

LTIP
£’000

284.9

367.4

187.5

249.8

Total 
fixed pay 
£’000

Total 
variable pay 
£’000

414.3

407.6

269.7

264.9

284.9

653.5

187.5

435.6

Total

699.1

1,061.1

457.1

700.5

2020

2019

2020

2019

1  These figures include the total salary earned during the year. 20 per cent of salaries for June to August 2020 were deferred and paid in October 2020.

2  Benefits include private medical insurance.

Truing up of 2019 single figure table numbers (audited)
The 2019 LTIP figure was calculated based on the average of mid-market closing price of a share for each dealing day in the three-month 
period to 30 September 2019. The 2019 LTIP figure in the single figure table above has therefore been adjusted to reflect the actual share 
price of 230.0 pence on the vesting date (27 February 2020).

Non-Executive Directors (audited)
The table below sets out the single total figure of remuneration and breakdown for each Non-Executive Director:

Name

Peter Boddy – Chairman

Nick Backhouse – Senior Independent Director; 
Chair – Audit Committee

Ivan Schofield

Claire Tiney – Chair – Remuneration Committee

2020

Taxable 
benefits 
£’000

–

–

–

–

Fees1
£’000

123.5

49.1

43.6

44.3

Total
£’000

123.5

49.1

43.6

44.3

2019

Taxable 
benefits 
£’000

–

–

–

–

Fees
£’000

130.0

51.6

45.8

46.6

Total
£’000

130.0

51.6

45.8

46.6

1  FY2020 fees take into account a 20 per cent cut in base fees from 1 June 2020 to 30 September 2020.

Bonus awards (audited)
Performance for the FY2020 annual bonus awards was measured against a Group adjusted EBITDA bonus target, reconciled as Group 
adjusted EBITDA (pre IFRS 16) £14.0m, as set out on page 34. The Remuneration Committee uses this measure as it considers this to be 
an important measure of Group performance and it is consistent with how business performance is assessed internally by the Board. 
No discretion was exercised in determining the bonus outcome.

As set out in the table below, based on the Group adjusted EBITDA bonus target performance over the year, no bonus is payable to the 
Executive Directors under the annual bonus plan:

Metric

Weighting

Threshold

On-target Maximum

Actual

% earned

Group adjusted EBITDA bonus target

100%

£37.9m £39.9m

£41.9m

£14.0m

0

Performance targets

63

GOVERNANCEFINANCIAL STATEMENTSANNUAL REPORT AND ACCOUNTS 2020STRATEGIC REPORTANNUAL REPORT ON REMUNERATION 
continued

Long Term Incentive Plan vesting of 2017 awards
The LTIP values included in the single total figure of remuneration table for 2020 relate to the 2017 LTIP award. Awards with a face value 
of 100 per cent of salary were granted to the Executive Directors on 6 February 2018 and, following a three-year performance period ending 
on 30 September 2020, are due to vest on 6 February 2021. Performance against the performance targets is set out below: 

Adjusted EPS for the final year of the performance period

13.86 pence

13.86 pence – 14.85 pence

14.85 pence

Vesting

25%

Vesting determined on a straight-line basis

100%

Actual performance achieved was 0.90 pence (audited); therefore based on performance at the end of the vesting period, the vesting 
outturn would have been zero. As explained in the Remuneration Committee Chair’s letter above, the Committee agreed it was both 
appropriate and in the best interests of the Company to exercise discretion and review the performance measure such that the vesting 
outturn is assessed on the adjusted EPS for the 12 month period ending in February 2020 (prior to closure of the Company’s centres), 
with the outturn on that basis time pro-rated to reflect the number of months of unaffected trading during the original performance 
period, which was 29 months out of the original 36-month performance period. This gives an adjusted EPS of 16.36 pence. Based on this 
assessment, 81 per cent of the awards will vest. 

Awards will have a two-year holding period applied which was not applicable to the original grant and the release of the awards will be 
subject to a requirement to remain in service until 6 February 2023. The awards will only be released to the extent that the Committee 
judges the business to be performing in line with market expectations and to the extent the Group is in a position to resume the dividend.

The values included in the single figure table have been calculated based on the average of mid-market closing price of a share (146.0 
pence) for each dealing day in the three-month period to 30 September 2020. No amount of the total value disclosed in the single figure 
table is attributable to share price performance as the share price (156.5 pence) calculated as described above is below the market value 
of shares used to calculate the number of shares subject to the award under the 2017 LTIP.

Additional information regarding single figure table (audited)
The Remuneration Committee considers that performance conditions for all incentives are suitably demanding, having regard to the 
business strategy, shareholder expectations, the markets in which the Group operates and external advice. 

Long-term incentives awarded in 2020 (audited)
Awards were made under the LTIP scheme on 6 February 2020. The following share awards were granted in the form of nil cost options in 
accordance with the Remuneration Policy:

Director

Stephen Burns

Laurence Keen

Position

Chief Executive Officer

Chief Financial Officer

Basis of award

100% of salary

100% of salary

Face value

Number of share awards granted

£389,600

£251,300

134,118

87,090

A five-day average share price prior to grant of 290 pence was used to calculate the number of option awards granted.

The vesting of these awards will be based on adjusted EPS performance measured in the final year of a three-year performance period 
commencing on 1 October 2019. The proportion of the awards vesting will be based on the following adjusted EPS targets and will vest three 
years from grant:

Adjusted EPS for the final year of the performance period

17.26 pence

17.26 pence – 18.49 pence

18.49 pence

Vesting

25%

Vesting determined on a straight-line basis

100%

64

HOLLYWOOD BOWL GROUP PLCPAYMENTS TO PAST DIRECTORS/PAYMENTS FOR LOSS OF OFFICE (AUDITED)
No payments were made to past Directors or for loss of office.

STATEMENT OF DIRECTORS’ SHAREHOLDINGS AND SHARE INTERESTS (AUDITED)
The number of shares of the Company in which current Directors had a beneficial interest and details of long-term incentive interests as at 
30 September 2020 are set out in the table below: 

Outstanding scheme interests 30 September 2020

Beneficially owned shares3

Unvested 
LTIP interests 
subject to 
performance 
conditions

Scheme 
interests not 
subject to 
performance
measures1

Vested but 
unexercised 
scheme
interests2

Total shares 
subject to 
outstanding 
scheme 
interests

As at 
1 October
2019

As at 
30 September 
2020

Total of all 
scheme 
interests and 
shareholdings at 
30 September 
2020

430,322

283,423

41,674

29,482

159,744

108,626

631,470

3,276,041

3,313,798

3,945,538

421,531

1,495,383

1,530,594

1,952,125

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

863,596

870,492

870,492

15,625

17,348

100,000

140,344

3,125

4,848

17,348

140,344

4,848

Executive Directors

Stephen Burns3

Laurence Keen3

Non-Executive Directors

Peter Boddy

Nick Backhouse

Ivan Schofield3

Claire Tiney

1  Sharesave awards that have not vested, Deferred bonus shares subject to holding period.

2  LTIP awards that have vested but remain unexercised.

3  Share interests of Stephen Burns, Laurence Keen and Ivan Schofield include shares held by their spouses.

DIRECTORS’ SHARE OWNERSHIP GUIDELINES (AUDITED)
Shareholding requirements in operation at the Company are currently 200 per cent of base salary for the CEO and the CFO. 
Executive Directors are required to build their shareholdings over a five-year period from appointment. Non-Executive Directors are not 
subject to a shareholding requirement.

Director

Stephen Burns

Laurence Keen

Shareholding 
requirement 
(percentage of 
salary)

Current 
shareholding 
(percentage
of salary)1

Beneficially 
owned shares 
held as at 
30 September 
2020

200

200

1,110%

801%

3,313,798

1,530,594

Shareholding 
requirement 
met?

Yes

Yes

1  The share price of 135.0 pence as at 30 September 2020 has been taken for the purpose of calculating the current shareholding as a percentage of salary. 

Unvested LTIP shares and options do not count towards satisfaction of the shareholding guidelines.

65

GOVERNANCEFINANCIAL STATEMENTSANNUAL REPORT AND ACCOUNTS 2020STRATEGIC REPORTANNUAL REPORT ON REMUNERATION 
continued

EXECUTIVE DIRECTORS’ SHARE PLAN INTEREST MOVEMENTS DURING FY2019 (AUDITED)
The tables below set out the Executive Directors’ interests in Deferred shares under the annual bonus plan, and their interests in the LTIP 
Scheme and the Sharesave scheme. 

Awards under the Sharesave scheme are not subject to any performance conditions (other than continued employment on the vesting 
date). Deferred shares are not subject to any performance conditions or continued employment. The LTIP awards are subject to 
performance conditions as set out in the table on page 62.

Face values for LTIP awards are calculated by multiplying the number of shares granted during FY2020 by the average share price for the 
five business days preceding the awards. Face value for the Sharesave scheme is calculated by reference to the exercise price of options 
granted in 2019. Deferred shares are acquired on behalf of the Executive Directors by the Company’s Employee Benefit Trust (EBT), which 
is provided with the appropriate post-tax value of the deferred element of bonus awards to effect the acquisition. Legal title to the shares 
is held by the EBT for a period of two years before being transferred to the Executive Directors. 

No. of shares/
awards 
held as at 
1 October 
2019

Vesting, 
exercise or 
release date

Awarded

Exercised/ 
vested

Lapsed

No. of shares/
awards held 
as at 30 
September 
2020

Grant/award 
price in pence 
(exercise 
price for 
Sharesave)

Face value 
of awards 
granted 
during 
FY2020

Stephen Burns

Date of award

Deferred shares

02/01/2018 02/01/2020

LTIP

04/01/2019 04/01/2021

07/01/2020 07/01/2022

27/02/2017 27/02/2020

21,677

17,113

–

–

06/02/2018 06/02/2021

130,2562

14/02/2019 14/02/2022

165,948

–

–

18,312

–

–

–

06/02/2020 06/02/2023

–

134,118

Sharesave

01/02/2018 01/02/2021

01/02/2019 01/02/2022

05/02/2020 01/02/2023

Laurence Keen

Deferred shares

02/01/2018 02/01/2020

LTIP

04/01/2019 04/01/2021

07/01/2020 07/01/2022

27/02/2017 27/02/2020

2,621

2,378

–

14,867

11,361

–

–

06/02/2018 06/02/2021

88,5742

14/02/2019 14/02/2022

107,759

–

–

1,250

–

–

11,872

–

–

–

06/02/2020 06/02/2023

–

87,090

Sharesave

01/02/2018 01/02/2021

01/02/2019 01/02/2022

05/02/2020 01/02/2023

2,621

2,378

–

–

–

1,250

1  Vested but unexercised.

21,677

–

–

159,7441

–

–

–

–

–

–

14,867

–

–

108,6261

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

17,113

18,312

159,744

130,256

165,948

134,118

2,621

2,378

1,250

–

11,361

11,872

108,626

88,574

107,759

87,090

2,621

2,378

1,250

–

–

–

–

287.0

£52,555

–

–

–

–

–

–

292.8

£392,697

–

–

–

–

288.0

£3,600

–

–

–

–

287.0

£34,072

–

–

–

–

–

–

292.8

£254,998

–

–

–

–

288.0

£3,600

2  These awards will have a two-year holding period and the release of these awards will be subject to a requirement to remain in service until 6 February 2023. 

LTIP awards vest on the basis of adjusted EPS performance measured in the final year of the performance period. Vesting of the awards 
shown in the table above will be based on the following adjusted EPS targets:

Award year

2018

2019

2020

66

Vesting level

25%

Straight line between 25% and 100%

13.86 pence

15.19 pence

17.26 pence 

13.86 pence – 14.85 pence

15.19 pence – 16.28 pence

17.26 pence – 18.49 pence

100%

14.85 pence

16.28 pence

18.49 pence

HOLLYWOOD BOWL GROUP PLCCHIEF EXECUTIVE OFFICER HISTORICAL REMUNERATION
The table below sets out the total remuneration delivered to the Chief Executive Officer over the last five years, valued using the 
methodology applied to the single total figure of remuneration. The Remuneration Committee does not believe that the remuneration 
paid in earlier years as a private company bears any comparative value to that paid in its time as a public company and, therefore, 
the Remuneration Committee has chosen to disclose remuneration only for the five most recent financial years:

Chief Executive Officer

Total single figure (£’000)

Annual bonus payment level achieved 
(percentage of maximum opportunity)

LTIP vesting level achieved (percentage of maximum opportunity)

2020

699.1

0%

81%

2019

1,061.1

74.3%

100%

2018

536.1

68.1%

N/A

2017

514.6

100%

N/A

2016

301.4

N/A

N/A

It should be noted that the Company only introduced the LTIP on admission to the London Stock Exchange in 2016.

PERFORMANCE GRAPH
The graph below shows the total shareholder return (TSR) performance of an investment of £100 in Hollywood Bowl Group plc’s shares 
from its listing in September 2016 to the end of the period, compared with £100 invested in the FTSE Small Cap Index over the same 
period. The FTSE Small Cap Index was chosen as a comparator because it represents a broad equity market index of which the Company is 
a constituent.

250

200

150

100

50

6
1
-
p
e
S

6
1
-
t
c
O

6
1
-
v
o
N

6
1
-
c
e
D

7
1
-
n
a
J

7
1
-
b
e
F

7
1
-
r
a
M

7
1
-
r
p
A

7
1
-
y
a
M

7
1
-
n
u
J

7
1
-
l
u
J

7
1
-
g
u
A

7
1
-
p
e
S

7
1
-
t
c
O

7
1
-
v
o
N

7
1
-
c
e
D

8
1
-
n
a
J

8
1
-
b
e
F

8
1
-
r
a
M

8
1
-
r
p
A

8
1
-
y
a
M

8
1
-
n
u
J

8
1
-
l
u
J

8
1
-
g
u
A

8
1
-
p
e
S

8
1
-
t
c
O

8
1
-
v
o
N

8
1
-
c
e
D

9
1
-
n
a
J

9
1
-
b
e
F

9
1
-
r
a
M

9
1
-
r
p
A

9
1
-
y
a
M

9
1
-
n
u
J

9
1
-
l
u
J

9
1
-
g
u
A

9
1
-
p
e
S

9
1
-
t
c
O

9
1
-
v
o
N

9
1
-
c
e
D

0
2
-
n
a
J

0
2
-
b
e
F

0
2
-
r
a
M

0
2
-
r
p
A

0
2
-
y
a
M

0
2
-
n
u
J

0
2
-
l
u
J

0
2
-
g
u
A

0
2
-
p
e
S

Hollywood Bowl

FTSE Small Cap

CHANGE IN REMUNERATION OF DIRECTORS COMPARED TO GROUP EMPLOYEES 
The table below sets out the percentage change in salary, taxable benefits and annual bonus set out in the single figure of remuneration 
tables (on page 63) paid to each Director in respect of FY2019 and FY2020, compared to that of the average change for employees in the 
Group as a whole.

Executive Directors

Stephen Burns

Laurence Keen

Non-Executive Directors1

Peter Boddy

Nick Backhouse

Ivan Schofield

Claire Tiney

All Group employees2

% increase in element between FY2019 and FY2020

Salary and fees

Taxable benefits

Annual bonus

0.6

1.3

(5.0)

(4.8)

(4.8)

(4.9)

4.9

(20.6)

–

–

–

–

–

(100.0)

(100.0)

–

–

–

–

(6.7)

(95.0)

1  The percentage changes in fees of the Non-Executive Directors differs from the increase awarded to them for FY2020 as it takes into account a 20 per cent 

cut in base fees from 1 June 2020 to 30 September 2020.

2  Reflects the change in average pay for all Group employees employed in both FY2019 and FY2020.

67

GOVERNANCEFINANCIAL STATEMENTSANNUAL REPORT AND ACCOUNTS 2020STRATEGIC REPORTANNUAL REPORT ON REMUNERATION 
continued

CEO PAY RATIO
The table below shows the ratio between the single total figure of remuneration of the CEO for FY2020 and the lower quartile, median and 
upper quartile pay of UK employees. 

Year ended 30 September 2020

Option A

50

44

38

Methodology 25th percentile ratio 50th percentile ratio 75th percentile ratio

Total UK employee pay and benefits figures used to calculate the CEO Pay Ratio

Salary

Total employee pay and benefits

Notes

25th percentile pay £000

Median pay £000 75th percentile pay £000

13.8

14.1

15.6

15.9

17.7

18.4

1.  The Group has chosen Option A methodology to prepare the CEO pay ratio calculation as this is the most statistically robust method and is in line with the 

general preference of institutional investors.

2.  As ratios could be unduly impacted by joiners and leavers who may not participate in all remuneration arrangements in the year of joining and leaving, the 

Committee has excluded any employee not employed throughout the financial year.

3.  Employee pay data is based on full-time equivalent (FTE) pay for UK employees as at 30 September 2020. For each employee, total pay is calculated in line 

with the single figure methodology (i.e. fixed pay accrued during the financial year and the value of performance-based incentive awards vesting in relation to 
the performance year). Leavers and joiners are excluded. Employees on maternity or other extended leave are included pro-rata for their FTE salary, benefits 
and short-term incentives. No other calculation adjustments or assumptions have been made.

4.  CEO pay is per the single total figure of remuneration for 2020, as set out in the table on page 67.

5.  The 2020 ratio will be restated in the FY2021 Directors’ Remuneration report to take account of the trued-up final LTIP vesting data for the CEO.

Supporting information for the CEO Pay Ratio
The calculations used to determine these figures are reflective of the Group’s pay proposition across the workforce as all pay elements have 
been included to ensure equal comparisons. 

RELATIVE IMPORTANCE OF THE SPEND ON PAY
The table below sets out the relative importance of the spend on pay in FY2020 and FY2019 compared with other disbursements. All figures 
provided are taken from the relevant Company accounts. 

Profit distributed by way of dividend

Overall spend on pay including Executive Directors

Disbursements 
from profit in 
FY2020 £m

Disbursements 
from profit in 
FY2019 £m

–

18.9

17.9

31.1

Percentage 
change

-100

-39.2

SERVICE AGREEMENTS AND LETTERS OF APPOINTMENT
Each of the Executive Directors’ service agreements is for a rolling term and may be terminated by the Company or the Executive Director 
by giving six months’ notice. 

The Remuneration Committee’s policy for setting notice periods is that a six-month period will apply for Executive Directors. 
The Remuneration Committee may in exceptional circumstances arising on recruitment allow a longer period, which would in any event 
reduce to six months following the first year of employment.

Name

Stephen Burns

Laurence Keen

Position

CEO

CFO

Date of service agreement

Notice period by Company (months) Notice period by Director (months)

24 June 2016

24 June 2016

6

6

6

6

The Non-Executive Directors of the Company (including the Chairman) do not have service contracts. The Non-Executive Directors are 
appointed by letters of appointment. Their terms are subject to their re-election by the Company’s shareholders at the AGM scheduled 
to be held on 29 January 2021 and at any subsequent AGM at which the Non-Executive Directors stand for re-election. 

The details of each Non-Executive Director’s current terms are set out below:

Name

Peter Boddy

Nick Backhouse

Claire Tiney

Ivan Schofield

Date of appointment

Commencement date of current term

Unexpired term as at 14 December 2020

13 June 2016

14 June 2016

14 June 2016

16 September 2019

14 June 2019

14 June 2019

1 October 2017

1 October 2020

1 year 9 months

1 year 6 months

1 year 6 months

2 years 10 months

68

HOLLYWOOD BOWL GROUP PLCSHAREHOLDER VOTING AT GENERAL MEETINGS
The following table shows the results of the advisory vote on the Directors’ Remuneration Report and the binding vote on the Remuneration 
Policy at our AGM held on 30 January 2020:

For (including discretionary)

Against

Votes withheld

Approval of the Directors’ 
Remuneration Report

Approval of the Directors’ 
Remuneration Policy

Total number 
of votes

% of  

votes cast

Total number 
of votes

% of  

votes cast

119,661,858

3,272,605

4,477

97.34

2.66

119,861,858

3,075,945

97.50

2.50

1,137

IMPLEMENTATION OF THE POLICY IN FY2021 
There are no planned changes to the implementation of the Remuneration Policy for FY2021. The Remuneration Committee proposes to 
implement the Policy for FY2021 as set out below:

Salary: The decision has also been taken to leave base salaries unchanged and there will be no increases for the Board including the 
Executive Directors in November 2020.

The salaries for FY2021 are set out below:

Name

Stephen Burns

Laurence Keen

Salary

2021

2020

£392,700

£392,700

£255,000

£255,000

Percentage 
change

0%

0%

NON-EXECUTIVE DIRECTORS’ FEES
Fees for Non-Executive Directors will remain unchanged and there will be no increases in November 2020.

Chairman fee

Senior Independent Director fee

Base fee

Chair of Audit Committee fee

Chair of Remuneration Committee fee

1 

Ivan Schofield’s base fee is set at £46,818.

BENEFITS AND PENSION
No changes are proposed to benefits or pension.

£132,600

£5,000

£47,5661

No additional fee

No additional fee

ANNUAL BONUS PLAN
The maximum bonus opportunity for the Executive Directors will remain at 100 per cent of salary. Annual bonus outcomes will be 
determined based on achievement of financial targets alone.

The Remuneration Committee considers that the detailed performance targets for the FY2021 annual bonus awards are commercially 
sensitive and that disclosing precise targets for the annual bonus plan in advance would not be in shareholder interests. Actual targets, 
performance achieved and awards made will be disclosed in the FY2021 Annual Report so that shareholders can fully assess the basis 
for any payouts under the annual bonus plan. The performance measure for the annual bonus plan will be Group adjusted EBITDA.

69

GOVERNANCEFINANCIAL STATEMENTSANNUAL REPORT AND ACCOUNTS 2020STRATEGIC REPORTANNUAL REPORT ON REMUNERATION 
continued

ADVISERS TO THE 
REMUNERATION COMMITTEE
During the financial year, the Committee 
received advice from PwC who were retained 
as external independent advisers to the 
Committee. PwC advised the Company 
on all aspects of the Remuneration Policy 
for the Executive Directors and members 
of the Executive team, including the grant 
of the LTIP award.

The Remuneration Committee is satisfied 
that the advice received was objective 
and independent. PwC is a member of 
the Remuneration Consultants Group 
and the voluntary code of conduct of 
that body is designed to ensure objective 
and independent advice is given to 
remuneration committees.

PwC received fees of £16,150 for its advice 
during the year to 30 September 2020. 

On behalf of the Board

CLAIRE TINEY
CHAIR OF THE 
REMUNERATION COMMITTEE
14 December 2020

LTIP AWARD
Awards will be made in FY2021 under the 
LTIP. The LTIP awards for the Executive 
Directors will be:

  CEO 100 per cent of salary; and
  CFO 100 per cent of salary.

These awards will vest three years after 
grant and will be subject to a further 
two-year holding period. In light of the 
uncertainty caused by COVID-19, LTIP 
targets have not yet been approved 
by the Remuneration Committee 
and communicated to participants. 
These will be disclosed in next year’s 
Directors’ Remuneration Report.

The Committee will ensure these targets 
are no less challenging in relative terms 
than the targets set for the FY2020 
awards. The Committee considered the 
Group’s share price and whether it would 
be appropriate to reduce the size of LTIP 
awards, but has agreed that it will maintain 
awards at the normal level but will monitor 
general market and share price performance 
over the vesting period to ensure Directors 
do not realise windfall gains on vesting.

COMPOSITION AND TERMS OF 
REFERENCE OF THE 
REMUNERATION COMMITTEE
The Board has delegated to the 
Remuneration Committee, under agreed 
terms of reference, responsibility for the 
Remuneration Policy and for determining 
specific remuneration packages for the 
Chairman, Executive Directors and such 
other senior employees of the Group 
as the Board may determine from time 
to time. The terms of reference for the 
Remuneration Committee were reviewed 
and amended during the year, and are 
available on the Company’s website, 
www.hollywoodbowlgroup.com, and 
from the Company Secretary at the 
registered office.

All members of the Remuneration 
Committee are Non-Executive Directors. 
The Remuneration Committee receives 
assistance from the Chairman, CEO, CFO 
and Company Secretary, who attend 
meetings by invitation, except when issues 
relating to their own remuneration are being 
discussed. The Remuneration Committee 
met twice during the year. All members 
attended each meeting.

70

HOLLYWOOD BOWL GROUP PLCDIRECTORS’ REPORT

The Directors present their report for the year ended 30 September 2020. Additional information which is incorporated by reference into this 
Directors’ Report, including information required in accordance with the Companies Act 2006 and the Listing Rule 9.8.4R of the UK Financial 
Conduct Authority’s Listing Rules, can be located as follows:

Disclosure

Future business developments

Greenhouse gas emissions

People, culture and employee engagement

Financial risk management objectives and policies 
(including hedging policy and use of financial instruments)

Exposure to price risk, credit risk, liquidity risk and cash flow risk

Location

Strategic Report – pages 2 to 3

Sustainability – pages 39 and 40

Sustainability – pages 38 and 39

Note 30 to the Financial Statements – pages 110 and 111

Details can be found on pages 26 to 29 of the Strategic Report and 
note 30 to the Financial Statements

Details of long-term incentive schemes

Directors’ Remuneration Report – pages 66 to 70

Directors’ responsibilities statement

Page 74

Directors’ interests

s172 Statement

Details can be found on pages 65 and 66 of the Directors’ 
Remuneration Report

Details can be found on pages 16 and 17 of the Strategic Report

Stakeholder engagement in key decisions

Details can be found on page 50

DIRECTORS
The Directors of the Company who held office during the year are:

Peter Boddy (Chairman)

Laurence Keen (Chief Financial Officer)

Claire Tiney (Non-Executive Director)

Stephen Burns (Chief Executive Officer)

Nick Backhouse (Senior Independent Director)

Ivan Schofield (Non-Executive Director)

The roles and biographies of the Directors in office as at the date of this report are set out on pages 44 to 45. There have been no changes 
to the Directors during the year and up to the date of this report. The appointment and replacement of Directors is governed by the 
Company’s Articles of Association (as detailed below), the UK Corporate Governance Code and the Companies Act 2006. 

ARTICLES OF ASSOCIATION
The rules governing the appointment and replacement of Directors are set out in the Company’s Articles of Association. The Articles of 
Association may be amended by a special resolution of the Company’s shareholders. A copy of the Articles of Association can be found on 
the Company’s website: www.hollywoodbowlgroup.com/investors/corporate-governance. 

RESULTS AND DIVIDEND
The results for the year are set out in the consolidated income statement on page 84. 

The Directors are not recommending the payment of a final dividend for the year ended 30 September 2020.

SHARE CAPITAL
Details of the Company’s share capital, including changes during the year, are set out in note 22 to the Financial Statements. As at 
30 September 2020, the Company’s share capital consisted of 157,500,000 Ordinary shares of one pence each.

Ordinary shareholders are entitled to receive notice of, and to attend and speak at, any general meeting of the Company. On a show of 
hands, every shareholder present in person or by proxy (or being a corporation represented by a duly authorised representative) shall have 
one vote, and on a poll every shareholder who is present in person or by proxy shall have one vote for every share of which he or she is the 
holder. The Notice of Annual General Meeting specifies deadlines for exercising voting rights and appointing a proxy or proxies.

Other than the general provisions of the Articles of Association (and prevailing legislation), there are no specific restrictions on the size of a 
holding or on the transfer of the Ordinary shares. 

The Directors are not aware of any agreements between holders of the Company’s shares that may result in the restriction of the transfer 
of securities or of voting rights. No shareholder holds securities carrying any special rights or control over the Company’s share capital. 
Shares held by the Company’s Employee Benefit Trust rank pari passu with the shares in issue and have no special rights, but voting rights 
and rights of acceptance of any offer relating to the shares rest with the plan’s Trustees and are not exercisable by employees.

71

GOVERNANCEFINANCIAL STATEMENTSANNUAL REPORT AND ACCOUNTS 2020STRATEGIC REPORTDIRECTORS’ REPORT 
continued

AUTHORITY FOR THE COMPANY TO PURCHASE ITS OWN SHARES
Subject to authorisation by shareholder resolution, the Company may purchase its own shares in accordance with the Companies Act 2006. 
Any shares which have been bought back may be held as treasury shares or cancelled immediately upon completion of the purchase.

At the Company’s AGM held on 30 January 2020, the Company was generally and unconditionally authorised by its shareholders to make 
market purchases (within the meaning of section 693 of the Companies Act 2006) of up to a maximum of 15,000,000 of its Ordinary 
shares. The Company has not repurchased any of its Ordinary shares under this authority, which is due to expire at the AGM to be held 
on 29 January 2021, and accordingly has an unexpired authority to purchase up to 15,000,000 Ordinary shares with a nominal value 
of £15,000.00.

DIRECTORS’ INTERESTS
The number of Ordinary shares of the Company in which the Directors were beneficially interested as at 30 September 2020 are set out in 
the Directors’ Remuneration Report on page 65.

DIRECTORS’ INDEMNITIES
The Company’s Articles of Association provide, subject to the provisions of UK legislation, an indemnity for Directors and officers of the 
Company and the Group in respect of liabilities they may incur in the discharge of their duties or in the exercise of their powers.

DIRECTORS’ AND OFFICERS’ LIABILITY INSURANCE
Directors’ and officers’ liability insurance cover is maintained by the Company and is in place in respect of all the Company’s Directors at the 
date of this report. The Company reviews its level of cover on an annual basis.

COMPENSATION FOR LOSS OF OFFICE
The Company does not have any agreements with any Executive Director or employee that would provide compensation for loss of 
office or employment resulting from a takeover except that provisions of the Company share schemes may cause options and awards 
outstanding under such schemes to vest on a takeover. Further information is provided in the Directors’ Remuneration Policy set out 
on page 61.

SIGNIFICANT INTERESTS
The table below shows the interests in shares (whether directly or indirectly held) notified to the Company in accordance with the 
Disclosure Guidance and Transparency Rules as at 30 September 2020 and 10 December 2020 (being the latest practicable date prior 
to publication of the Annual Report):

Name of shareholder

At 30 September 2020

At 10 December 2020

Number of 
Ordinary shares 
of 1 pence 
each held

Percentage of 
total voting 
rights held

Number of 
Ordinary shares 
of 1 pence 
each held

Percentage of 
total voting 
rights held

Aggregate of Standard Life Aberdeen plc affiliated investment management 
entities with delegated voting rights on behalf of multiple managed portfolios

20,318,505

12.90%

20,318,505

12.90%

AXA Investment Managers

Invesco Ltd 

Ameriprise Financial, Inc. and its group (Columbia Threadneedle)

J O Hambro Capital Management Limited

SFM UK Management LLP

GLG Partners LP

Cannacord Genuity

Degroof Petercam Asset Management SA

7,783,664

7,504,478

7,806,639

7,343,387

7,181,539

6,896,454

5,389,850

4,901,643

5.19%

5.00%

4.96%

4.90%

4.79%

4.60%

3.59%

3.11%

7,783,664

7,504,478

7,806,639

7,343,387

7,181,539

6,896,454

5,389,850

4,901,643

5.19%

5.00%

4.96%

4.90%

4.79%

4.60%

3.59%

3.11%

72

HOLLYWOOD BOWL GROUP PLCEMPLOYEE INVOLVEMENT AND POLICY REGARDING DISABLED PERSONS
The Group actively encourages employee involvement and consultation and places emphasis on keeping its employees informed of the 
Group’s activities and financial performance by such means as employee briefings and publication (via the Group’s intranet) to all staff 
of relevant information and corporate announcements. The Group also publishes a weekly staff bulletin. During the COVID-19 pandemic, 
the Board has viewed communication with employees as paramount and has ensured that they are regular and drafted with employee 
wellbeing in mind. Opportunities for employees to provide feedback to the Company have also been made available, and such feedback 
has generally been positive. Additionally, a number of initiatives have been implemented and communicated to support employees, such 
as training opportunities, rewards and wellbeing sessions to support the transition from furlough to return to work. Further information 
about employees, including how they are incentivised, can be found in the Sustainability section on pages 38 and 39.

Applications for employment by disabled persons are always fully considered, bearing in mind the aptitudes of the applicant concerned. 
In the event of a member of staff becoming disabled, every effort is made to ensure that their employment with the Group continues and 
that appropriate training is arranged. It is the policy of the Group that the training, career development and promotion of a disabled member 
of staff should, as far as possible, be identical to that of other employees.

BRANCHES OUTSIDE THE UK
The Company has no branches outside of the UK.

POLITICAL DONATIONS
The Company did not make any political donations during the year.

CHANGE OF CONTROL – SIGNIFICANT AGREEMENTS
There are a number of agreements that may take effect after, or terminate upon, a change of control of the Company, such as commercial 
contracts, bank loan agreements and property lease arrangements. None of these are considered to be significant in terms of their likely 
impact on the business as a whole.

AUDIT INFORMATION
Each of the Directors at the date of the approval of this report confirms that:

  so far as the Director is aware, there is no relevant audit information of which the Company’s auditors are unaware; and
  the Director has taken all the reasonable steps that he/she ought to have taken as a Director to make himself/herself aware of any 

relevant audit information and to establish that the Company’s auditors are aware of the information.

The confirmation is given and should be interpreted in accordance with the provisions of section 418 of the Companies Act 2006.

AUDITORS
KPMG has indicated its willingness to continue in office and a resolution seeking to re-appoint KPMG will be proposed at the 
forthcoming AGM.

POST BALANCE SHEET EVENTS
The Group’s centres were subject to a further lockdown resulting in all centres in England being closed from 5 November to 2 December 2020. 
The impact of this, as well as the local tier restrictions from 2 December 2020 are included in the going concern assessment in note 2 to 
the Financial Statements. 

ANNUAL GENERAL MEETING
The 2021 AGM of the Company will be held on 29 January 2021 at 9.30am. The notice convening the meeting, together with details of the 
business to be considered and explanatory notes for each resolution, will be published separately and will be available on the Company’s 
website and distributed to shareholders who have elected to receive hard copies of shareholder information.

The Strategic Report on pages 2 to 41, the Corporate Governance report on pages 46 to 50 and this Directors’ Report have been drawn up 
and presented in accordance with, and in reliance upon, applicable English company law and any liability of the Directors in connection with 
these reports shall be subject to the limitations and restrictions provided by such law.

By order of the Board

LAURENCE KEEN
CHIEF FINANCIAL OFFICER
14 December 2020

73

GOVERNANCEFINANCIAL STATEMENTSANNUAL REPORT AND ACCOUNTS 2020STRATEGIC REPORTSTATEMENT OF DIRECTORS’ RESPONSIBILITIES

The Directors are responsible for preparing the Annual Report and the Group and Parent Company Financial Statements in accordance with 
applicable law and regulations.

Company law requires the Directors to prepare Group and Parent Company Financial Statements for each financial year. Under that law, they 
are required to prepare the Group Financial Statements in accordance with International Financial Reporting Standards as adopted by the 
European Union (IFRS as adopted by the EU) and applicable law and have elected to prepare the Parent Company Financial Statements in 
accordance with UK Accounting Standards, including FRS 102, the Financial Reporting Standard applicable in the UK and Republic of Ireland.

Under company law, the Directors must not approve the Financial Statements unless they are satisfied that they give a true and fair view 
of the state of affairs of the Group and Parent Company and of their profit or loss for that period. In preparing each of the Group and Parent 
Company Financial Statements, the Directors are required to:

  select suitable accounting policies and then apply them consistently;
  make judgements and estimates that are reasonable, relevant, reliable and prudent;
  for the Group Financial Statements, state whether they have been prepared in accordance with IFRS as adopted by the EU;
  for the Parent Company Financial Statements, state whether applicable UK accounting standards have been followed, subject to any 

material departures disclosed and explained in the Parent Company Financial Statements; 

  assess the Group and Parent Company’s ability to continue as a going concern, disclosing, as applicable, matters related to going 

concern; and

  use the going concern basis of accounting unless they either intend to liquidate the Group or the Parent Company or to cease operations, 

or have no realistic alternative but to do so.

The Directors are responsible for keeping adequate accounting records that are sufficient to show and explain the Parent Company’s 
transactions and disclose with reasonable accuracy at any time the financial position of the Parent Company and that enable them to 
ensure that its Financial Statements comply with the Companies Act 2006. They are responsible for such internal control as they determine 
is necessary to enable the preparation of Financial Statements that are free from material misstatement, whether due to fraud or error, and 
have general responsibility for taking such steps as are reasonably open to them to safeguard the assets of the Group and to prevent and 
detect fraud and other irregularities.

Under applicable law and regulations, the Directors are also responsible for preparing a Strategic Report, Directors’ Report, Directors’ 
Remuneration Report and Corporate Governance report that complies with that law and those regulations.

The Directors are responsible for the maintenance and integrity of the corporate and financial information included on the Company’s 
website. Legislation in the UK governing the preparation and dissemination of Financial Statements may differ from legislation in 
other jurisdictions.

RESPONSIBILITY STATEMENT OF THE DIRECTORS IN RESPECT OF THE ANNUAL FINANCIAL REPORT
We confirm that to the best of our knowledge:

  the Financial Statements, prepared in accordance with the applicable set of accounting standards, give a true and fair view of the assets, 
liabilities, financial position and profit or loss of the Company and the undertakings included in the consolidation taken as a whole; and
  the Strategic Report includes a fair review of the development and performance of the business and the position of the issuer and the 
undertakings included in the consolidation taken as a whole, together with a description of the principal risks and uncertainties that 
they face.

We consider that the Annual Report and Accounts, taken as a whole, is fair, balanced and understandable and provides the information 
necessary for shareholders to assess the Group’s position and performance, business model and strategy.

By order of the Board

STEPHEN BURNS
CHIEF EXECUTIVE OFFICER
14 December 2020 

LAURENCE KEEN
CHIEF FINANCIAL OFFICER
14 December 2020

74

HOLLYWOOD BOWL GROUP PLCIndependent auditor’s report
to the members of Hollywood Bowl Group plc 

1. Our opinion is unmodified
We have audited the financial statements of Hollywood Bowl Group plc (“the Company”) for the year ended 30 September 2020 which 
comprise the Consolidated Income Statement and Statement of Comprehensive Income, Consolidated Statement of Financial Position, 
Consolidated Statement of Changes in Equity, Consolidated Statement of Cash Flows, Company Statement of Financial Position, Company 
Statement of Changes in Equity, Company Statement of Cash Flows, and the related notes, including the accounting policies in note 2. 

In our opinion: 
  the financial statements give a true and fair view of the state of the Group’s and of the parent Company’s affairs as at 30 September 2020 

and of the Group’s profit for the year then ended; 

  the Group financial statements have been properly prepared in accordance with International Financial Reporting Standards as adopted 

by the European Union (IFRSs as adopted by the EU); 

  the parent Company financial statements have been properly prepared in accordance with UK accounting standards, including IFRS 102, 

The Financial Reporting Standard applicable in the UK and Republic of Ireland; and 

  the financial statements have been prepared in accordance with the requirements of the Companies Act 2006 and, as regards the Group 

financial statements, Article 4 of the IAS Regulation.

Basis for opinion 
We conducted our audit in accordance with International Standards on Auditing (UK) (“ISAs (UK)”) and applicable law. Our responsibilities are 
described below. We believe that the audit evidence we have obtained is a sufficient and appropriate basis for our opinion. Our audit opinion 
is consistent with our report to the audit committee. 

We were first appointed as auditor by the directors on 2 June 2016. The period of total uninterrupted engagement is for the five financial 
years ended 30 September 2020. We have fulfilled our ethical responsibilities under, and we remain independent of the Group in accordance 
with, UK ethical requirements including the FRC Ethical Standard as applied to listed public interest entities. No non-audit services 
prohibited by that standard were provided.

Overview

Materiality:  
Group financial statements as a whole

Coverage

Key audit matters

Recurring risks

New

Event driven

£0.8m (2019:£1.2m)
4.3% of 4 year average of Group profit before tax (2019: 4.3% of Group profit 
before tax)

100% (2019:100%) of Group profit before tax

vs 2019

Recoverability of parent company investment in subsidiaries/
amounts due from group entities 

Valuation of property, plant and equipment and right 
of use assets

IFRS 16 – lease arrangement (transition)

Material uncertainty related to going concern 

75

GOVERNANCEFINANCIAL STATEMENTSANNUAL REPORT AND ACCOUNTS 2020STRATEGIC REPORTIndependent auditor’s report
to the members of Hollywood Bowl Group plc
continued

2. Material uncertainty related to going concern

The risk

Our response

Our procedures included: 

  Funding assessment: we assessed the loan covenant 

compliance to check whether the Group is at risk of breaching 
the covenants and reviewed the availability of cash and the 
cash flow forecasts to determine whether the assumptions 
are realistic, achievable and consistent with the external and 
internal environment;

  Historical comparisons: we considered the historical accuracy 
of management’s forecasting in the previous year in comparison 
to actual performance achieved;

  Sensitivity analysis: we considered sensitivities over the level 

of financial resources indicated by the Group’s financial forecasts 
taking account of reasonably possible (but not unrealistic) 
adverse effects that could arise from the risks identified 
individually and collectively;

  Assessing transparency: we assessed the completeness and 

accuracy of the matters covered in the going concern disclosure 
against our understanding of the risks.

Our results 
We found the disclosure of the material uncertainty to 
be acceptable.

Going concern 
We draw attention to note 2 to 
the financial statements which 
indicates the potential impact 
of coronavirus outbreak on the 
Group’s revenue, profitability 
and cash flows, in particular 
due to the closure of the 
Group’s bowling and mini golf 
centres during the year as well 
as subsequent to year end. 
Management have modelled the 
impact on the cash flows and 
liquidity over the next 12 months 
under both a base case and a 
severe but plausible downside 
scenario. While the Group is able 
to demonstrate compliance with 
the bank covenants under both 
these scenarios, the headroom 
is low under the severe but 
plausible downside model which 
exposes the Group to the risk 
of a potential covenant breach. 
These events and conditions 
constitute a material uncertainty 
that may cast significant doubt 
on the Group’s and the parent 
Company’s ability to continue 
as a going concern. 

Our opinion is not modified 
in respect of this matter.

Disclosure quality:
The financial statements explain 
how the Board has formed a 
judgement that it is appropriate 
to adopt the going concern basis 
of preparation for the Group and 
parent Company.

That judgement is based on 
an evaluation of the inherent 
risks to the Group’s and parent 
Company’s business model and 
how those risks might affect the 
Group’s and parent Company’s 
financial resources or ability 
to continue operations over a 
period of at least a year from 
the date of approval of the 
financial statements.

The risk for our audit was 
whether or not those risks 
were such that they amounted 
to a material uncertainty that 
may have cast significant 
doubt about the ability to 
continue as a going concern. 
If so, that fact is required to be 
disclosed (as has been done) 
and, along with a description 
of the circumstances, is a key 
financial statement disclosure.

We are required to report to you if the directors’ going concern statement under the Listing Rules set out on page 30 is materially 
inconsistent with our audit knowledge. We have nothing to report in this respect.

3. Other key audit matters: our assessment of risks of material misstatement
Key audit matters are those matters that, in our professional judgment, were of most significance in the audit of the financial statements 
and include the most significant assessed risks of material misstatement (whether or not due to fraud) identified by us, including those which 
had the greatest effect on: the overall audit strategy; the allocation of resources in the audit; and directing the efforts of the engagement 
team. Going concern is a significant key audit matter and is described in section 2 of our report. We summarise below the other key audit 
matters, in decreasing order to audit significance, in arriving at our audit opinion above, together with our key audit procedures to address 
those matters and, as required for public interest entities, our results from those procedures. These matters were addressed, and our results 
are based on procedures undertaken, in the context of, and solely for the purpose of, our audit of the financial statements as a whole, and 
in forming our opinion thereon, and consequently are incidental to that opinion, and we do not provide a separate opinion on these matters. 

76

HOLLYWOOD BOWL GROUP PLCValuation of property, plant and 
equipment and right of use 
assets
£183 million (2019: £47 million)

Refer to page 55 (Audit 
Committee Report), page 94 
(accounting policy) and pages 101 
and 102 (financial disclosures).

The risk

Our response

Our procedures included: 

  Assessing principles: We evaluated whether the inputs used in 
the Group’s assessment of impairment indicators were suitable, 
through discussions with management, our own knowledge of 
the business and market, inspection of Board minutes and other 
management information.

  Re-performance: We re-performed the calculations that 
management performed for the initial trigger test and 
determining the VIU of each cash generating unit and 
compared data used in the model against source information, 
when applicable.

  Our sector experience: For the centres where indications 

of impairment existed, we evaluated the assumptions used 
in the forecasts and plans by the management, in particular 
those relating to revenue and EBITDA growth for the centres. 
We also challenged management as to the achievability of their 
forecasts and business plan, taking into account the historical 
accuracy of previous forecasts, wider market factors (such as 
performance of competitors and other operators in the leisure 
market) and other specific evidence to support the assumptions 
(such as recent refurbishment of the centres). 

  Benchmarking assumptions: We compared management’s 
assumptions to externally derived data in relation to key 
inputs such as projected economic growth, cost inflation 
and discount rates.

  Sensitivity analysis: We performed sensitivity analysis to stress 

test the assumptions noted above.

  Assessing disclosures: We also assessed whether the 

Group’s disclosures about the sensitivity of the outcome of 
the impairment assessment to changes in key assumptions 
reflected the risks inherent in the carrying amount of PPE 
and right-of-use assets in its cash generating units.

Our results 
We found the resulting estimate of the recoverable amount 
of PPE and right-of-use assets in each cash generating unit 
to be acceptable.

Forecast based valuation:
The Group has significant 
property, plant and equipment 
(PPE), and right-of-use assets 
held on its consolidated 
balance sheet. 

Given the closure of all Hollywood 
Bowl centres for a period of 
around 5 months during the 
current financial year and as 
a result of the wider economic 
implications of Coronavirus 
pandemic particularly on the 
leisure industry and the impact 
thereof on the footfall in the 
Group’s centres, the risk of 
impairment in respect of PPE 
and right-of-use assets at each 
cash generating unit (which are 
each one of the Group’s centres) 
has increased.

The estimated recoverable 
amount is subjective due to the 
inherent uncertainty involved in 
forecasting and discounting future 
cash flows. The key assumptions 
used in the value in use (“VIU”) 
calculations for estimating the 
recoverable amount are expected 
revenues and costs in the short-
term cash flow forecasts, the 
long-term growth rate and the 
discount rate.

The effect of these matters 
is that, as part of our risk 
assessment for audit planning 
purposes, we determined that 
the VIU had a high degree of 
estimation uncertainty, with 
a potential range of reasonable 
outcomes greater than our 
materiality for the financial 
statements as a whole. 

77

GOVERNANCEFINANCIAL STATEMENTSANNUAL REPORT AND ACCOUNTS 2020STRATEGIC REPORTIndependent auditor’s report
to the members of Hollywood Bowl Group plc
continued

The risk

Our response

Our procedures included: 

  Assessing methodology and assumptions: We have evaluated 
the reasonableness of management’s key judgements made in 
preparing the transition adjustments, specifically lease term and 
discount rate. This included considering the appropriateness of 
the selection of accounting policies based on the requirements 
of IFRS 16, our business understanding and industry practice.

  Assessing base data: We have tested the completeness 
and accuracy of the underlying data used in preparing the 
adjustment through agreeing information to the original contract 
or most recent invoice for rental payments and reviewing the 
trial balance for payments which may suggest a lease contract 
is in place.

  Independent re-performance: We have recalculated the lease 

liability using the underlying data inputs.

  Assessing disclosures: We also considered the adequacy of 
the Group’s disclosures in respect of the transition to IFRS 16.

Our results 
We found the resulting estimate of valuation of lease liability 
and right-of-use asset on transition date to be acceptable.

IFRS 16 – lease arrangements 
(transition)
Right of use asset of £135 million 
and Lease liability of £174 million 

Refer to page 55 (Audit Committee 
Report), pages 91-93 (accounting 
policy) and pages 102-103 
(financial disclosures).

Subjective judgement:
Following the adoption of IFRS 
16, the recognition of future 
lease liabilities and corresponding 
assets has changed with the 
Group bringing onto its balance 
sheet £167 million of future lease 
liabilities and £136 million of right-
of-use assets on 1 October 2019.

There is a risk that existing 
leases subject to transition are 
not completely identified, that 
transition date recognition and 
measurement adjustments 
are not accurately recorded 
and transition disclosures 
are incomplete, inaccurate or 
not fairly presented.

Furthermore, on transition, 
to determine the future lease 
liability and base for calculating 
the right-of-use asset, the 
Group has made a number 
of assumptions about individual 
leases including lease term 
and discount rate.

Due to it being the first year of 
application and the magnitude 
of the balance, there is a risk 
that inaccurate input of the 
key data elements or incorrect 
selection of assumptions such 
as changes in the discount 
rate applicable could result 
in a material misstatement.

The effect of these matters 
is that, as part of our risk 
assessment for audit planning 
purposes, we determined that 
the valuation of lease liability 
and corresponding right-of-
use asset has a potential range 
of outcomes greater than our 
materiality for the financial 
statements as a whole.

78

HOLLYWOOD BOWL GROUP PLCRecoverability of parent 
Company’s investment in 
subsidiaries /amounts due from 
group entities 
£124 million (2019: £126 million)

Refer to page 114 (accounting 
policy) and pages 116 and 117 
(financial disclosures).

The risk

Our response

Low risk – high value:
The carrying amount of the 
parent company investments 
in subsidiaries and amounts 
due from group entities 
represent 93% (2019:99.9%) of 
the company’s total assets. 
Their recoverability is not at a high 
risk of significant misstatement or 
subject to significant judgement. 
However due to their materiality 
in the context of the parent 
company financial statements, 
this is considered to be the area 
that had the greatest effect on 
our overall parent company audit. 

Our procedures included: 

  Historical comparisons: We assessed the reasonableness 
of budgets by considering the historical accuracy of the 
previous forecasts;

  Benchmarking assumptions: We compared the assumptions 
to externally derived and historical data, as well as our own 
assessments in relation to key inputs, in particular the discount 
and growth rates; 

  Sensitivity analysis: We performed breakeven analysis of the 
key assumptions noted above to assess whether a reasonably 
possible change in these assumptions could trigger an 
impairment charge; and 

  Comparing valuations: We compared the sum of the 

discounted cashflows to the Group market capitalisation 
to assess the reasonableness of those cashflows. 

Our results 
We found the Group’s assessment of the recoverability of the 
parent company’s investment in subsidiaries and amounts due 
from group entities to be acceptable.

We continue to perform procedures over revenue recognition. However, following a decline in revenue due to centre closures for extended 
periods in the year reducing the risk relating to revenue recognition, we have not assessed this as one of the most significant risks in our 
current year audit and, therefore, it is not separately identified in our report this year. 

4. Our application of materiality and an overview of the scope of our audit 
Materiality for the Group financial statements as a whole was set at £ 0.8 million determined with reference to a benchmark of Group profit 
before tax by averaging over the last four years (2019: £ 1.2 million determined with reference to actual profit before tax). This is due to 
fluctuations in the business cycle arising as a result of the impact of Coronavirus in the year, of which it represents 4.3% (2019: 4.3% of actual 
profit before tax). 

Materiality for the parent Company financial statements as a whole was set at £ 0.74 million (2019: £ 0.9 million, determined with reference 
to a benchmark of company total assets (2019: company total assets) of which it represents 0.6% (2019: 0.7%).

We agreed to report to the Audit Committee any corrected or uncorrected identified misstatements exceeding £ 40,000 (2019: £ 60 000), 
in addition to other identified misstatements that warranted reporting on qualitative grounds. 

For both the current and prior year, the Group audit team performed the audit of the Group as if it was a single aggregated set of financial 
information, at the Group’s Head office in Hemel Hempstead. Both the current year and prior year audit was performed using the materiality 
level set out on this page and covered 100% of the Group’s profit before tax, total revenues and total assets.

Our audit of the parent Company was undertaken to the materiality level specified above and was all performed at the company’s head 
office in Hemel Hempstead.

79

GOVERNANCEFINANCIAL STATEMENTSANNUAL REPORT AND ACCOUNTS 2020STRATEGIC REPORTIndependent auditor’s report
to the members of Hollywood Bowl Group plc
continued

Average profit before tax
(4 year average)
£18.5m (2019: Profit before tax of £27.6m)

Group Materiality
£0.8m (2019: £1.2m)

Profit before tax 

Group materiality

AMPT £0.04m 
Misstatements reported to the
audit committee (2019: £0.06m)

5. We have nothing to report on the other information in the Annual Report 
The directors are responsible for the other information presented in the Annual Report together with the financial statements. Our opinion 
on the financial statements does not cover the other information and, accordingly, we do not express an audit opinion or, except as explicitly 
stated below, any form of assurance conclusion thereon. 

Our responsibility is to read the other information and, in doing so, consider whether, based on our financial statements audit work, the 
information therein is materially misstated or inconsistent with the financial statements or our audit knowledge. Based solely on that work 
we have not identified material misstatements in the other information.

Strategic report and directors’ report 
Based solely on our work on the other information: 

  we have not identified material misstatements in the strategic report and the directors’ report; 
  in our opinion the information given in those reports for the financial year is consistent with the financial statements; and 
  in our opinion those reports have been prepared in accordance with the Companies Act 2006.

Directors’ Remuneration Report 
In our opinion the part of the Directors’ Remuneration Report to be audited has been properly prepared in accordance with the Companies 
Act 2006. 

Disclosures of principal risks and longer-term viability 
Based on the knowledge we acquired during our financial statements audit, other than the material uncertainty related to going concern 
referred to above, we have nothing further material to add or draw attention to in relation to:

  the directors’ confirmation within the Viability statement on pages 30 and 31 that they have carried out a robust assessment of the 
principal risks facing the Group, including those that would threaten its business model, future performance, solvency and liquidity;

  the Principal Risks disclosures describing these risks and explaining how they are being managed and mitigated; and 
  the directors’ explanation in the Viability statement of how they have assessed the prospects of the Group, over what period they have 
done so and why they considered that period to be appropriate, and their statement as to whether they have a reasonable expectation 
that the Group will be able to continue in operation and meet its liabilities as they fall due over the period of their assessment, including 
any related disclosures drawing attention to any necessary qualifications or assumptions. 

80

HOLLYWOOD BOWL GROUP PLCUnder the Listing Rules we are required to review the Viability statement. We have nothing to report in this respect. 

Our work is limited to assessing these matters in the context of only the knowledge acquired during our financial statements audit. As we 
cannot predict all future events or conditions and as subsequent events may result in outcomes that are inconsistent with judgments that 
were reasonable at the time they were made, the absence of anything to report on these statements is not a guarantee as to the Group’s 
and the parent Company’s longer-term viability. 

Corporate governance disclosures 
We are required to report to you if:

  we have identified material inconsistencies between the knowledge we acquired during our financial statements audit and the directors’ 
statement that they consider that the annual report and financial statements taken as a whole is fair, balanced and understandable 
and provides the information necessary for shareholders to assess the Group’s position and performance, business model and strategy; or 
  the section of the annual report describing the work of the Audit Committee does not appropriately address matters communicated 

by us to the Audit Committee; or 

  a corporate governance statement has not been prepared by the company.

We are required to report to you if the Corporate Governance Statement does not properly disclose a departure from the provisions of the 
UK Corporate Governance Code specified by the Listing Rules for our review. 

We have nothing to report in these respects. 

Based solely on our work on the other information described above: 

  with respect to the Corporate Governance Statement disclosures about internal control and risk management systems in relation to 

financial reporting processes and about share capital structures:
 – we have not identified material misstatements therein; and 
 – the information therein is consistent with the financial statements; and 

  in our opinion, the Corporate Governance Statement has been prepared in accordance with relevant rules of the Disclosure Guidance 

and Transparency Rules of the Financial Conduct Authority.

6.  We have nothing to report on the other matters on which we are required to report 

by exception 

Under the Companies Act 2006, we are required to report to you if, in our opinion: 

  adequate accounting records have not been kept by the parent Company, or returns adequate for our audit have not been received from 

branches not visited by us; or 

  the parent Company financial statements and the part of the Directors’ Remuneration Report to be audited are not in agreement with the 

accounting records and returns; or 

  certain disclosures of directors’ remuneration specified by law are not made; or 
  we have not received all the information and explanations we require for our audit.

We have nothing to report in these respects.

81

GOVERNANCEFINANCIAL STATEMENTSANNUAL REPORT AND ACCOUNTS 2020STRATEGIC REPORTIndependent auditor’s report
to the members of Hollywood Bowl Group plc
continued

7. Respective responsibilities 
Directors’ responsibilities
As explained more fully in their statement set out on page 74, the directors are responsible for: the preparation of the financial statements 
including being satisfied that they give a true and fair view; such internal control as they determine is necessary to enable the preparation 
of financial statements that are free from material misstatement, whether due to fraud or error; assessing the Group and parent Company’s 
ability to continue as a going concern, disclosing, as applicable, matters related to going concern; and using the going concern basis of 
accounting unless they either intend to liquidate the Group or the parent Company or to cease operations, or have no realistic alternative 
but to do so.

Auditor’s responsibilities 
Our objectives are to obtain reasonable assurance about whether the financial statements as a whole are free from material misstatement, 
whether due to fraud or other irregularities (see below), or error, and to issue our opinion in an auditor’s report. Reasonable assurance 
is a high level of assurance, but does not guarantee that an audit conducted in accordance with ISAs (UK) will always detect a material 
misstatement when it exists. Misstatements can arise from fraud, other irregularities or error and are considered material if, individually or 
in aggregate, they could reasonably be expected to influence the economic decisions of users taken on the basis of the financial statements. 

A fuller description of our responsibilities is provided on the FRC’s website at www.frc.org.uk/auditorsresponsibilities.

Irregularities – ability to detect
We identified areas of laws and regulations that could reasonably be expected to have a material effect on the financial statements 
from our general commercial and sector experience through discussion with the directors (as required by auditing standards), and from 
inspection of the Group’s regulatory and legal correspondence and discussed with the directors the policies and procedures regarding 
compliance with laws and regulations. We communicated identified laws and regulations throughout our team and remained alert to 
any indications of non-compliance throughout the audit. 

The potential effect of these laws and regulations on the financial statements varies considerably.

Firstly, the Group is subject to laws and regulations that directly affect the financial statements including financial reporting legislation 
(including related companies legislation), distributable profits legislation and taxation legislation, and we assessed the extent of compliance 
with these laws and regulations as part of our procedures on the related financial statement items.

Secondly, the Group is subject to many other laws and regulations where the consequences of non-compliance could have a material 
effect on amounts or disclosures in the financial statements, for instance through the imposition of fines or litigation. We identified the 
following areas as those most likely to have such an effect: data protection, health and safety and employment law recognising the nature 
of the Group’s activities. Auditing standards limit the required audit procedures to identify non-compliance with these laws and regulations 
to enquiry of the directors and inspection of regulatory and legal correspondence, if any. These limited procedures did not identify actual 
or suspected non-compliance.

Owing to the inherent limitations of an audit, there is an unavoidable risk that we may not have detected some material misstatements 
in the financial statements, even though we have properly planned and performed our audit in accordance with auditing standards. 
For example, the further removed non-compliance with laws and regulations (irregularities) is from the events and transactions reflected 
in the financial statements, the less likely the inherently limited procedures required by auditing standards would identify it. In addition, as 
with any audit, there remained a higher risk of non-detection of irregularities, as these may involve collusion, forgery, intentional omissions, 
misrepresentations, or the override of internal controls. We are not responsible for preventing non-compliance and cannot be expected 
to detect non-compliance with all laws and regulations.

8. The purpose of our audit work and to whom we owe our responsibilities 
This report is made solely to the Company’s members, as a body, in accordance with Chapter 3 of Part 16 of the Companies Act 2006. 
Our audit work has been undertaken so that we might state to the Company’s members those matters we are required to state to them 
in an auditor’s report and for no other purpose. To the fullest extent permitted by law, we do not accept or assume responsibility to anyone 
other than the Company and the Company’s members, as a body, for our audit work, for this report, or for the opinions we have formed.

PETER SELVEY
SENIOR STATUTORY AUDITOR 
FOR AND ON BEHALF OF KPMG LLP, STATUTORY AUDITOR 
Chartered Accountants 
58 Clarendon Road 
Watford, WD17 1DE 
14 December 2020

82

HOLLYWOOD BOWL GROUP PLCp84

p85

p86

p87

p88

p112

p113

p113

p114

p119

Consolidated income statement and 
statement of comprehensive income

Consolidated statement of 
financial position

Consolidated statement of changes 
in equity

Consolidated statement of 
cash flows

Notes to the Financial Statements

Company statement of 
financial position

Company statement of changes 
in equity

Company statement of cash flows

Notes to the Company 
Financial Statements

Company information

S
S
S
T
T
T
N
N
N
E
E
E
M
M
M
E
E
E
T
T
T
A
A
A
T
T
T
S
S
S

L
L
L
A
A
A
I
I
I
C
C
C
N
N
N
A
A
A
N
N
N
I
I
I
F
F
F

ANNUAL REPORT AND ACCOUNTS 2020

83

GOVERNANCEFINANCIAL STATEMENTSSTRATEGIC REPORT 
 
 
CONSOLIDATED INCOME STATEMENT AND STATEMENT OF COMPREHENSIVE  INCOME
YEAR ENDING 30 SEPTEMBER 2020

Revenue
Cost of sales

Gross profit
Administrative expenses

Operating profit

  Underlying operating profit
  Exceptional items

Finance income
Finance expenses

Profit before tax
Tax expense

Profit for the year attributable to equity shareholders
Other comprehensive income

Total comprehensive income for the year attributable to 
equity shareholders

Basic earnings per share (pence)
Diluted earnings per share (pence)

The accompanying notes on pages 88 to 111 form an integral part of these Financial Statements.

30 September 
2020 
£’000

30 September 
2019 
£’000

79,473
(11,543)

67,930
(58,069)

9,861

9,861
–

78
(8,743)

1,196
189

1,385
–

1,385

0.90
0.90

129,894
(18,542)

111,352
(82,908)

28,444

28,064
380

167
(1,023)

27,588
(5,303)

22,285
–

22,285

14.86
14.79

Note

 3

6

5

9
9

10

11
11

84

HOLLYWOOD BOWL GROUP PLCCONSOLIDATED STATEMENT OF FINANCIAL  POSITION
AS AT 30 SEPTEMBER 2020

ASSETS
Non-current assets
Property, plant and equipment
Right-of-use assets
Goodwill and intangible assets
Deferred tax asset

Current assets
Cash and cash equivalents
Trade and other receivables
Corporation tax receivable
Inventories

Total assets

LIABILITIES
Current liabilities
Trade and other payables
Lease liabilities
Loans and borrowings
Corporation tax payable

Non-current liabilities
Other payables
Lease liabilities
Loans and borrowings
Deferred tax liabilities
Provisions

Total liabilities

NET ASSETS

Equity attributable to shareholders
Share capital
Share premium
Merger reserve
Retained earnings

TOTAL EQUITY

The accompanying notes on pages 88 to 111 form an integral part of these Financial Statements. 

These Financial Statements were approved by the Board of Directors on 14 December 2020.

Signed on behalf of the Board by:

Laurence Keen
CHIEF FINANCIAL OFFICER
Company Registration Number 10229630

30 September 
2020 
£’000

30 September 
2019 
£’000

Note

12
13
14
22

16
17

18

19
13
21

19
13
21
22
20

23
24
24
24

48,220
135,176
78,173
5,295

266,864

20,784
1,720
285
1,340

24,129

47,365
–
78,457
–

125,822

24,929
8,014
–
1,212

34,155

290,993

159,977

9,940
14,404
5,205
–

29,549

814
159,400
23,833
–
3,903

187,950

217,499

18,464
–
1,380
2,517

22,361

6,846
–
25,383
596
3,150

35,975

58,336

73,494

101,641

1,575
10,466
(49,897)
111,350

1,500
–
(49,897)
150,038

73,494

101,641

85

ANNUAL REPORT AND ACCOUNTS 2020GOVERNANCEFINANCIAL STATEMENTSSTRATEGIC REPORTCONSOLIDATED STATEMENT OF CHANGES IN EQUIT Y 
FOR THE YEAR ENDED 30 SEPTEMBER 2020

Equity at 30 September 2018
Dividends paid
Share-based payments (note 28)
Profit for the period

Equity at 30 September 2019
Adjustment on initial application of IFRS 16 (note 2)
Taxation on IFRS 16 transition adjustment (note 2)

Adjusted balance at 1 October 2019
Shares issued during the year
Dividends paid
Share-based payments (note 28)
Profit for the period

Equity at 30 September 2020

Share 
capital 
£’000

1,500
–
–
–

1,500
–
–

1,500
75
–
–
–

1,575

Share 
premium 
£’000

–
–
–
–

–
–
–

–
10,466
–
–
–

10,466

Merger
 reserve 
£’000

(49,897)
–
–
–

(49,897)
–
–

(49,897)
–
–
–
–

Retained 
earnings 
£’000

143,335
(16,244)
662
22,285

150,038
(31,696)
5,388

123,730
–
(14,489)
724
1,385

(49,897)

111,350

Total 
£’000

94,938
(16,244)
662
22,285

101,641
(31,696)
5,388

75,333
10,541
(14,489)
724
1,385

73,494

The accompanying notes on pages 88 to 111 form an integral part of these Financial Statements.

86

HOLLYWOOD BOWL GROUP PLCCONSOLIDATED STATEMENT OF CASH FLOWS 
FOR THE YEAR ENDED 30 SEPTEMBER 2020

Cash flows from operating activities
Profit before tax
Adjusted by:
Depreciation of Property, plant and equipment
Depreciation of right-of-use assets
Amortisation of intangible assets
Net interest expense
Loss on disposal of property, plant and equipment and software
Share-based payments

Operating profit before working capital changes
(Increase)/decrease in inventories
Decrease/(increase) in trade and other receivables
(Decrease)/increase in payables and provisions

Cash inflow generated from operations
Interest received
Income tax paid – corporation tax
Bank interest paid
Lease interest paid

Net cash inflow from operating activities

Cash flows from investing activities
Purchase of property, plant and equipment
Purchase of intangible assets

Net cash used in investing activities

Cash flows from financing activities
Repayment of bank loan
Drawdown of borrowings
Payment of capital elements of leases
Issue of shares
Dividends paid

Net cash used in financing activities

Net change in cash and cash equivalents for the period
Cash and cash equivalents at the beginning of the period 

Cash and cash equivalents at the end of the period

The accompanying notes on pages 88 to 111 form an integral part of these Financial Statements. 

 30 September 
2020
£’000

 30 September 
2019
£’000

Note

1,196

27,588

12
13
14

16

7,247
12,171
507
8,665
22
724

30,532
(128)
1,727
(5,868)

26,263
85
(3,117)
(943)
(7,770)

14,518

(13,492)
(223)

(13,715)

(1,500)
4,000
(3,500)
10,541
(14,489)

(4,948)

(4,145)
24,929

20,784

9,041
–
502
856
596
662

39,245
42
(1,444)
1,718

39,561
160
(5,518)
(871)
–

33,332

(16,390)
(311)

(16,701)

(1,500)
–
–
–
(16,244)

(17,744)

(1,113)
26,042

24,929

87

ANNUAL REPORT AND ACCOUNTS 2020GOVERNANCEFINANCIAL STATEMENTSSTRATEGIC REPORTNOTES TO THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

1. GENERAL INFORMATION
Hollywood Bowl Group plc (together with its subsidiaries, ‘the Group’) is a public limited company whose shares are publicly traded 
on the London Stock Exchange and is incorporated and domiciled in England and Wales. The registered office of the Parent Company 
is Focus 31, West Wing, Cleveland Road, Hemel Hempstead, HP2 7BW, United Kingdom. The registered Company number is 10229630. 
A list of the Company’s subsidiaries is presented in note 15.

The Group’s principal activities are that of the operation of ten-pin bowling and mini-golf centres as well as the development of new 
centres and other associated activities.

The Directors of the Group are responsible for the consolidated Financial Statements, which comprise the Financial Statements of the 
Company and its subsidiaries as at 30 September 2020.

2. ACCOUNTING POLICIES
The principal accounting policies applied in the consolidated Financial Statements are set out below. These accounting policies have 
been applied consistently to all periods presented in these consolidated Financial Statements, other than the adoption of IFRS 16 Leases 
which became effective for the Group from 1 October 2019. IFRS 16 is a replacement for IAS 17 Leases. There has been a significant 
impact on the Group’s accounting for leases as a result of IFRS 16, the effect of which is set out further down this report. The financial 
information presented is as at and for the financial years ended 30 September 2020 and 30 September 2019.

STATEMENT OF COMPLIANCE
The consolidated Financial Statements have been prepared in accordance with International Financial Reporting Standards as adopted 
by the EU, International Financial Reporting Interpretations Committee (IFRIC) interpretations and with those parts of the Companies 
Act 2006 applicable to companies reporting under EU-IFRS. The functional currency of each entity in the Group is Pounds Sterling. The 
consolidated Financial Statements are presented in Pounds Sterling and all values are rounded to the nearest thousand, except where 
otherwise indicated.

BASIS OF PREPARATION
The consolidated Financial Statements have been prepared on a going concern basis under the historical cost convention.

The Company has elected to prepare its Financial Statements in accordance with FRS 102, the Financial Reporting Standard applicable 
in the UK and Republic of Ireland. On publishing the Parent Company Financial Statements here together with the Group Financial 
Statements, the Company has taken advantage of the exemption in s408 of the Companies Act 2006 not to present its individual income 
statement and statement of comprehensive income and related notes that form a part of these approved Financial Statements.

Judgements made by the Directors, in the application of these accounting policies, that have significant effect on the Financial 
Statements and estimates with a significant risk of material adjustment in the next year are discussed on page 97.

BASIS OF CONSOLIDATION
The consolidated financial information incorporates the Financial Statements of the Company and all of its subsidiary undertakings. 
The Financial Statements of all Group companies are adjusted, where necessary, to ensure the use of consistent accounting policies. 
Acquisitions are accounted for under the acquisition method from the date control passes to the Group. On acquisition, the assets and 
liabilities and contingent liabilities of a subsidiary are measured at their fair values at the date of acquisition. Any excess of the cost of 
acquisition over the fair values of the identifiable net assets acquired is recognised as goodwill.

NEW STANDARDS ADOPTED IN THE YEAR
During the year the Group has adopted IFRS 16 for the first time. The nature and effect of the impact of this are outlined in the leases 
section on page 91. 

EARNINGS PER SHARE
The calculation of earnings per Ordinary share is based on earnings after tax and the weighted average number of Ordinary shares in 
issue during the year.

The adjusted earnings per share figures have also been calculated based on earnings before adjusting items that are significant in nature 
and/or quantum and are considered to be distortive (see notes 5 and 11). These have been presented to provide shareholders with an 
additional measure of the Group’s year-on-year performance.

For diluted earnings per share, the weighted average number of Ordinary shares in issue is adjusted to assume conversion of all dilutive 
potential Ordinary shares. The Group has one type of dilutive potential Ordinary shares, being those unvested shares granted under the 
Long Term Incentive Plans. 

88

HOLLYWOOD BOWL GROUP PLC2. ACCOUNTING POLICIES CONTINUED
STANDARDS ISSUED NOT YET EFFECTIVE
At the date of authorisation of this financial information, certain new standards, amendments and interpretations to existing standards 
applicable to the Group have been published but are not yet effective, and have not been adopted early by the Group. These are  
listed below:

Standard/interpretation

Content

IAS 1 Classification of 
liabilities as current 
or non-current’

In January 2020, the IASB issued amendments to paragraphs 69 to 76 of IAS 1 to specify 
the requirements for classifying liabilities as current or non-current. 

The amendments are not expected to have a material impact on the Group.

IAS 16 Property, plant 
and equipment: 
Proceeds before 
intended use

In May 2020, the IASB issued Property, Plant and Equipment: Proceeds before Intended 
Use, which prohibits entities deducting from the cost of an item of property, plant and 
equipment any proceeds from selling items produced while bringing that asset to the 
location and condition necessary for it to be capable of operating in the manner 
intended by management. 

Applicable for 
financial years 
beginning on/after

 1 October 2023

 1 October 2022

The amendment is not expected to have a material impact on the Group.

IFRS 17 Insurance 
contracts

In May 2017, the IASB issued IFRS 17 Insurance Contracts (IFRS 17), a comprehensive new 
accounting standard for insurance contracts covering recognition and measurement, 
presentation and disclosure. Once effective, IFRS 17 will replace IFRS 4 Insurance 
Contracts (IFRS 4) that was issued in 2005.

1 October 2023

IFRS 3 Reference to 
the conceptual 
framework

The amendment is not expected to have a material impact on the Group.

In May 2020, the IASB issued Amendments to IFRS 3 Business Combinations - Reference 
to the Conceptual Framework.

1 October 2022

The amendment is not expected to have a material impact on the Group.

IAS 37 Onerous 
contracts

In May 2020, the IASB issued amendments to IAS 37 to specify which costs an entity 
needs to include when assessing whether a contract is onerous or loss-making.

1 October 2022

Interest rate 
benchmark reform: 
Phase 2

The amendment is not expected to have a material impact on the Group.

The amendments address issues that might affect IFRS 9, IAS 39, IFRS 7, IFRS 4 and 
IFRS 16 as a result of the reform of an interest rate benchmark.

1 October 2021

The amendment is not expected to have a material impact on the Group.

GOING CONCERN
In assessing the going concern position of the Group for the Consolidated Financial Statements for the year ended 30 September 2020, 
the Directors have considered the Group’s cash flow, liquidity and business activities, as well as the uncertainty caused by the COVID-19 
outbreak. All of the Group’s centres were closed for trade from 20 March 2020 with a phased reopening from 4 August 2020, with the 
majority of the centres reopening on 15 August. At 30 September 2020, the Group had cash balances of £20.8m and undrawn financing 
facilities of £11m.

As part of the review of the potential impact of the COVID-19 outbreak on the Group’s cash flows and liquidity over the next 12 months, 
a base case and multiple downside scenarios were prepared. Under each scenario, mitigating actions are within management control and 
can be initiated as they relate to discretionary spend. The actions include reduced employee costs, maintenance and marketing spend, as 
well as reducing all non-essential and non-committed capital expenditure. The Group also agreed with its lending bank, Lloyds Bank plc, 
to a combination of liquidity-enhancing amendments to its borrowing facility. These include a number of covenant test relaxations and 
waivers, as well as an additional year to extend the current facility out to September 2022.

The base case has FY2021 revenues at levels of between -45 per cent and -15 per cent of FY2020 (five months actual performance and seven 
months budget), excluding the English lockdown in November 2020, closed centres due to local tier trading restrictions, as well as taking into 
account the impact of socially distanced operations. Under this base case scenario, in FY2021 the Group continues to be profitable with 
sufficient liquidity and no covenant breaches.

The most severe downside scenario was prepared using the following key assumptions:

  revenue assumed at 11 percentage points down on the base case for FY2021;
  the centres closed due to local tier trading restrictions that commenced on 2 December 2020, to remain closed until the end of 

February 2021;

  in line with the revenue reduction, reduced employee costs. When centres are forced to close, taking advantage of the CJRS and no 

additional top up pay for centre teams;

  reduced maintenance and marketing spend, as well as reducing all non-essential and non-committed capital expenditure in FY2021; 

and no dividend payments in FY2021.

89

ANNUAL REPORT AND ACCOUNTS 2020GOVERNANCEFINANCIAL STATEMENTSSTRATEGIC REPORTNOTES TO THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 
CONTINUED

2. ACCOUNTING POLICIES CONTINUED
The most severe downside scenario modelled would still provide sufficient liquidity within its cash position, but under this severe 
downside, the TTM Group adjusted EBITDA (pre IFRS 16) loan covenant would be challenged at March 2021. In the event this covenant is 
breached, an extension of this covenant would need to be negotiated with Lloyds Bank plc. The Directors believe this is likely to be attained, 
particularly given the strong cash position of the Group in this scenario being between £18m and £22m, depending on capital expenditure, 
as well as its strong relationship and success on obtaining covenant waivers with its lending bank recently. The Group would also have access 
to £11m in undrawn RCFs. 

Nevertheless in the event of extended lockdown measures impacting the Group's operations, the possibility of a covenant breach at the 
end of March 2021 cannot be discounted, and as such represents a material uncertainty that may cast significant doubt on the Group’s 
ability to continue as a going concern, in which case it maybe unable to realise its assets and discharge its liabilities in the normal course 
of business.

Taking the above and the principal risks faced by the Group into consideration, and the Directors expectation that they could negotiate 
an extension to the covenant should the need arise, the Directors are satisfied that the Group has adequate resources to continue in 
operation for the foreseeable future, a period of at least twelve months from the date of this report. Accordingly, the Group continues 
to adopt the going concern basis in preparing these financial statements.

REVENUE 
Revenue from customers is the total amount receivable by the Group for goods and services supplied, excluding VAT and discounts, 
and excludes amounts collected on behalf of third parties. The Group’s performance obligations in respect of individual revenue streams 
are outlined below.

Revenue arising from bowling and mini golf is recognised when the customer actually plays, with deposits paid in advance being held on 
the balance sheet until that time and then recognised as income. 

Revenue for food and drink is recognised when the product has been transferred to the buyer at the point of sale, which is generally 
when payment is received. 

Revenue for amusements is recognised when the customer plays the amusement machine.

Revenue from customers is disaggregated by major product and service lines, being bowling, mini golf, food and drink, amusements 
and other. Disaggregated revenue from contracts with customers is disclosed in note 3 on page 98.

Given the nature of the Group’s revenue streams, recognition of revenue is not considered to be a significant area of judgement. 

OPERATING SEGMENTS
Operating segments are reported in a manner consistent with the internal reporting provided to the chief operating decision-makers. 
The chief operating decision-makers have been identified as the management team including the Chief Executive Officer and Chief 
Financial Officer.

An operating segment is a component of the Group that engages in business activities from which it may earn revenues and incur 
expenses. The Board considers that the Group’s activity constitutes one operating and one reporting segment, being the provision 
of ten-pin bowling and mini-golf centres entirely in the United Kingdom, as defined under IFRS 8. Management review the performance 
of the Group by reference to total results against budget.

The total profit measures are operating profit and profit after tax for the period, both disclosed on the face of the consolidated income 
statement and statement of comprehensive income. No differences exist between the basis of preparation of the performance measures 
used by management and the figures in the Group’s financial information, as adjusted where appropriate.

EMPLOYEE BENEFITS
(i) Short-term benefits
Wages, salaries, paid annual leave and sick leave, bonuses and non-monetary benefits are accrued in the period in which the associated 
services are rendered by employees of the Group.

(ii) Defined contribution plans
The Group operates a defined contribution pension scheme for employees. The assets of the scheme are held separately from those 
of the Group. The annual contributions payable are charged to the income statement. The Group also contributes to the personal pension 
plans of the Directors.

(iii) Share-based payments
The Group operates equity-settled share-based payment plans for its employees, under which the employees are granted equity 
instruments of Hollywood Bowl Group plc. The fair value of the services received in exchange for the equity instrument is recognised 
as an expense. The total amount expensed is determined by reference to the fair value of the instruments granted, including any market 
performance conditions and excluding the impact of any service and non-performance vesting conditions. 

The cost of equity-settled transactions is recognised together with a corresponding increase in equity, over the period in which 
the performance conditions are fulfilled, ending on the date on which the relevant employees become fully entitled to the award.

90

HOLLYWOOD BOWL GROUP PLC2. ACCOUNTING POLICIES CONTINUED
(iv) Save-As-You-Earn plans
The Group operates two equity-settled SAYE plans. The fair value is calculated at the grant date using the Black-Scholes pricing model. 
The resulting cost is charged to the Group income statement over the vesting period. The value of the charge is adjusted to reflect 
expected and actual levels of vesting.

LEASES
IFRS 16 Leases replaces existing guidance under IAS 17 and introduces a fundamental change to the recognition, measurement, 
presentation and disclosure of leases for lessees. 

The Group adopted IFRS 16 with effect from 1 October 2019. The Group applied the standard using the modified retrospective approach 
and thus comparative information has not been restated and is presented, as previously reported, under IAS 17.

The new standard results in all property and amusement machine leases being recognised on the Statement of Financial Position as, 
from a lessee perspective, there is no longer any distinction between operating and finance leases. Under IFRS 16, an asset is based on 
the right to use a leased item over a long-term period and a financial liability to pay rentals are recognised. The only exceptions are short-
term and low-value leases.

The Group leases properties, which under IAS 17 were classified as a series of operating lease contracts with payments made (net of any 
incentives received from the lessor) charged to profit or loss as arising over the period of the lease.

The Group obtains control over amusement machines using extended credit terms over four years. For financial years up to 30 September 
2019, these were accounted for as property, plant and equipment under IAS 16, with an associated creditor with respect to the extended credit. 
Upon adoption of IFRS 16, the Group has re-assessed the amusement machines contract as meeting the definition of a lease. Accordingly, 
these amusement machines have been accounted for under IFRS 16 from 1 October 2019.

From 1 October 2019, under IFRS 16, leases are recognised as a right-of-use asset with a corresponding lease liability from the date 
at which the leased asset becomes available for use by the Group. 

Right-of-use assets are measured at cost, less any accumulated depreciation and impairment losses, and adjusted for any 
remeasurement of lease liabilities. The cost of right-of-use assets includes the amount of lease liabilities recognised, less any lease 
incentives received. Right-of-use assets are depreciated on a straight-line basis over the shorter of the lease term and the estimated 
useful lives of the assets. 

Lease liabilities are measured at the present value of lease payments to be made over the lease term. The lease payments include fixed 
payments (including in-substance fixed payments) less any lease incentives receivable and variable lease payments that depend on an 
index or a rate. Variable lease payments that do not depend on an index or a rate are recognised as expenses in the period in which the 
event or condition that triggers the payment occurs.

In calculating the present value of lease payments, the Group uses its incremental borrowing rate at the lease commencement date 
because the interest rate implicit in the lease is not readily determinable. After the commencement date, the amount of lease liabilities 
is increased to reflect the accretion of interest and reduced for the lease payments made. In addition, the carrying amount of lease 
liabilities is remeasured if there is a modification, a change in the lease term or a change in the lease payments (e.g. changes to future 
payments resulting from a change in an index or rate used to determine such lease payments).

In applying IFRS 16 for the first time, the Group has used the following practical expedients permitted by the standard:

  Use of a single discount rate to a portfolio of leases with reasonably similar characteristics for amusement machines.
  Short-term leases (leases of less than 12 months) and leases with less than 12 months remaining as at the date of adoption of the new 

standard are not within the scope of IFRS 16.

  Leases for which the asset is of low value (IT equipment and small items of office equipment) are not within the scope of IFRS 16. 
  Exclusion of initial direct costs from the measurement of the right-of-use asset on transition. 
  The use of hindsight in determining the lease term when the contract included options to extend the lease.

On adoption of IFRS 16, the Group recognised lease liabilities in relation to leases previously classified as ‘operating leases’ under 
the principles of IAS 17 Leases. For all leases, these liabilities were measured at the present value of the remaining lease payments, 
discounted using the Group’s incremental borrowing rate as of 1 October 2019, specific to each type of asset. This ranged from 4.05 per 
cent to 5.53 per cent for property leases and 2.90 per cent for amusement machine leases. 

The associated right-of-use assets were measured using the approach set out in IFRS 16.C8(b)(i), whereby right-of-use assets are 
measured at their carrying amount as if the standard had been applied since the lease commencement date, but discounted using the 
Group’s incremental borrowing rate at the date of initial application.

Under IFRS 16, the right-of-use assets are tested for impairment in accordance with IAS 36 Impairment of Assets. This replaces the 
previous requirement to recognise a provision for onerous leases. An impairment assessment of the cash-generating unit (CGU) assets 
was performed on transition at 1 October 2019 with no initial impairment charge identified.

91

ANNUAL REPORT AND ACCOUNTS 2020GOVERNANCEFINANCIAL STATEMENTSSTRATEGIC REPORTNOTES TO THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 
CONTINUED

2. ACCOUNTING POLICIES CONTINUED
The effect of the accounting policy change on the Consolidated Statement of Financial Position at implementation on 1 October 2019 was:

Assets
Property, plant and equipment
Right-of-use assets
Prepayments
Deferred tax asset

Total assets

Liabilities
Lease liabilities – current
Lease liabilities – non-current
Lease incentives – current (within other payables)
Lease incentives – non-current (within other payables)
Rent-free creditor (within accruals)
Amusement machine creditor – current (within other payables)
Amusement machine creditor – non-current (within other payables)

Total liabilities

Retained earnings
Retained earnings – deferred tax

Total retained earnings

As at 30 
September 
2019 
£’000

IFRS 16 
adjustments 
£’000

47,365
–
7,240
–

54,605

–
–
219
2,437
1,269
2,652
3,645

(6,312)
136,337
(4,561)
5,388

130,852

10,965
156,417
(219)
(2,437)
(1,269)
(2,652)
(3,645)

10,222

157,160

As at 
1 October 
2019 
£’000

41,053
136,337
2,679
5,388

185,457

10,965
156,417
–
–
–
–
–

167,382

150,038
–

150,038

(31,696)
5,388

118,342
5,388

(26,308)

123,730

The adoption of IFRS 16 reduced opening retained earnings as at 1 October 2019 by £26.3m.

The table below presents a reconciliation from operating lease commitments disclosed at 30 September 2019 to lease liabilities 
recognised at 1 October 2019:

Operating lease commitments disclosed at 30 September 2019
Increased rent reviews1
Effect of discounting2
Amusement machines3

Lease liabilities recognised as at 1 October 2019

Of which are:
Current lease liabilities
Non-current lease liabilities

Lease liabilities recognised as at 1 October 2019

£’000

245,557
131
(84,527)
6,221

167,382

10,965
156,417

167,382

1  A number of outstanding rent reviews have been finalised since the end of FY19; these were not included in the operating lease commitments disclosed at 

30 September 2019.

2  Previously, disclosures of lease commitments were undiscounted whilst under IFRS 16 lease commitments are discounted based on the Group’s incremental 

borrowing rate.

3  Previously, amusement machines were accounted for under IAS 16 Property, plant and equipment.

During the year ended 30 September 2020, the application of IFRS 16 resulted in increased adjusted EBITDA, as reported in the 
Consolidated Income Statement and Statement of Comprehensive Income, of £15.8m in comparison to treatment under IAS 17 for 
property and IAS 16 for amusement machines. There was an increase to operating profit of £6.5m. The differences have arisen as 
operating lease payments under IAS 17 were replaced by a depreciation charge on right-of-use assets, and adjustments to rent free 
periods and other lease incentives. Profit before taxation therefore decreased by a total of £1.2m with the inclusion of £7.8m of finance 
costs under the new standard.

92

HOLLYWOOD BOWL GROUP PLC2. ACCOUNTING POLICIES CONTINUED
The table below reconciles operating profit between IAS 17 and the new standard, IFRS 16:

Add: Operating lease costs under IAS171

Impact on adjusted EBITDA for the year ended 30 September 2020
Less: Depreciation of right-of-use assets for leases previously recognised as operating leases under IAS 172
Add: Gain on lease surrenders

Impact on operating profit for the year ended 30 September 2020
Less: Finance costs associated with lease liabilities

Impact on profit before tax for the year ended 30 September 2020

£’000

15,840

15,840
(9,300)
6

6,546
(7,770)

(1,224)

1  The Group has applied the practical expedient to all rent concessions that meet the conditions in paragraph 46B of the COVID-19-related rent concessions 

amendment to IFRS 16 published in May 2020 (see further detail below). This figure includes £1.4m of rent savings recognised in profit or loss to reflect changes 
in lease payments that arose as a result of COVID-19-related rent concessions.

2  This is net of £2.9m of depreciation that would have been charged if the amusement machine assets were still accounted for under IAS 16 Property, Plant 

and Equipment.

On application of IFRS 16, there will be no impact on cash flows, except in relation to tax payments. The presentation of cash flows will 
change. Cash flows from operating activities will increase, but this will be offset by an increase in lease capital payments.

Short-term leases and leases of low-value assets 
The Group applies the short-term lease recognition exemption to its short-term leases of machinery and equipment (i.e. those leases 
that have a lease term of 12 months or less from the commencement date and do not contain a purchase option). It also applies the 
lease of low-value assets recognition exemption to leases of office equipment that are considered to be low value. Lease payments 
on short-term leases and leases of low-value assets are recognised as expense on a straight-line basis over the lease term.

Amendments to IFRS 16: COVID-19 Related Rent Concessions 
On 28 May 2020, the IASB issued COVID-19-Related Rent Concessions - amendment to IFRS 16 Leases. The amendments provide relief 
to lessees from applying IFRS 16 guidance on lease modification accounting for rent concessions arising as a direct consequence of the 
COVID-19 pandemic. As a practical expedient, a lessee may elect not to assess whether a COVID-19-related rent concession from a lessor 
is a lease modification. A lessee that makes this election accounts for any change in lease payments resulting from the COVID-19-related 
rent concession the same way it would account for the change under IFRS 16, if the change were not a lease modification.

The practical expedient was adopted by the Group and the impact on the consolidated Financial Statements is outlined in note 13.

PROVISIONS
Provisions are recognised when the Group has a present obligation as a result of a past event, and it is probable that the Group will be 
required to settle that obligation. Provisions are measured at the best estimate of the expenditure required to settle the obligation at the 
end of the reporting period, and are discounted to present value where the effect is material.

DILAPIDATION PROVISION
A provision will be recorded, if as lessee, the Group has a commitment to make good the property at the end of the lease, which would 
be for the cost of returning the leased property to its original state. Changes to the dilapidation provision are recorded in property, plant 
and equipment.

PROPERTY, PLANT AND EQUIPMENT
Property, plant and equipment is stated at historic cost, including expenditure that is directly attributable to the acquired item, 
less accumulated depreciation and impairment losses.

Depreciation is provided to write off the cost of all property, plant and equipment evenly over their expected useful lives, calculated 
at the following rates:

Leasehold property 
Lanes and Pins on strings
Mini-golf courses
Plant and machinery and fixtures, 
fittings and equipment
Pinspotters

  lesser of lease period and 25 years 
  over 30–40 years
  over 15 years
  over 3–25 years

  up to 10 years

The carrying value of the property, plant and equipment is compared to the higher of value-in-use and the fair value less costs to sell.  
If the carrying value exceeds the higher of the value-in-use and fair value less the costs to sell the asset, then the asset is impaired 
and its value reduced by recognising an impairment provision. New centre landlord contributions are offset against leasehold property 
expenditure where the related assets remain the property of the landlord.

Residual values, remaining useful economic lives and depreciation periods and methods are reviewed annually and adjusted  
if appropriate.

93

ANNUAL REPORT AND ACCOUNTS 2020GOVERNANCEFINANCIAL STATEMENTSSTRATEGIC REPORTNOTES TO THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 
CONTINUED

2. ACCOUNTING POLICIES CONTINUED
GOODWILL AND INTANGIBLE ASSETS
Goodwill arising on the acquisition of a subsidiary undertaking is the difference between the fair value of the consideration paid and 
the fair value of the assets and liabilities acquired. Positive goodwill is capitalised. Goodwill is stated at cost less any impairment losses. 
Impairment tests on the carrying value of goodwill are undertaken:

  at the end of the first full financial period following acquisition and at the end of every subsequent financial period; and
  in other periods if events or changes in circumstances indicate that the carrying value may not be recoverable.

Software which is not an integral part of hardware assets is stated at historic cost, including expenditure that is directly attributable 
to the acquired item, less accumulated amortisation and impairment losses.

Amortisation is provided to write off the cost of all intangible assets, except for goodwill, evenly over their expected useful lives, 
calculated at the following rates:

Software 
Hollywood Bowl brand
Trademark 

  over 3 years 
  over 20 years
  over 20 years

The amortisation charge is recognised in administrative expenses in the income statement.

CASH AND CASH EQUIVALENTS
Cash and cash equivalents includes cash held at centres, short-term deposits with banks and other financial institutions, and credit card 
payments received within 72 hours.

INVENTORIES
Inventories are carried at the lower of cost or net realisable value. Net realisable value is calculated based on the revenue from sale in the 
normal course of business less any costs to sell. Due allowance is made for obsolete and slow-moving items.

IMPAIRMENT
(i) Impairment of financial assets
The Group recognises an allowance for expected credit losses (ECLs) on financial assets measured at amortised cost. These are always 
measured at an amount equal to lifetime ECL. The maximum period considered when estimating ECLs is the maximum contractual 
period over which the Group is exposed to credit risk. There is limited exposure to ECLs due to the business model.

ECLs are a probability weighted estimate of credit losses. Credit losses are measured as the present value of all cash shortfalls (i.e. 
the difference between the cash flows due to the entity in accordance with the contract and the cash flows that the Group expects 
to receive). ECLs are discounted at the effective interest rate of the financial asset. 

Loss allowances for financial assets measured at amortised cost are deducted from the gross carrying amount of the assets. 

The gross carrying amount of a financial asset is written off (either partially or in full) to the extent that there is no realistic prospect of 
recovery. This is generally the case when the Group determines that the debtor does not have the assets or sources of income that could 
generate sufficient cash flows to repay the amounts subject to the write-off. However, financial assets that are written off could still be 
subject to enforcement activities in order to comply with the Group’s procedures for recovery of amounts due.

(ii) Impairment of non-financial assets
The carrying values of goodwill and intangible assets are reviewed at the end of each reporting period for impairment. Impairment is 
measured by comparing the carrying values of the assets with their recoverable amounts. 

The recoverable amount of the assets is the higher of the assets’ fair value less costs to sell and their value-in-use, which is measured by 
reference to discounted future cash flows. A sensitivity analysis is also performed (see note 14). An impairment loss is recognised in the 
income statement immediately. 

In respect of assets other than goodwill, and when there is a change in the estimates used to determine the recoverable amount, a 
subsequent increase in the recoverable amount of an asset is treated as a reversal of the previous impairment loss and is recognised 
to the extent of the carrying amount of the asset that would have been determined (net of amortisation and depreciation) had no 
impairment loss been recognised. The reversal is recognised in the income statement immediately.

TAXATION
Tax on the profit or loss for the year comprises current and deferred tax. Tax is recognised in the income statement except to the extent 
that it relates to items recognised directly in equity or other comprehensive income, in which case it is recognised directly in equity or 
other comprehensive income.

Current tax is the expected tax payable or receivable on the taxable income or loss for the year, using tax rates enacted or substantively 
enacted at the balance sheet date, and any adjustment to tax payable in respect of previous years.

94

HOLLYWOOD BOWL GROUP PLC2. ACCOUNTING POLICIES CONTINUED
DEFERRED TAXATION
Deferred tax assets and liabilities are recognised where the carrying amount of an asset or liability in the consolidated statement 
of financial position differs from its tax base, except for differences arising on:

  the initial recognition of goodwill;
  the initial recognition of an asset or liability in a transaction which is not a business combination and at the time of the transaction 

affects neither accounting nor taxable profit; and

  investments in subsidiaries where the Group is able to control the timing of the reversal of the difference and it is probable that the 

difference will not reverse in the foreseeable future.

Recognition of deferred tax assets is restricted to those instances where it is probable that future taxable profit will be available against 
which the asset can be utilised.

The amount of the asset or liability is determined using tax rates that have been enacted or substantively enacted by the balance sheet date 
and are expected to apply when the deferred tax liabilities or assets are settled or recovered. Deferred tax balances are not discounted.

Deferred tax assets and liabilities are offset when the Group has a legally enforceable right to offset current tax assets and liabilities 
and the deferred tax assets and liabilities relate to taxes levied by the same tax authority on either:

  the same taxable Group company; or
  different entities which intend either to settle current tax assets and liabilities on a net basis, or to realise the assets and settle the 
liabilities simultaneously, in each future period in which significant amounts of deferred tax assets and liabilities are expected to be 
settled or recovered.

EQUITY
The following describes the nature and purpose of each reserve within equity:

  share capital: the nominal value of equity shares;
  share premium account: proceeds received in excess to the nominal value of shares issued, net of any transaction costs;
  retained earnings: all other net gains and losses and transactions with owners (e.g. dividends) not recognised elsewhere; and
  merger reserve: represents the excess over nominal value of the fair value consideration for the business combination which arose during 

the Company's IPO listing. This was satisfied by the issue of shares in accordance with s612 of the Companies Act 2006.

FINANCIAL INSTRUMENTS
A financial instrument is any contract that gives rise to a financial asset of one entity and a financial liability or equity instrument of another entity.

(i) Recognition and initial measurement
Trade receivables are initially recognised when they are originated. All other financial assets and financial liabilities are initially recognised when 
the Group becomes a party to the contractual provisions of the instrument. 

On initial recognition, a financial asset is classified as measured at amortised cost, fair value through other comprehensive income (FVOCI) or 
fair value through profit or loss (FVTPL). A financial liability is classified as measured at either amortised cost or FVTPL.

(ii) Classification and subsequent measurement
Financial assets 
Financial assets are not reclassified subsequent to their initial recognition unless the Group changes its business model for managing 
financial assets, in which case all affected financial assets are reclassified on the first day of the first reporting period following the 
change in the business model. 

A financial asset is measured at amortised cost if it meets both of the following conditions and is not designated as at FVTPL:

  it is held within a business model whose objective is to hold assets to collect contractual cash flows; and
  its contractual terms give rise on specified dates to cash flows that are ‘solely payments of principal and interest’ (SPPI) on the principal 

amount outstanding. This assessment is referred to as the SPPI test and is performed at an instrument level.

All financial assets not measured at amortised cost or FVOCI are measured at FVTPL, irrespective of the business model. On initial recognition, 
the Group may irrevocably designate a financial asset that otherwise meets the requirements to be measured at amortised cost or at FVOCI as 
at FVTPL if doing so eliminates or significantly reduces an accounting mismatch that would otherwise arise.

Financial assets: business model assessment
The Group’s business model for managing financial assets refers to how it manages its financial assets in order to generate cash flows. 
The business model determines whether cash flows will result from collecting contractual cash flows, selling the financial assets, or 
both. Financial assets classified and measured at amortised cost are held within a business model with the objective to hold financial 
assets in order to collect contractual cash flows while financial assets classified and measured at fair value through OCI are held within a 
business model with the objective of both holding to collect contractual cash flows and selling. 

95

ANNUAL REPORT AND ACCOUNTS 2020GOVERNANCEFINANCIAL STATEMENTSSTRATEGIC REPORTNOTES TO THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 
CONTINUED

2. ACCOUNTING POLICIES CONTINUED
Financial assets that are held for trading or are managed and whose performance is evaluated on a fair value basis are measured at FVTPL. 

Financial assets: assessment whether contractual cash flows are solely payments of principal and interest
For the purposes of this assessment, ‘principal’ is defined as the fair value of the financial asset on initial recognition. ‘Interest’ is defined 
as consideration for the time value of money and for the credit risk associated with the principal amount outstanding during a particular 
period of time and for other basic lending risks and costs (e.g. liquidity risk and administrative costs), as well as profit margin. 

In assessing whether contractual cash flows are solely payments of principal and interest, the Group considers the contractual terms of 
the instrument. This includes assessing whether the financial asset contains a contractual term that could change the timing or amount 
of contractual cash flows such that it would not meet this condition. In making this assessment, the Group considers:

  contingent events that would change the amount or timing of cash flows;
  terms that may adjust the contractual coupon rate, including variable rate features;
  prepayment and extension features; and
  terms that limit the Group’s claim to cash flows from specified assets (e.g. non-recourse features). 

Financial assets: subsequent measurement and gains and losses

Financial assets at 
FVTPL

These assets are subsequently measured at fair value. Net gains and losses, including any interest or dividend 
income, are recognised in profit or loss.

Financial assets at 
amortised cost

These assets are subsequently measured at amortised cost using the effective interest rate (EIR) method.  
The amortised cost is reduced by impairment losses. Interest income, foreign exchange gains and losses  
and impairment are recognised in profit or loss. Any gain or loss on derecognition is recognised in profit  
or loss.

The Group’s financial assets at amortised cost include trade receivables.

Debt instruments at 
FVOCI

These assets are subsequently measured at fair value. Interest income, calculated using the effective interest 
method, foreign exchange revaluation and impairment losses or reversals are recognised in profit or loss and 
computed in the same manner as for financial assets measured at amortised cost. The remaining fair value 
changes are recognised in OCI. Upon derecognition, the cumulative fair value change recognised in OCI is 
recycled to profit or loss.

Financial liabilities: classification, subsequent measurement and gains and losses 
Financial liabilities are classified as measured at amortised cost or FVTPL. A financial liability is classified as FVTPL if it is classified as 
held for trading, it is a derivative or it is designated as such on initial recognition. Financial liabilities at FVTPL are measured at fair value 
and net gains and losses, including any interest expense, are recognised in profit or loss. All other financial liabilities are recognised 
initially at their fair value and subsequently measured at amortised cost using the effective interest method.

(iii) Derecognition
Financial assets
The Group derecognises a financial asset when the contractual rights to the cash flows from the financial asset expire, or it transfers 
the rights to receive the contractual cash flows in a transaction in which substantially all of the risks and rewards of ownership of the 
financial asset are transferred or in which the Group neither transfers nor retains substantially all of the risks and rewards of ownership 
and it does not retain control of the financial asset.

Financial liabilities
The Group derecognises a financial liability when its contractual obligations are discharged or cancelled, or expire. The Group also 
derecognises a financial liability when its terms are modified and the cash flows of the modified liability are substantially different,  
in which case a new financial liability based on the modified terms is recognised at fair value. 

On derecognition of a financial liability, the difference between the carrying amount extinguished and the consideration paid (including 
any non-cash assets transferred or liabilities assumed) is recognised in profit or loss.

(iv) Offsetting
Financial assets and financial liabilities are offset and the net position presented in the statement of financial position when, and only 
when, the Group currently has a legally enforceable right to set off the amounts and it intends either to settle them on a net basis or to 
realise the asset and settle the liability simultaneously. 

FOREIGN CURRENCY TRANSACTIONS
Transactions in foreign currencies are translated into the functional currency at the exchange rate at the date of the transaction.

Monetary assets and liabilities denominated in foreign currencies are translated into the functional currency at the exchange rate at the 
reporting date.

Exchange gains and losses are included within administrative expenses in the income statement.

96

HOLLYWOOD BOWL GROUP PLC2. ACCOUNTING POLICIES CONTINUED
GOVERNMENT GRANTS
Government grants are recognised where there is reasonable assurance that the grant will be received and all attached conditions will 
be complied with. When the grant relates to an expense item, it is recognised as income on a systematic basis over the periods that the 
related costs, for which it is intended to compensate, are expensed. 

CJRS grant is recognised against staff costs within administrative expenses in the consolidated income statement.

EXCEPTIONAL ITEMS AND OTHER ADJUSTMENTS
Exceptional items and other adjustments are those that in management’s judgement need to be disclosed by virtue of their size, nature and 
incidence, in order to draw the attention of the reader and to show the underlying business performance of the Group more accurately. 
Such items are included within the income statement caption to which they relate and are separately disclosed either in the notes to the 
consolidated Financial Statements or on the face of the consolidated income statement.

ADJUSTED MEASURES
The Group uses a number of non-Generally Accepted Accounting Principles (non-GAAP) financial measures in addition to those reported 
in accordance with IFRS. The Directors believe that these non-GAAP measures, listed below, are important when assessing the underlying 
financial and operating performance of the Group by investors and shareholders. These non-GAAP measures comprise of like-for-like 
revenue growth, net debt, Group adjusted operating cash flow, Group adjusted EBITDA, Group adjusted EBITDA margin, adjusted earnings 
per share and adjusted diluted earnings per share.

Group adjusted EBITDA, Group adjusted EBITDA margin, Group adjusted operating cash flow, adjusted earnings per share and adjusted 
diluted earnings per share are, as appropriate, each stated before exceptional and other adjusting items and the related tax effect of 
these exceptional and other adjusting items, as management do not consider these items when reviewing the underlying performance 
of the Group as a whole. 

A reconciliation between key adjusted and statutory measures is provided on pages 34 and 35 of the Financial review which details the 
impact of exceptional and other adjusted items when comparing to the non-GAAP financial measures in addition to those reported in 
accordance with IFRS.  

SUMMARY OF CRITICAL ACCOUNTING ESTIMATES AND JUDGEMENTS
The preparation of the consolidated Group Financial Statements requires management to make judgements, estimates and assumptions 
in applying the Group’s accounting policies to determine the reported amounts of assets, liabilities, income and expenditure. Actual 
results may differ from these estimates. The estimates and underlying assumptions are reviewed on an ongoing basis, with revisions 
applied prospectively.

Judgements made by the Directors in the application of these accounting policies that have a significant effect on the consolidated 
Group Financial Statements are discussed below.

CRITICAL ACCOUNTING JUDGEMENTS
Determining the incremental borrowing rate used to measure lease liabilities
The Group cannot readily determine the interest rate implicit in the lease therefore, it uses its incremental borrowing rate (IBR) to 
measure lease liabilities. Judgement is applied in determining the components of the IBR used for each lease including risk-free rates, 
the Group's credit risk and any lease specific adjustments.

IBRs depend on the term and start date of the lease. The IBR is determined based on a series of inputs including: the risk-free rate based 
on government bond rates and a credit risk adjustment based on the average credit spread from commercial bank lenders.

KEY SOURCES OF ESTIMATION UNCERTAINTY
The key estimates are discussed below:

Property, plant and equipment and right-of-use asset impairment reviews
Plant and equipment and right-of-use assets are reviewed for impairment when there is an indication that the assets might be impaired 
by comparing the carrying value of the assets with their recoverable amounts. The recoverable amount of an asset or a CGU is typically 
determined based on value-in-use calculations prepared on the basis of management’s assumptions and estimates.

The key assumptions in the value-in-use calculations include growth rates of revenue and expenses, and discount rates. Due to the 
ongoing COVID-19 pandemic, there is an increased level of uncertainty in all of the above assumptions such that a reasonably possible 
change in these assumptions could lead to a material change in the carrying value of the assets.

Further information in respect of the Group’s property, plant and equipment and right-of-use assets is included in notes 12 and 
13 respectively.

97

ANNUAL REPORT AND ACCOUNTS 2020GOVERNANCEFINANCIAL STATEMENTSSTRATEGIC REPORTNOTES TO THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 
CONTINUED

3. SEGMENTAL REPORTING
Management consider that the Group consists of a single segment, and operates within the UK. No single customer provides more than 
ten per cent of the Group’s revenue. Within this one operating segment there are multiple revenue streams which consist of the following:

Bowling
Food and drink
Amusements
Other

4. RECONCILIATION OF OPERATING PROFIT TO GROUP ADJUSTED EBITDA

Operating profit
Depreciation of property, plant and equipment (note 12)
Depreciation of right-of-use assets (note 13)
Amortisation of intangible assets (note 14)
Loss on disposal of property, plant and equipment, right-of-use assets and software (notes 12-14)
EBITDA
Exceptional items (note 5)
Group adjusted EBITDA

30 September 
2020 
£’000
38,542
21,516
18,819
596
79,473

30 September 
2019 
 £’000
64,033
35,044
30,395
422
129,894

30 September 
2020 
£’000

30 September 
2019 
£’000

9,861
7,247
12,171
507
22
29,808
–
29,808

28,444
9,041
–
502
596
38,583
(380)
38,203

Group adjusted EBITDA (earnings before interest, tax, depreciation and amortisation) reflects the underlying trade of the overall business. 
It is calculated as operating profit plus depreciation, amortisation and loss on disposal of property, plant and equipment, right-of-use 
assets and software and any exceptional items. 

Management use Group adjusted EBITDA as a key performance measure of the business and it is considered by management to be a 
measure investors look at to reflect the underlying business.

5. EXCEPTIONAL ITEMS
Exceptional items are disclosed separately in the Financial Statements where the Directors consider it necessary to do so to provide 
further understanding of the financial performance of the Group. They are material items or expenses that have been shown separately 
due to the significance of their nature or amount: 

VAT rebate1

 30 September 
2020 
£’000

 30 September 
2019 
£’000

–

–

380

380

1 

In FY19 the Group was able to make a non-recurring retrospective reclaim in respect of overpaid VAT relating to transaction fees.

6. PROFIT FROM OPERATIONS
Profit from operations includes the following:

Amortisation of intangible assets
Depreciation of property, plant and equipment
Depreciation of right-of-use assets
Operating leases:
– Property
– Other
Loss on disposal of property, plant and equipment, right-of-use assets and software
Loss/(gain) on foreign exchange

Auditor’s remuneration:
– Fees payable for audit of these Financial Statements
Fees payable for other services
– Audit of subsidiaries
– Audit of subsidiaries relating to prior year
– Review of interim Financial Statements
– Other services

98

30 September 
2020 
£’000 

30 September 
2019 
£’000 

507
7,247
12,171

–
50
22
23

155

45
20
–
14

234

502
9,041
–

14,991
50
596
(61)

100

35
–
25
9

169

HOLLYWOOD BOWL GROUP PLC7. STAFF NUMBERS AND COSTS
The average number of employees (including Directors) during the period was as follows:

Directors
Administration
Operations

Total staff

The cost of employees (including Directors) during the period was as follows:

Wages and salaries
Social security costs
Pension costs
Share-based payments (note 28)

Total staff cost

FY20 staff costs includes £8,232,000 (FY19: £nil) of CJRS government grant received.

8. REMUNERATION OF DIRECTORS AND KEY MANAGEMENT PERSONNEL
A) DIRECTORS’ EMOLUMENTS
The Directors’ emoluments and benefits were as follows:

Salaries and bonuses
Pension contributions
Share-based payments (note 28)

Total

30 September 
2020 

30 September 
2019 

6
65
1,970

2,041

6
67
1,996

2,069

30 September 
2020 
£’000

30 September 
2019 
£’000

16,563
1,371
297
695

18,926

28,045
2,072
350
662

31,129

30 September1
2020 
£’000

30 September1
2019 
£’000

912
32
472

1,416

1,393
26
407

1,826

1  This includes two Executive Directors and four (2019: four) Non-Executive Directors.

The aggregate of emoluments of the highest paid Director was £699,000 (2019: £938,000) and company pension contributions of £19,000 
(2019: £15,000) were made to a defined contribution scheme on their behalf.

B) KEY MANAGEMENT PERSONNEL
The Directors and the senior managers of the Group are considered to be the key management personnel of the Group. 
The remuneration of all key management (including Directors) was as follows:

Salaries and bonuses
Pension contributions
Share-based payments

Total

9. FINANCE INCOME AND EXPENSES

Interest on bank deposits
Other interest

Finance income

Interest on bank borrowings
Other interest
Finance costs on lease liabilities
Unwinding of discount on provisions

Finance expense

30 September 
2020 
£’000

30 September 
2019 
£’000

1,265
51
730

2,046

1,847
41
633

2,521

30 September 
2020 
£’000

30 September 
2019 
£’000

78
–

78

904
5
7,770
64

8,743

164
3

167

930
55
–
38

1,023

99

ANNUAL REPORT AND ACCOUNTS 2020GOVERNANCEFINANCIAL STATEMENTSSTRATEGIC REPORTNOTES TO THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 
CONTINUED

10. TAXATION

The tax expense is as follows:
– UK corporation tax
– Adjustment in respect of prior years

Total current tax
Deferred tax:
Origination and reversal of temporary differences 
Effect of changes in tax rates
Adjustment in respect of prior years

Total deferred tax

Total tax (credit)/expense

30 September 
2020 
£’000

30 September 
2019 
£’000

339
(24)

315

39
(546)
3

(504)

(189)

5,134
60

5,194

123
(14)
–

109

5,303

FACTORS AFFECTING CURRENT TAX CHARGE/(CREDIT):
The tax assessed on the profit for the period is different to the standard rate of corporation tax in the UK of 19 per cent 
(30 September 2019: 19 per cent). The differences are explained below:

Profit excluding taxation
Tax using the UK corporation tax rate of 19% (2019: 19%)
Change in tax rate on deferred tax balances
Non-deductible expenses
Tax exempt revenues
Adjustment in respect of prior years

Total tax (credit)/expense included in profit or loss

30 September 
2020 
£’000

30 September 
2019 
£’000

1,196
227
(546)
58
93
(21)

(189)

27,588
5,242
(14)
89
(74)
60

5,303

The Group’s standard tax rate for the year ended 30 September 2020 was 19 per cent (30 September 2019: 19 per cent).

The FY2019 adjustment in respect of prior years for current taxation of £60,000 relates to an Advance Thin Capitalisation Agreement tax 
liability. This was settled with HMRC during the prior year.

At Budget 2020, the government announced that the corporation tax main rate for the years starting 1 April 2020 and 2021 would remain 
at 19 per cent. As such, the rate used to calculate the deferred tax balances as at 30 September 2020 has increased from 17 per cent 
to 19 per cent.

11. EARNINGS PER SHARE
Basic earnings per share is calculated by dividing the profit attributable to equity holders of Hollywood Bowl Group plc by the weighted 
average number of shares outstanding during the year, excluding invested shares held pursuant to Long Term Incentive Plans (note 28). 

Diluted earnings per share is calculated by adjusting the weighted average number of Ordinary shares outstanding to assume conversion 
of all dilutive potential Ordinary shares. During the years ended 30 September 2020 and 30 September 2019, the Group had potentially 
dilutive shares in the form of unvested shares pursuant to Long Term Incentive Plans (note 28).

30 September 
2020 

30 September 
2019 

Basic and diluted
Profit for the year after tax (£’000)
Basic weighted average number of shares in issue for the period (number)
Adjustment for share awards

Diluted weighted average number of shares 

Basic earnings per share (pence)
Diluted earnings per share (pence)

1,385

22,285
153,401,639 150,000,000
676,861

935,738

154,337,377 150,676,861

0.90
0.90

14.86
14.79

ADJUSTED UNDERLYING EARNINGS PER SHARE
Adjusted earnings per share is calculated by dividing adjusted underlying earnings after tax by the weighted average number of shares 
issued during the year.

Adjusted underlying earnings after tax (before exceptional costs) (£’000)
Basic adjusted earnings per share (pence)
Diluted adjusted earnings per share (pence)

100

30 September 
2020 

30 September 
2019 

1,385
0.90
0.90

21,905
14.60
14.54

HOLLYWOOD BOWL GROUP PLC11. EARNINGS PER SHARE CONTINUED
Adjusted underlying earnings after tax is calculated as follows:

Profit before taxation
Exceptional items (note 5)

Adjusted underlying profit before taxation
Add/(less) taxation

Adjusted underlying earnings after tax

12. PROPERTY, PLANT AND EQUIPMENT

30 September 
2020 
£’000

30 September 
2019 
£’000

1,196
–

1,196
189

1,385

27,588
(380)

27,208
(5,303)

21,905

Cost
At 1 October 2018
Additions
Disposals

At 30 September 2019

Adjustment on initial application of IFRS 16 
(note 2)
Additions
Disposals

At 30 September 2020

Accumulated depreciation
At 1 October 2018
Depreciation charge
Disposals

At 30 September 2019

Adjustment on initial application of IFRS 16 
(note 2)
Depreciation charge
Disposals

At 30 September 2020

Net book value

At 30 September 2020

At 30 September 2019
At 30 September 2018

 Long 
leasehold 
property 
£’000

Short 
leasehold 
property 
£’000

Lanes and 
pinspotters
£’000

Amusement 
machines 
£’000

Plant & 
machinery, 
fixtures and 
fittings

1,251
–
(10)

1,241

–
–
(1)

18,311
5,321
(34)

23,598

–
5,125
(71)

8,561
1,594
(85)

10,070

–
2,537
(338)

14,912
2,981
(1,531)

16,362

(16,362)
–
–

25,699
6,751
(3,039)

29,411

–
6,780
(34)

1,240

28,652

12,269

–

36,157

207
48
(10)

245

–
48
(1)

6,492
2,201
(29)

8,664

–
2,417
(70)

3,668
413
(60)

4,021

–
647
(321)

292

11,011

4,347

948

996
1,044

17,641

14,934
11,819

7,922

6,049
4,893

8,173
2,687
(810)

10,050

(10,050)
–
–

–

–

6,312
6,739

9,117
3,692
(2,472)

10,337

–
4,135
(24)

14,448

21,709

19,074
16,582

Total
£’000

68,734
16,647
(4,699)

80,682

(16,362)
14,442
(444)

78,318

27,657
9,041
(3,381)

33,317

(10,050)
7,247
(416)

30,098

48,220

47,365
41,077

Plant & machinery, fixtures and fittings includes £nil (30 September 2019: £1,228,000) of assets in the course of construction, relating to 
the development of new centres.

IMPAIRMENT
Impairment testing is carried out at the CGU level. A CGU is the smallest identifiable group of assets that generates cash inflows that are 
largely independent of the cash inflows from other assets or groups of assets. Each individual centre is considered to be a CGU.

Each CGU is tested for impairment at the balance sheet date if any indicators of impairment have been identified. The UK government 
restrictions implemented as a result of the COVID-19 pandemic are considered an impairment trigger. An initial impairment test was 
performed on all 64 centres. A detailed impairment test based on a base case was then performed on two centres, where the excess 
of value-in-use over the carrying value calculation was sensitive to changes in the key assumptions.

Property, plant and equipment and right-of-use assets for two centres have been tested for impairment by comparing the carrying value 
of each CGU with its recoverable amount determined from value-in-use calculations using cash flow projections based on financial 
budgets approved by the Board covering a three-year period.

Cash flows beyond this three-year period are extrapolated using the estimated growth rates stated in the key assumptions. The key 
assumptions used in the value-in-use calculations are:

Discount rate (pre-tax)
Growth rate (beyond three years)

2020

8.5%
2.0%

2019

8.5%
2.0%

101

ANNUAL REPORT AND ACCOUNTS 2020GOVERNANCEFINANCIAL STATEMENTSSTRATEGIC REPORTNOTES TO THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 
CONTINUED

12. PROPERTY, PLANT AND EQUIPMENT CONTINUED
The base case has FY2021 monthly revenues of between -56 per cent and -15 per cent of FY2020 (five months actual performance and seven 
months budget), excluding the lockdowns in October and November 2020, as well as taking into account the impact of socially distanced 
operations. In line with the revenue reductions the employee costs were reduced, taking advantage of the CJRS and no additional top up 
for centre teams. Maintenance and marketing spend, as well as all non-essential and non-committed capital expenditure were reduced 
in FY2021.

Discount rates reflect management’s estimate of return on capital employed required and assessment of the current market risks. 
This is the benchmark used by management to assess operating performance and to evaluate future capital investment proposals. 
These discount rates are derived from the Group’s weighted average cost of capital. Changes in the discount rates over the years are 
calculated with reference to latest market assumptions for the risk-free rate, equity risk premium and the cost of debt. 

SENSITIVITY TO CHANGES IN ASSUMPTIONS
The estimate of the recoverable amounts associated with the two centres affords reasonable headroom over the carrying value of 
the property, plant and equipment and right-of-use assets under the base case. Management have sensitised the key assumptions 
in the impairment tests of the two centres under the base case. 

A reduction in revenue of six percentage points down on the base case for FY2021 to FY2023 and an increase in the discount rate applied 
to the cash flows of the CGU of one per cent would not cause the carrying value to exceed its recoverable amount. Detailed impairment 
testing for the two centres showed that the growth rate (beyond three years) would need to be -1 per cent per annum for the assets 
recoverable amounts to be equal to the value-in-use calculations. Therefore, management believe that any reasonable possible change 
in the key assumptions would not result in an impairment charge.

13. LEASES
GROUP AS A LESSEE
The Group has lease contracts for property and amusement machines used in its operations. The Group’s obligations under its leases 
are secured by the lessor’s title to the leased assets. The Group is restricted from assigning and subleasing the leased assets. There are 
several lease contracts that include variable lease payments.

The Group also has certain leases of equipment with lease terms of 12 months or less and leases of office equipment with low value. 
The Group applies the ‘short-term lease’ and ‘lease of low-value assets’ recognition exemptions for these leases.

Set out below are the carrying amounts of right-of-use assets recognised and the movements during the period:

Property 
£’000

Amusement 
machines 
£’000

130,227
1,762
–
7,710

139,699

–
9,481
261
–

9,742

6,110
1,995
(443)
–

7,662

–
2,690
–
(247)

2,443

Total 
£’000

136,337
3,757
(443)
7,710

147,361

–
12,171
261
(247)

12,185

129,957

5,219

135,176

–

–

–

Right-of-use assets

Cost
At transition on 1 October 2019
Lease additions
Lease surrenders 
Lease modifications

At 30 September 2020

Accumulated depreciation
At transition on 1 October 2019
Depreciation charge to profit or loss
Depreciation charge to PPE
Lease surrenders

At 30 September 2020

Net book value

At 30 September 2020

At 30 September 2019 

102

HOLLYWOOD BOWL GROUP PLC13. LEASES CONTINUED
Set out below are the carrying amounts of lease liabilities and the movements during the period:

Lease liabilities

At transition on 1 October 2019
Lease additions
Accretion of interest
Lease modifications
Payments1

At 30 September 2020

Current
Non-current

Property 
£’000

161,161
1,762
7,609
7,710
(11,142)

167,100

11,438
155,662

167,100

Amusement 
machines 
£’000

6,221
1,995
161
(203)
(1,470)

6,704

2,966
3,738

6,704

Total 
£’000

167,382
3,757
7,770
7,507
(12,612)

173,804

14,404
159,400

173,804

1  As a result of COVID-19 rent concessions, £3,591,000 of property payments and £1,376,000 of amusement machine payments noted above were deferred 

during the year and are netted off the payments. A further £1,400,000 of rent savings were taken to profit or loss as a credit to variable lease payments within 
administrative expenses.

The maturity analysis of lease liabilities is disclosed in note 30.

The following are the amounts recognised in profit or loss:

Depreciation expense of right-of-use assets
Interest expense on lease liabilities
Expense relating to leases of low-value assets (included in administrative expenses)
Variable lease payments (included in administrative expenses)
COVID-19 rent savings (included in administrative expenses)

Total amount recognised in profit or loss

Variable lease payments relate to revenue-based rent top-ups at three centres.

Impairment testing is carried out as outlined in note 12.

14. GOODWILL AND INTANGIBLE ASSETS

Cost
At 1 October 2018
Additions
Disposals

At 30 September 2019
Additions
Disposals

At 30 September 2020

Accumulated amortisation
At 1 October 2018
Amortisation charge
Disposals

At 30 September 2019
Amortisation charge
Disposals

At 30 September 2020

Net book value

At 30 September 2020

At 30 September 2019
At 30 September 2018

1  This relates to the Hollywood Bowl brand and trademark only.

Goodwill 
£’000

Brand1 
£’000

Trademark1
£’000

Software 
£’000

75,034
–
–

75,034
–
–

75,034

–
–
–

–
–
–

–

75,034

75,034
75,034

3,360
–
–

3,360
–
–

3,360

684
168
–

852
168
–

1,020

2,340

2,508
2,676

798
–
–

798
–
–

798

216
50
–

266
50
–

316

482

532
582

1,455
311
(129)

1,637
223
–

1,860

1,099
284
(129)

1,254
289
–

1,543

317

383
356

2020 
£’000

12,171
7,770
50
110
(1,400)

18,701

Total 
£’000

80,647
311
(129)

80,829
223
–

81,052

1,999
502
(129)

2,372
507
–

2,879

78,173

78,457
78,648

103

ANNUAL REPORT AND ACCOUNTS 2020GOVERNANCEFINANCIAL STATEMENTSSTRATEGIC REPORTNOTES TO THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 
CONTINUED

14. GOODWILL AND INTANGIBLE ASSETS CONTINUED
Impairment testing is carried out at the CGU level on an annual basis. A CGU is the smallest identifiable group of assets that generates 
cash inflows that are largely independent of the cash inflows from other assets or groups of assets. Each individual centre is considered 
to be a CGU. However, for the purposes of testing goodwill for impairment, it is acceptable under IAS 36 to group CGUs, in order 
to reflect the level at which goodwill is monitored by management. The whole Group is considered to be one CGU, for the purposes 
of goodwill impairment test, on the basis of the level at which goodwill is monitored by management and historical allocation 
of goodwill upon acquisition.

The recoverable amount of the CGU is determined based on a value-in-use calculation using cash flow projections based on financial 
budgets approved by the Board covering a three-year period. Cash flows beyond this period are extrapolated using the estimated growth 
rates stated in the key assumptions. The key assumptions used in the value-in-use calculations are:

Discount rate (pre-tax)
Growth rate (beyond three years)

2020

8.5%
2.0%

2019

8.5%
2.0%

As part of the review of the potential impact of the COVID-19 outbreak on the cash flows of the CGU, a base case was prepared. The 
base case has FY2021 monthly revenues of between -56 per cent and -15 per cent of FY2020 (five months actual performance and seven 
months budget), closed centres due to local tier restrictions, as well as taking into account the impact of socially distanced operations. 
In line with the revenue reductions the employee costs were reduced, taking advantage of the CJRS and no additional top up for centre 
teams. Maintenance and marketing spend, as well as all non-essential and non-committed capital expenditure were reduced in FY2021. 
Discount rates reflect management’s estimate of return on capital employed required and assessment of the current market risks. This 
is the benchmark used by management to assess operating performance and to evaluate future capital investment proposals. These 
discount rates are derived from the Group’s weighted average cost of capital. Changes in the discount rates over the years are calculated 
with reference to latest market assumptions for the risk-free rate, equity risk premium and the cost of debt.

SENSITIVITY TO CHANGES IN ASSUMPTIONS
Management have sensitised the key assumptions in the impairment tests of the CGU under the base case scenario. 

The key assumptions used and sensitised were forecast growth rates and the discount rates, which were selected as they are the key 
variable elements of the value-in-use calculation. The combined effect of a reduction in revenue of six percentage points on the base 
case for FY2021 to FY2023, an increase in the discount rate applied to the cash flows of the CGU of one per cent and a reduction of one 
per cent in the growth rate (beyond three years), would reduce the headroom by £176.0m. This scenario would not cause the carrying 
value to exceed its recoverable amount. Therefore, management believe that any reasonable possible change in the key assumptions 
would not result in an impairment charge.

15. INVESTMENT IN SUBSIDIARIES
Hollywood Bowl Group plc’s operating subsidiaries as at 30 September 2020 are as follows:

Name

Direct holding
Kanyeco Limited1, 2 
Hollywood Bowl EBT Limited1, 2 
Indirect holdings
Kendallco Limited1, 2
The Original Bowling Company Limited2
AMF Bowling (Eastleigh) Limited2
MABLE Entertainment Limited2
Milton Keynes Entertainment Limited2
Bowlplex Limited1, 2
Bowlplex European Leisure Limited2
Wessex Support Services Limited2
Wessex Superbowl (Germany) Limited2 
Bowlplex Properties Limited2

Company 
number

Principal activity

Country of incorporation

Percentage of 
ordinary shares 
owned 

09164276
10246573

Investment holding
Dormant

England and Wales
England and Wales

09176418
05163827
06998390
01094660
01807080
01250332
05539281
01513727
03253033
05506380

Investment holding
Ten-pin bowling
Dormant
Dormant
Dormant
Dormant
Dormant
Dormant
Dormant
Dormant

England and Wales
England and Wales
England and Wales
England and Wales
England and Wales
England and Wales
England and Wales
England and Wales
England and Wales
England and Wales

100%
100%

100%
100%
100%
100%
100%
100%
100%
100%
100%
100%

1  These subsidiaries are controlled and consolidated by the Group and the Directors have taken the exemption from having an audit of their Financial Statements for 

the year ended 30 September 2020. This exemption is taken in accordance with section 479A of the Companies Act 2006. 
2  The registered office of these subsidiaries is Focus 31, West Wing, Cleveland Road, Hemel Hempstead, Hertfordshire, HP2 7BW.

104

HOLLYWOOD BOWL GROUP PLC16. CASH AND CASH EQUIVALENTS
For the purpose of the statement of cash flows, cash and cash equivalents comprise the following:

Cash at bank and in hand

17. TRADE AND OTHER RECEIVABLES

Trade receivables
Other receivables
Prepayments 

30 September 
2020
 £’000

30 September 
2019 
£’000

20,784

24,929

30 September 
2020 
£’000

30 September 
2019 
 £’000

143
48
1,529

1,720

734
40
7,240

8,014

Trade receivables have an ECL against them that is immaterial. There were no overdue receivables at the end of any period.

18. INVENTORIES

Goods for resale

Goods bought for resale recognised as a cost of sale amounted to £7,632,000 (2019: £12,172,000).

19. TRADE AND OTHER PAYABLES

Current
Trade payables
Other payables
Accruals and deferred income
Taxation and social security

Total trade and other payables

Non-current
Other payables

30 September 
2020 
£’000

30 September 
2019 
£’000

1,340

1,212

30 September 
2020 
£’000

30 September 
2019 
£’000

2,909
1,251
4,229
1,551

9,940

3,189
3,493
8,735
3,047

18,464

30 September 
2020 
£’000

30 September 
2019 
£’000

814

6,846

Accruals and deferred income includes a staff bonus provision of £410,000 (30 September 2019: £2,913,000). Deferred income includes 
£148,000 (30 September 2019: £472,000) of customer deposits received in advance, all of which is recognised in the income statement 
during the following financial year.

Non-current other payables includes lease incentives received of £nil (30 September 2019: £2,437,000) which were expected to be 
released to the income statement on a straight-line basis over the remaining term of each lease, which ranged from 1 to 25 years. 
In FY2019, this also included extended credit of £4,409,000 from an amusement machine supplier. These are both now accounted 
for as part of IFRS 16 leases (see note 2). 

20. PROVISIONS

Lease dilapidations provision

30 September 
2020 
£’000

30 September 
2019 
£’000

3,903

3,150

105

ANNUAL REPORT AND ACCOUNTS 2020GOVERNANCEFINANCIAL STATEMENTSSTRATEGIC REPORTNOTES TO THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 
CONTINUED

20. PROVISIONS CONTINUED
The dilapidations provision relates to potential rectification costs expected should the Group vacate its retail locations. There are no 
onerous leases within the estate. The movements in the dilapidations provision are summarised below:

As at 30 September 2018
Released during the period
Unwind of discounted amount

As at 30 September 2019
Change in discount rate1
Provided during the year
Unwind of discounted amount

As at 30 September 2020

Dilapidations 
£’000

2,934
178
38

3,150
714
(25)
64

3,903

A provision is made for future expected dilapidation costs on the opening of leasehold properties not covered by the Landlord and Tenant 
Act 1985 (LTA), and is expected to be utilised on lease expiry. This also includes properties covered by the LTA where we may not extend 
the lease, after consideration of the long-term trading and viability of the centre. The provision in the year relates to lease extensions at 9 
centres. The provision release in FY2019 relates to three centres where there has either been a lease extension, a lease change where it is 
now covered by the LTA, or a significant improvement in trade at a centre covered by the LTA meaning the provision is no longer required.

It is not anticipated that the provision will be utilised within the foreseeable future as there are no sites currently earmarked for closure 
that have a dilapidations provision.

1  There was a reduction in the discount rate, from 2.0 per cent at 30 September 2019 to 0.25 per cent at 30 September 2020, used in preparing the dilapidations 

provision for the year ended 30 September 2020. This resulted in an increase in the provision in the period of £714,000 (30 September 2019: £nil), and will unwind 
over the term of the property leases.

21. LOANS AND BORROWINGS

Current
Bank loan

Borrowings (less than 1 year)

Non-current
Bank loan

Borrowings (greater than 1 year)

Total borrowings

Bank borrowings have the following maturity profile:

Due in less than 1 year
Less issue costs

Due 2 to 5 years
Less issue costs

Total borrowings

30 September 
2020 
£’000

30 September 
2019 
£’000

5,205

5,205

23,833

23,833

29,038

1,380

1,380

25,383

25,383

26,763

30 September 
2020 
£’000

30 September 
2019 
£’000

5,500
(295)

5,205
24,000
(167)

29,038

1,500
(120)

1,380
25,500
(117)

26,763

The bank loans are secured by a fixed and floating charge over all assets. The loans carry interest at LIBOR plus a variable margin. 

Loans and borrowings brought forward
Repayment during the year
Drawdown during the year
Issue costs
Amortisation of issue costs

Loans and borrowings carried forward

106

30 September 
2020 
£’000

30 September 
2019 
£’000

26,763
(1,500)
4,000
(350)
125

29,038

28,143
(1,500)
–
–
120

26,763

HOLLYWOOD BOWL GROUP PLC21. LOANS AND BORROWINGS CONTINUED
On 7 May 2020, the Group amended its facility with Lloyds Bank plc to add an additional £10m under the CLBILS. 

On 21 September 2020, the Group extended its £35m facility with Lloyds Bank plc for a further year, resulting in a revised expiry date of 
2 September 2022. The next repayment of £0.3m is due on 31 December 2020 and every six months up to 30 June 2022. The remaining 
balance will be repayable on the expiry date of 2 September 2022.

As at 30 September 2020, the outstanding loan balance, excluding the amortisation of issue costs, was £29,500,000 (30 September 2019: 
£27,000,000). In addition, the Group had an undrawn £1m revolving credit facility and undrawn £10m CLBILS facility at 30 September 
2020 (30 September 2019: £5m undrawn RCF). All loans carry interest at LIBOR plus a margin, which varies in accordance with the ratio of 
net debt divided by EBITDA and cash flow cover. The margin at 30 September 2020 was 2.0 per cent (30 September 2019: 1.75 per cent). 
The Group considers this feature to be a non-financial variable that is specific to a party to the contract and hence not treated as an 
embedded derivative.

During the year, the Group drew down £4m of its RCF facility with Lloyds Bank plc.

The terms of the facility include the following Group financial covenants:
(i) that the ratio of consolidated total net debt to EBITDA in respect of any relevant period shall not exceed 1.25:1 up to 31 March 2020, 
1.50:1 for the quarter ending 30 June 2020, 2.25:1 for the quarter ending 30 September 2020, waived for the quarters ending 31 December 
2020 and 31 March 2021, and 1.50:1 for the quarter ending 30 June 2021 and thereafter; and

(ii) that the ratio of consolidated cash flow to consolidated debt service in respect of any relevant period shall not be less than 1:1 (waived 
for the quarters ending 30 June 2020, 30 September 2020, 31 December 2020 and 31 March 2021).

New covenants were introduced for 31 December 2020 and 31 March 2021:

(i) Liquidity, including balance sheet cash and undrawn RCFs, at least £17m; and
(ii) Trailing twelve month Group adjusted EBITDA pre IFRS 16 a minimum of -£3m.

The Group operated within these covenants during the period and the previous period.

22. DEFERRED TAX ASSETS AND LIABILITIES

Deferred tax assets and liabilities
Deferred tax assets
Deferred tax liabilities

Reconciliation of deferred tax balances
Balance at beginning of period
Deferred tax (charge)/credit for the period
IFRS 16 transition adjustment
Adjustment in respect of prior years

Balance at end of period

The components of deferred tax are:

Deferred tax assets
Fixed assets
Other temporary differences

Deferred tax liabilities
Property, plant and equipment
Intangible assets
Capital gain

30 September 
2020 
£’000

30 September 
2019 
£’000

6,115
(820)

5,295

824
(1,420)

(596)

30 September 
2020 
£’000

30 September 
2019 
£’000

(596)
500
5,388
3

5,295

(487)
(109)
–
–

(596)

30 September 
2020 
£’000

30 September 
2019 
£’000

5,740
375

6,115

(376)
(444)
–

(820)

562
262

824

(446)
(426)
(548)

(1,420)

Deferred tax assets and liabilities are measured using the tax rates that are expected to apply to the periods when the assets are realised 
or liabilities settled, based on tax rates enacted or substantively enacted at 30 September 2020. 

The capital gain relates to a site sold in 2010, where the gain crystallised during the year.

107

ANNUAL REPORT AND ACCOUNTS 2020GOVERNANCEFINANCIAL STATEMENTSSTRATEGIC REPORTNOTES TO THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 
CONTINUED

23. SHARE CAPITAL

Ordinary shares of £0.01 each

30 September 2020

30 September 2019

Shares

£’000

Shares

157,500,000

1,575 150,000,000

£’000

1,500

The share capital of the Group is represented by the share capital of the Parent Company, Hollywood Bowl Group plc. This company was 
incorporated on 13 June 2016 to act as a holding company of the Group. 

During the year 7,500,000 Ordinary shares of £0.01 each were issued at a premium of £10,466,000, which is recorded in the share 
premium account. The net proceeds of the placing will be utilised to provide additional liquidity headroom during this unknown period 
of uncertainty relating to COVID-19.

The Ordinary shares are entitled to dividends. 

24. RESERVES
SHARE PREMIUM
Amount subscribed for share capital in excess of nominal value.

RETAINED EARNINGS
The accumulated net profits and losses of the Group.

MERGER RESERVE
The merger reserve represents the excess over nominal value of the fair value consideration for the business combination which arose 
during the Company’s IPO listing; this was satisfied by the issue of shares in accordance with section 612 of the Companies Act 2006.

25. LEASE COMMITMENTS
The Group had total commitments under non-cancellable operating leases set out below, which in the prior year primarily related to sites 
operating bowling alleys, which are now accounted for under IFRS 16:

Within 1 year
In 2 to 5 years
In over 5 years

30 September 2020

30 September 2019

Land and 
buildings 
£’000

–
–
–

–

Other 
£’000

50
49
–

99

Land and 
buildings 
£’000

15,704
61,778
168,075

245,557

Other  
£’000

50
99
–

149

Lease commitments for land and buildings are now accounted for under IFRS 16 Leases. The Group has contingent lease contracts for eight 
(30 September 2019: four sites). There is a revenue-based rent top-up on these sites. The total charge in the income statement in the current 
year for these top-ups was £110,000 (three sites) (30 September 2019: £234,000 (four sites)). It is anticipated that top-ups totalling £626,000 
will be payable in the year to 30 September 2021, based on current expectations. These have not been included in the above.

26. CAPITAL COMMITMENTS
As at 30 September 2020, the Group had entered into contracts to fit out new and refurbish existing sites for £229,000 (2019: £1,634,000). 
These commitments are expected to be settled in the following financial year.

27. RELATED PARTY TRANSACTIONS
30 SEPTEMBER 2020 AND 30 SEPTEMBER 2019
During the period, and the previous period, there were no transactions with related parties.

28. SHARE-BASED PAYMENTS
LONG-TERM EMPLOYEE INCENTIVE COSTS
The Group operates LTIPs for certain key management. In accordance with IFRS 2 Share Based Payment, the values of the awards are 
measured at fair value at the date of the grant. The exercise price of the LTIPs is equal to the market price of the underlying shares on the 
date of grant. The fair value is determined based on the exercise price and number of shares granted, and is written off on a straight-line 
basis over the vesting period, based on management’s estimate of the number of shares that will eventually vest. 

108

HOLLYWOOD BOWL GROUP PLC28. SHARE-BASED PAYMENTS CONTINUED

A summary of the movement in the LTIPs is outlined below:

Scheme name

Year of grant

Method of 
settlement 
accounting

Outstanding 
at 1 October 
2019

Granted 
during the 
year

Lapsed/
cancelled 
during the 
year

Exercised 
during the 
year

Outstanding 
at 30 
September 
2020

LTIP 2017

LTIP 2018

LTIP 2019 

LTIP 2020 

2017

2018

2019

2020

Equity

Equity

Equity

Equity

428,113

349,087

403,018

–

–

–

–

358,809

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

428,113

349,087

403,018

358,809

Exercisable at 
30 September 
2020

428,113

–

–

–

In accordance with the LTIP schemes outlined in the Group’s Remuneration Policy, the vesting of these awards is conditional upon 
the achievement of an EPS target set at the time of grant, measured at the end of a three-year period ending 30 September 2019, 30 
September 2020, 30 September 2021 and 30 September 2022, and the Executive Directors’ continued employment at the date of vesting.

The awards will vest based on the following adjusted EPS targets:

Adjusted EPS in the final year of the performance period (pence)

LTIP 2017

LTIP 2018

LTIP 2019

LTIP 2020

12.25

13.86

15.19

17.26

Vesting

25%

12.25–13.75

13.86–14.85

15.19–16.28

17.26–18.49

Vesting determined on a straight-line basis

13.75

14.85

16.28

18.49

100%

During the year ended 30 September 2020, 358,809 (30 September 2019: 403,018) share awards were granted under the LTIP. For all LTIPs,  
the Group recognised a charge of £729,829 (30 September 2019: £633,075) and related employer national insurance of £100,716  
(30 September 2019: £87,364).

The following assumptions were used to determine the fair value of the LTIPs granted:

Financial year LTIP granted

Share price at date of grant
Discount rate/dividend yield

2020

2.928
3%

2019

2.320
3%

2018

1.950
3%

2017

1.565
3%

The shares are dilutive for the purposes of calculating diluted earnings per share.

SAVE-AS-YOU-EARN PLAN
On 1 February 2020 Hollywood Bowl Group plc launched its third SAYE, available to all employees of the Group. The SAYEs permit the 
grant to employees of options in respect of Ordinary shares linked to a bank Save-As-You-Earn contract for a term of three years with 
contributions from employees of an amount between £5 and £500 per month. 126 (SAYE 2019: 96) employees took up a total of 117,143 
(2019: 98,817) options with an exercise date of 1 February 2023 and an exercise price of £2.88 (2019: £2.27), being equal to the market price 
of the shares on the date of grant. The options vest if the employee remains in employment by the Group on the exercise date, otherwise 
the options lapse on the date the employee leaves. Employees can opt to leave the SAYE at any time, at which point their options will lapse.

In accordance with IFRS 2 Share-Based Payment, the values of the awards are measured at fair value at the date of the grant. The fair value is 
expensed on a straight-line basis over the vesting period, based on management’s estimate of the number of shares that will eventually vest.

The fair value at grant date is estimated using a Black-Scholes pricing model, taking into account the terms and conditions upon which the 
options were granted. The contractual life of each option granted is three years. The fair value of options granted during the years ended 
30 September 2020, 30 September 2019 and 30 September 2018 was estimated on the date of grant using the following assumptions:

Exercise price:
Dividend yield: 
Expected volatility: 
Risk-free interest rate:
Life of option: 
Anticipated number of options to vest:

SAYE  
2020

£2.88
3.0%
56.1%
0.00%
3 years
60%

SAYE  
2019

SAYE  
2018

£2.27
3.0%
32.1%
0.28%
3 years
50%

£2.06
3.0%
28.3%
0.80%
3 years
40%

The expected volatility is based on the annualised standard deviation of the continuously compounded rates of return on the share over 
a period of time.

The assessed fair value of the options granted during the year ended 30 September 2020 was £0.18 (30 September 2019: £0.39).

For the year ended 30 September 2020, the Group has recognised £5,965 of share-based payment credit in the income statement 
(30 September 2019: expense of £28,707).

The shares are not dilutive for the purposes of calculating diluted earnings per share.

109

ANNUAL REPORT AND ACCOUNTS 2020GOVERNANCEFINANCIAL STATEMENTSSTRATEGIC REPORTNOTES TO THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 
CONTINUED

29. FINANCIAL INSTRUMENTS 
FAIR VALUE HIERARCHY
IFRS 7 requires fair value measurements to be recognised using a fair value hierarchy that reflects the significance of the inputs used  
in the value measurements:

Level 1: inputs are quoted prices in active markets.
Level 2: a valuation that uses observable inputs for the asset or liability other than quoted prices in active markets.
Level 3: a valuation using unobservable inputs (i.e. a valuation technique).

There were no transfers between levels throughout the periods under review.

FAIR VALUES
All financial assets held at the balance sheet date, which comprise trade and other receivables and cash and cash equivalents, are 
classified as financial assets held at amortised cost. All financial liabilities, which comprise trade and other payables and borrowings, are 
classified as financial liabilities held at amortised cost.

The following table shows the fair value of financial assets and financial liabilities within the Group at the balance sheet date. The fair value 
of all financial assets and liabilities are categorised as Level 2.

Financial assets – measured at amortised cost
Cash and cash equivalents 
Trade and other receivables
Financial liabilities – measured at amortised cost
Trade and other payables
Borrowings

30 September 
2020 
£’000

30 September 
2019 
£’000

20,784
191

9,203
29,500

24,929
774

19,607
27,000

There is no difference between the carrying value and fair value of any of the above financial assets and financial liabilities.

30. FINANCIAL RISK MANAGEMENT
The Group’s activities expose it to a variety of financial risks: credit risk, liquidity risk and market risk (fair value interest rate risk, price risk). 

CREDIT RISK
Credit risk refers to the risk that a counterparty will default on its contractual obligations resulting in financial loss to the Group. In order 
to minimise this risk the Group endeavours to deal only with companies which are demonstrably creditworthy. In addition, a significant 
proportion of revenue results from cash transactions. The aggregate financial exposure is continuously monitored. The maximum 
exposure to credit risk is the value of the outstanding amount of trade receivables. Management do not consider that there is any 
concentration of risk within either trade or other receivables. 

The Group held cash and cash equivalents with banks which are rated AA- to AA+ of £19,397,000 at 30 September 2020 (30 September 
2019: £23,170,000). 

The Group considers that its cash and cash equivalents have low credit risk based on the external credit ratings of the counterparties.

Trade receivables have not been impaired as any ECL is deemed to be insignificant. 

LIQUIDITY RISK
Liquidity risk is the risk that the Group will not be able to meet its financial obligations as they fall due. The Group’s approach to managing 
liquidity is to ensure, as far as is possible, that it will always have sufficient liquidity to meet its liabilities when due, under both normal 
and stressed conditions, without incurring unacceptable losses or risking damage to the Group’s reputation.

Cash flow and fair value interest rate risk
The Group’s borrowings are variable rate bank loans. The Directors monitor the Group’s funding requirements and external debt markets 
to ensure that the Group’s borrowings are appropriate to its requirements in terms of quantum, rate and duration. 

The Group currently holds cash balances to provide funding for normal trading activity. The Group also has access to both short-term 
and long-term borrowings to finance individual projects. Trade and other payables are monitored as part of normal management routine.

110

HOLLYWOOD BOWL GROUP PLC30. FINANCIAL RISK MANAGEMENT CONTINUED
The table below summarises the maturity profile of the Group’s financial liabilities:

2020
Trade and other payables
Lease liabilities
Borrowings

2019
Trade and other payables
Lease liabilities
Borrowings

CAPITAL RISK MANAGEMENT
The Group’s capital management objectives are:

Within 1 year 
£’000

1 to 2 years 
£’000

2 to 5 years 
£’000

8,179
14,404
1,184

23,767

14,843
–
2,139

16,982

460
10,713
29,472

40,645

2,650
–
26,097

28,747

354
26,985
–

27,339

1,938
–
–

1,938

More than 
5 years 
£’000

–
121,702
–

121,702

–
–
–

–

Total 
£’000

8,993
173,804
30,656

213,453

19,431
–
28,236

47,667

(i)  to ensure the Group’s ability to continue as a going concern so that it can continue to provide returns for shareholders and benefits 

for other stakeholders; and

(ii) to provide an adequate return to shareholders by pricing products and services commensurate with the level of risk.

To meet these objectives, the Group reviews the budgets and forecasts on a regular basis to ensure there is sufficient capital to meet 
the needs of the Group through to profitability and positive cash flow.

The capital structure of the Group consists of shareholders’ equity as set out in the consolidated statement of changes in equity. 
All working capital requirements are financed from existing cash resources and borrowings.

MARKET RISK
Market risk is the risk that changes in market prices, such as foreign exchange rates, interest rates and equity prices, will affect the 
Group’s income or the value of its holdings of financial instruments. The objective of market risk management is to manage and control 
market risk exposures within acceptable parameters, while optimising the return on risk.

INTEREST RATE RISK
Interest rate risk is the risk that the fair value or future cash flows of a financial instrument will fluctuate because of changes in market 
interest rates. The Group’s exposure to the risk of changes in market interest rates relates primarily to the Group’s long-term debt 
obligations with floating interest rates. 

The Group manages its interest rate risk by entering into interest rate derivatives when it is considered appropriate to do so by 
management. At 30 September 2020 and 30 September 2019, none of the Group’s borrowings were at fixed rates of interest. 

The effect on the profit after tax of a notional one per cent movement in LIBOR is as follows:

Increase in interest rate of 1%
Decrease in interest rate of 1%

31. DIVIDENDS PAID AND PROPOSED

The following dividends were declared and paid by the Group:
Final dividend year ended 30 September 2018 – 4.23p per Ordinary share
Special dividend year ended 30 September 2018 – 4.33p per Ordinary share
Interim dividend year ended 30 September 2019 – 2.27p per Ordinary share
Final dividend year ended 30 September 2019 – 5.16p per Ordinary share
Special dividend year ended 30 September 2019 – 4.50p per Ordinary share

Proposed for approval by shareholders at AGM (not recognised as a liability at 30 September 2020)
Final dividend year ended 30 September 2020 – 0.00p per Ordinary share (2019: 5.16p)
Special dividend year ended 30 September 2020 – 0.00p per Ordinary share (2019: 4.50p)

2020 
£’000

(251)
163

2019 
£’000

(226)
202

30 September 
2020 
£’000

30 September 
2019 
£’000

–
–
–
7,739
6,750

6,344
6,495
3,405
–
–

14,489

16,244

–
–

7,739
6,750

111

ANNUAL REPORT AND ACCOUNTS 2020GOVERNANCEFINANCIAL STATEMENTSSTRATEGIC REPORTCOMPANY STATEMENT OF FINANCIAL POSITION
AS AT 30 SEPTEMBER 2020

30 September 
2020 
£’000

30 September 
2019 
£’000

Note

5
8

6
7

9

10
10

50,644
72,934

50,386
76,081

123,578

126,467

10,304
173
82

10,559

17
134
52

203

134,137

126,670

52,089

52,089

82,048

1,575
10,466
70,007

82,048

40,468

40,468

86,202

1,500
–
84,702

86,202

ASSETS
Non-current assets
Investments
Trade and other receivables

Current assets
Cash and cash equivalents
Deferred tax asset
Trade and other receivables

Total assets

LIABILITIES
Current liabilities
Trade and other payables

Total liabilities

NET ASSETS

Equity attributable to shareholders
Share capital
Share premium
Retained earnings

TOTAL EQUITY

These Financial Statements were approved by the Board of Directors on 14 December 2020.

The accompanying notes on pages 114 to 118 form an integral part of these Financial Statements.

Signed on behalf of the Board

LAURENCE KEEN
CHIEF FINANCIAL OFFICER
Company Registration Number: 10229630

112

HOLLYWOOD BOWL GROUP PLCCOMPANY STATEMENT OF CHANGES IN EQUIT Y
FOR THE YEAR ENDED 30 SEPTEMBER 2020

Equity as at 30 September 2018
Dividends paid
Share-based payments (note 5, 11)
Total comprehensive loss for the period

Equity as at 30 September 2019
Shares issued during the year
Dividends paid
Share based payments (note 5, 11)
Total comprehensive loss for the period

Equity as at 30 September 2020

Share
 capital 
£’000

Share
 premium 
£’000

1,500
–
–
–

1,500
75
–
–
–

1,575

–
–
–
–

–
10,466
–
–
–

10,466

Retained 
earnings 
£’000

101,329
(16,244)
632
(1,015)

84,702
–
(14,489)
730
(936)

70,007

Total 
 £’000

102,829
(16,244)
632
(1,015)

86,202
10,541
(14,489)
730
(936)

82,048

The accompanying notes on pages 114 to 118 form an integral part of these Financial Statements.

COMPANY STATEMENT OF CASH FLOWS
FOR THE YEAR ENDED 30 SEPTEMBER 2020

Cash flows from operating activities
Loss before tax 
Adjusted by:
Share-based payments (note 11)

Operating loss before working capital changes
Decrease/(increase) in trade and other receivables 
(Decrease)/increase in trade and other payables*

Cash inflow generated from operations and net cash inflow from operating activities

Cash flows from financing activities
Issue of shares

Net cash flows used in financing activities

Net change in cash and cash equivalents for the period
Cash and cash equivalents at the beginning of the period

Cash and cash equivalents at the end of the period

*  Dividends paid in year ended 30 September 2020 and 30 September 2019 were paid by a subsidiary undertaking.

The accompanying notes on pages 114 to 118 form an integral part of these Financial Statements.

30 September 
2020
£’000

30 September 
2019
£’000

(976)

(1,093)

472

(504)
3,117
(2,867)

(254)

10,541

10,541

10,287
17

10,304

407

(686)
(3,164)
3,865

15

–

–

15
2

17

113

ANNUAL REPORT AND ACCOUNTS 2020GOVERNANCEFINANCIAL STATEMENTSSTRATEGIC REPORTNOTES TO THE COMPANY FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

1. GENERAL INFORMATION
Hollywood Bowl Group plc is a public limited company which is listed on the London Stock Exchange and is domiciled and incorporated 
in the United Kingdom under the Companies Act 2006. The Company was incorporated on 13 June 2016, registered number 10229630.

2. SUMMARY OF SIGNIFICANT ACCOUNTING POLICIES
A summary of the significant accounting policies is set out below; these have been consistently applied throughout the period.

BASIS OF PREPARATION
The Financial Statements have been prepared in accordance with Financial Reporting Standard 102, the Financial Reporting Standard 
applicable in the UK and Republic of Ireland (FRS 102) as issued in August 2014. The amendments to FRS 102 issued in July 2015 and 
effective immediately have been applied. The functional and presentational currency of the Company is Pounds Sterling. The Financial 
Statements are presented in Pounds Sterling and all values are rounded to the nearest thousand, except where otherwise indicated. 

The Financial Statements have been prepared on a going concern basis under the historical cost convention.

The financial information presented is at and for the years ended 30 September 2020 and 30 September 2019.

As the consolidated Financial Statements of the Company include the equivalent disclosures, the Company has taken the exemptions 
under FRS 102 available in respect of the following disclosures:

  certain disclosures required by FRS 102.26 Share-Based Payment; and
  certain disclosures required by FRS 102.11 Basic Financial Instruments and FRS 102.12 Other Financial Instrument Issues in respect 

of financial instruments not falling within the fair value accounting rules of paragraph 36(4) of Schedule 1.

As permitted by section 408 of the Companies Act 2006, an entity income statement and statement of comprehensive income are not 
included as part of the published consolidated Financial Statements of Hollywood Bowl Group plc. The loss for the financial period dealt 
with in the Financial Statements of the Parent Company is £936,000 (2019: loss £1,015,000).

INVESTMENTS IN SUBSIDIARIES
Investments in subsidiaries are held at cost, which is the fair value of the consideration paid. Investments in subsidiaries are reviewed 
for impairment at the end of each reporting date with any impairment charged to the income statement.

EMPLOYEE BENEFITS
Share-based payments
The Company operates an equity-settled share-based payment plan for its Directors, under which the Directors are granted equity 
instruments of Hollywood Bowl Group plc. The fair value of the services received in exchange for the equity instrument is recognised 
as an expense. The total amount expensed is determined by reference to the fair value of the instruments granted:

  including any market performance conditions; and
  excluding the impact of any service and non-performance vesting conditions.

The cost of equity-settled transactions is recognised together with a corresponding increase in equity, over the period in which 
the performance conditions are fulfilled, ending on the date on which the relevant employees become fully entitled to the award.

FINANCIAL INSTRUMENTS
The Company has elected to apply the provisions of section 11 and section 12 of FRS 102 in full.

114

HOLLYWOOD BOWL GROUP PLC2. SUMMARY OF SIGNIFICANT ACCOUNTING POLICIES CONTINUED
TAXATION
Tax on the profit or loss for the year comprises current and deferred tax. Tax is recognised in the profit and loss account except to 
the extent that it relates to items recognised directly in equity or other comprehensive income, in which case it is recognised directly 
in equity or other comprehensive income. 

Current tax is the expected tax payable or receivable on the taxable income or loss for the year, using tax rates enacted or substantively 
enacted at the balance sheet date, and any adjustment to tax payable in respect of previous years.

DEFERRED TAXATION
Deferred tax is provided on timing differences which arise from the inclusion of income and expenses in tax assessments in periods 
different from those in which they are recognised in the Financial Statements. The following timing differences are not provided for: 
differences between accumulated depreciation and tax allowances for the cost of a fixed asset if and when all conditions for retaining 
the tax allowances have been met; and differences relating to investments in subsidiaries, to the extent that it is not probable that they 
will reverse in the foreseeable future and the reporting entity is able to control the reversal of the timing difference. 

Deferred tax is not recognised on permanent differences arising because certain types of income or expense are non-taxable or are 
disallowable for tax or because certain tax charges or allowances are greater or smaller than the corresponding income or expense. 

Deferred tax is provided in respect of the additional tax that will be paid or avoided on differences between the amount at which an asset 
(other than goodwill) or liability is recognised in a business combination and the corresponding amount that can be deducted or assessed 
for tax. Goodwill is adjusted by the amount of such deferred tax.

Deferred tax is measured at the tax rate that is expected to apply to the reversal of the related difference, using tax rates enacted or 
substantively enacted at the balance sheet date. Deferred tax balances are not discounted. 

Unrelieved tax losses and other deferred tax assets are recognised only to the extent that is it probable that they will be recovered 
against the reversal of deferred tax liabilities or other future taxable profits. 

3. DIRECTORS’ REMUNERATION
The Company has no employees other than the Directors. 

The Directors’ emoluments and benefits were as follows:

Salaries and bonuses
Pension contributions
Share-based payments (note 11)

Total

1  This includes two Executive Directors and four Non-Executive Directors.

30 September1 
2020 
£’000

30 September1
2019 
£’000

912
32
472

1,416

1,393
26
407

1,826

The aggregate of emoluments of the highest paid Director were £699,000 (2019: £938,000) and company pension contributions of £19,000 
(2019: £15,000) were made to a defined contribution scheme on their behalf.

115

ANNUAL REPORT AND ACCOUNTS 2020GOVERNANCEFINANCIAL STATEMENTSSTRATEGIC REPORTNOTES TO THE COMPANY FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 
CONTINUED

4. TAXATION

The tax credit is as follows:
– UK corporation tax

Total current tax
Deferred tax:
Origination and reversal of temporary differences 
Adjustments in respect of prior years
Effect of changes in tax rates

Total deferred tax

Total tax credit

30 September 
2020 
£’000

30 September 
2019 
 £’000

–

–

23
–
16

39

39

–

–

87
–
(9)

78

78

FACTORS AFFECTING CURRENT CHARGE/(CREDIT) 
The tax assessed on the loss for the period is different to the standard rate of corporation tax in the UK of 19 per cent (30 September 2019: 
19 per cent). The differences are explained below:

Loss excluding taxation
Tax using the UK corporation tax rate of 19% (2019: 19%)
Change in tax rate on deferred tax balances
Adjustments in respect of prior years
Non-deductible expenses
Group relief

Total tax credit included in profit or loss

30 September 
2020 
£’000

30 September 
2019 
£’000

(976)
(185)
(16)
–
56
106

(39)

(1,093)
(208)
9
–
(33)
154

(78)

The Group’s standard tax rate for the year ended 30 September 2020 was 19 per cent (30 September 2019: 19 per cent).

At Budget 2020, the government announced that the corporation tax main rate for the years starting 1 April 2020 and 2021 would remain
at 19 per cent. As such, the rate used to calculate the deferred tax balances as at 30 September 2020 has increased from 17 per cent 
to 19 per cent.

5. INVESTMENTS
Investments in subsidiary undertakings are as follows:

At the beginning of the period
Additions

At the end of the period

30 September 
2020 
£’000

30 September
2019
 £’000

50,386
258

50,644

50,161
225

50,386

Details of the investments in subsidiary undertakings are outlined in note 15 to the consolidated Financial Statements.

6. CASH AND CASH EQUIVALENTS
For the purpose of the statement of cash flows, cash and cash equivalents comprise the following:

Cash and cash equivalents

30 September 
2020 
£’000

30 September 
2019 
£’000

10,304

17

116

HOLLYWOOD BOWL GROUP PLC7. DEFERRED TAX ASSET

Deferred tax asset
Deferred taxation asset

Reconciliation of deferred tax balances
Balance at beginning of period
Adjustments in respect of prior years
Deferred tax credit for the period 

Balance at end of period

The components of deferred tax are:

Deferred tax asset

Temporary differences

8. TRADE AND OTHER RECEIVABLES

Current

Other receivables

Non-current

Amounts owed by Group companies

9. TRADE AND OTHER PAYABLES

Amounts owed to Group companies
Trade and other payables
Accruals and deferred income

10. SHARE CAPITAL

Allotted, called up and fully paid
Ordinary shares of £0.01 each

30 September 
2020 
£’000

30 September 
2019
 £’000

173

173

134

134

30 September 
2020
£’000

30 September 
2019 
£’000

134
–
39

173

56
–
78

134

30 September 
2020
£’000

30 September 
2019 
£’000

173

134

30 September 
2020 
£’000

30 September 
2019 
£’000

82

82

52

52

30 September 
2020 
£’000

30 September 
2019 
£’000

72,934

76,081

30 September 
2020 
£’000

30 September 
2019 
£’000

51,447
289
353

52,089

39,544
180
744

40,468

30 September 2020

30 September 2019

Shares

£’000

Shares

£’000

157,500,000

1,575 150,000,000

1,500

During the year 7,500,000 Ordinary shares of £0.01 each were issued at a premium of £10,466,000, which is recorded in the share 
premium account.

117

ANNUAL REPORT AND ACCOUNTS 2020GOVERNANCEFINANCIAL STATEMENTSSTRATEGIC REPORTNOTES TO THE COMPANY FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 
CONTINUED

11. SHARE-BASED PAYMENTS
LONG-TERM EMPLOYEE INCENTIVE COSTS
The Company operates LTIPs for the Directors. The value of the awards is measured at fair value at the date of the grant. The fair value is 
written off on a straight-line basis over the vesting period, based on management’s estimate of the number of shares that will eventually vest. 

A summary of the movement in the LTIPs is outlined below:

Scheme name

Year of grant

LTIP 2017
LTIP 2018
LTIP 2019
LTIP 2020

2017
2018
2019
2020

Method of 
settlement 
accounting

Outstanding 
at 1 October 
2019

Equity
Equity
Equity
Equity

268,370
218,830
273,707
–

Granted 
during 
 the year

–
–
–
221,208

Lapsed/
cancelled 
during the 
year

Exercised 
during the 
year

Outstanding 
at 30 
September 
2020

Exercisable at 
30 September 
2020

–
–
–
–

–
–
–
–

268,370
218,830
273,707
221,208

268,370
–
–
–

In accordance with the LTIP schemes outlined in the Group’s Remuneration Policy, the vesting of these awards is conditional upon the 
achievement of a Group EPS target set at the time of grant, measured at the end of a three-year period ending 30 September 2019, 
30 September 2020, 30 September 2021 and 30 September 2022 and the Executive Directors’ continued employment at the date of vesting.

The awards will vest based on the following adjusted EPS targets:

Adjusted EPS in the final year of the performance period (pence)

LTIP 2017

LTIP 2018

LTIP 2019

LTIP 2020

12.25

13.86

15.19

17.26

Vesting

25%

12.25–13.75

13.86–14.85

15.19–16.28

17.26–18.49

Vesting determined on a straight-line basis

13.75

14.85

16.28

18.49

100%

During the year ended 30 September 2020, 221,208 (30 September 2019: 273,707) share awards were granted under the LTIPs. For all 
LTIPs, the Company recognised a charge of £472,366 (30 September 2019: £406,939) and related employer national insurance of £65,186 
(30 September 2019: £56,158).

The following assumptions were used to determine the fair value of the LTIPs granted:

Financial year LTIP granted

Share price at date of grant
Discount rate/dividend yield

2020

2.928
3%

2019

2.320
3%

2018

1.950
3%

2017

1.565
3%

12. GUARANTEE
The Company has given a guarantee over certain subsidiaries under section 479A of the Companies Act 2006 such that the Financial 
Statements of these subsidiaries for the year ended 30 September 2020 will be exempt from audit (note 15 of the Group Financial Statements).

118

HOLLYWOOD BOWL GROUP PLCCOMPANY INFORMATION

AUDITOR
KPMG LLP
58 Clarendon Road
Watford
WD17 1DE

FINANCIAL ADVISER AND BROKER
Investec
30 Gresham Street
London
EC2V 7QN

HOLLYWOODBOWLGROUP.COM

HOLLYWOOD BOWL GROUP PLC
Focus 31
West Wing
Cleveland Road
Hemel Hempstead
Herts
HP2 7BW

www.hollywoodbowlgroup.com

COMPANY NUMBER
10229630

COMPANY SECRETARY
Prism Cosec
Elder House
St George’s Business Park
207 Brooklands Road
Weybridge
KT13 0TS

E: hollywoodbowl@prismcosec.com

INVESTOR RELATIONS
Tulchan Communications LLP
85 Fleet Street
London
EC4Y 1AE

T: 020 7353 4200
E: hollywoodbowl@tulchangroup.com

REGISTRAR
Link Asset Services
The Registry
34 Beckenham Road
Beckenham
Kent
BR3 4TU

T: 0871 664 0300
E: enquiries@linkgroup.co.uk

119

ANNUAL REPORT AND ACCOUNTS 2020GOVERNANCEFINANCIAL STATEMENTSSTRATEGIC REPORTNOTES

120

HOLLYWOOD BOWL GROUP PLCLakeside Images – Be Inspired Media

Consultancy, design and production
www.luminous.co.uk

Annual Report
produced using

Annual Report
produced using

HOLLYWOODBOWLGROUP.COM